Electronics and communications engineering Books

Book SynopsisBiogas Production covers the most cutting-edge pretreatment processes being used and studied today for the production of biogas. As an increasingly important piece of the energy pie, biogas and other biofuels are being used more and more around the world in every conceivable area of industry and could be a partial answer to the energy problem and the elimination of global warming. This book will highlight the recent advances in the pretreatment and value addition of lignocellulosic wastes (LCW) with the main focus on domestic and agro-industrial residues. Mechanical, physical, and biological treatment systems are brought into perspective. The main value-added products from lignocellulosic wastes are summarized in a manner that pinpoints the most recent trends and the future directions. Physico-chemical and biological treatment systems seem to be the most favored options while biofuels, biodegradable composites, and biosorbents production paint a brTable of ContentsPreface xv Acknowledgements xvii Special Contributor xviii Editor xix List of Contributors xxi 1. Anaerobic Digestion: Pretreatments of Substrates 1 Tanta Forster-Carnetro, Ricardo Isaac, Montserrat Pérez, and Ciarita Schvartz 1.1 Pretreatments in Anaerobic Digestion Process 2 1.2 Physical Pretreatment 6 1.3 Chemical Pretreatment 15 1.4 Biological Pretreatment 17 1.5 Combined Pretreatment 18 1.6 Concluding Note 19 2. Recalcitrance of Lignocellulosic Biomass to Anaerobic Digestion 27 Mohammad J. Taherzadeh and Azam Jeihanipour 2.1 Introduction 27 2.2 Plant Cell Wall Anatomy 28 2.3 Chemistry of Cell Wall Polymers 30 2.4 Molecular Interactions Between Cell Wall Polymers 39 2.5 Plant Cell Wall Molecular Architecture 40 2.6 Recalcitrance of Plant Cell Wall Cellulose 42 2.7 Reduction of Biomass Recalcitrance 46 2.8 Concluding Note 50 3. The Effect of Physical, Chemical, and Biological Pretreatments of Biomass on its Anaerobic Digestibility and Biogas Production 55 Katerina Stamatelatou, Georgia Antonopoulou, loanna Ntaikou, and Gerasimos Lyberatos 3.1 Introduction 56 3.2 Pretreatment Methods for Lignocellulosic Biomass 57 3.3 Pretreatment Methods for Sewage Sludge 77 3.4 Concluding Note 84 4. Application of Ultrasound Pretreatment for Sludge Digestion 91 Show Kuan Yeow and Wong Lai Peng 4.1 Introduction 91 4.2 Anaerobic Digestion 93 4.3 Overview of Pretreatment Methods for Anaerobic Digestion 95 4.4 Fundamental of Ultrasound 100 4.5 Bubbles Dynamic 103 4.6 Effects of Ultrasound 106 4.7 Ultrasound Applications 109 4.8 Ultrasonication for Anaerobic Digesion 116 4.9 Evaluation on Sludge Disintegration 126 4.10 Conclusions 131 5. Microwave Sludge Irradiation 137 Cigdetn Esktctoglu and Giampiero Galvagno 5.1 Introduction 137 5.2 Microwave Theory 139 5.3 Microwave Irradiation for Waste Sludge Treatment 144 5.4 Industrial Microwave Applications 147 5.5 Microwave Absorbing Materials and Ionic Liquids 148 5.6 Sludge Pretreatment Similar to Microwave Irradiation 151 5.7 Concluding Notes 151 6. Hydrolytic Enzymes Enhancing Anaerobic Digestion 157 Teresa Suárez Quiñones, Matthias Plöchl, Katrin Päzolt, Jörn Budde, Robert Kausmann, Edith Nettmann, and Monika Heiermann 6.1 Introduction 158 6.2 Where and How can Enzymes be Applied? 170 6.3 Impact of Enzyme Application 178 6.4 Economic Assessment 191 6.5 Concluding Note 192 7. Oxidizing Agents and Organic Solvents as Pretreatment for Anaerobic Digestion 199 Lise Appels, Jan Van Impe, and Raf Dewil 7.1 Oxidative Pretreatment Methods 199 7.2 Organic Solvents 210 7.3 Concluding Note 212 8. Anaerobic Digestion and Biogas Utilization in Greece: Current Status and Perspectives 215 Avraam Karagiannidis, George Perkoultdts, and Apostólos Malamakts 8.1 Assessment of Existing Biogas Installations 215 8.2 Use of Waste Material for Biogas Production 217 8.3 Feedstock Availability and Agricultural Structures 219 8.4 Purification of Biogas for Insertion in the Natural Gas Grid 224 8.5 Biogas Utilization 226 8.6 Concluding Note 227 9. Original Research: Investigating the Potential of Using Biogas in Cooking Stove in Rodrigues 229 Dinesh Surroop and Osman Dina Bégué 9.1 Energy Crisis and Future Challenges 230 9.2 Case Study of Rodrigues 231 9.3 Rationale of Research Study 233 9.4 Research Methodology 234 9.5 Reactor Design Considerations 241 9.6 Results, Findings and Discussions 247 9.7 Conclusions 257 10. Optimizing and Modeling the Anaerobic Digestion of Lignocellulosic Wastes by Rumen Cultures 259 Zhen-Hu Hu and Han-Qing Yu 10.1 Introduction 260 10.2 Materials and Methods 262 10.3 Optimizing the Anaerobic Digestion of Microwave-Pretreated Cattail by Rumen Cultures 266 10.4 Modeling the Anaerobic Digestion of Cattail by Rumen Cultures 275 10.5 Concluding Note 287 11. Pretreatment of Biocatalyst as Viable Option for Sustained Production of Biohydrogen from Wastewater Treatment 291 S. Venkata Mohan and R. Kannatah Goud 11.1 Introduction 292 11.2 Pretreatment of Biocatalyst 294 11.3 Combined Pretreatment 300 11.4 Influence of Pretreatment on Wastewater Treatment 302 11.5 Microbial Diversity 303 11.6 Summary and Future Scope 304 Acknowledgements 305 References 305 Index 313

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive guide to the design, implementation, and operation of line of sight microwave link systems The microwave Line of Sight (LOS) transport network of any cellular operator requires at least as much planning effort as the cellular infrastructure itself.Trade Review“This practical book provides design and implementation guidelines for LOS (Line of Sight) Microwave Radio Links, which are a technological necessity in the telecommunications industry, offering readers ample case studies and ways to apply and adhere to industry standards.” (ITbriefing.net, 11 September 2012)Table of ContentsPREFACE xix ACRONYMS xxiii 1 INTRODUCTION TO MICROWAVE LOS LINK SYSTEMS 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Historic Evolution of Radio Links 3 1.3 Point-to-Point Fixed Communication Technologies 5 1.4 Field of Application and Use Cases 13 1.5 Basic Structure of a Fixed Service Microwave Link 18 1.6 Spectrum Management Aspects 21 1.7 First Approach to the Design of a Microwave LOS Link 26 1.8 Link Budget Basics 28 1.9 Noise 36 1.10 Interferences 39 2 LOSS AND FADING ASSOCIATED WITH TROPOSPHERE PROPAGATION PHENOMENA 42 2.1 Introduction 42 2.2 Influence of Refraction on Propagation in the Troposphere 43 2.3 Terrain Diffraction Losses: Fresnel Zones 59 2.4 Vegetation Attenuation 60 2.5 Atmospheric Gas and Vapor Absorption 61 2.6 Hydrometeors 62 2.7 Reflection 65 2.8 Distortion due to Propagation Effects 67 3 FREQUENCY PLAN FOR A FIXED SERVICE MICROWAVE LINK 72 3.1 Frequency Planning Overview 72 3.2 Bandwidth and Capacity of a Microwave LOS Link 74 3.3 ITU-R Frequency Plans 79 3.4 Assignment of Radio-frequency Channels 93 3.5 Comments on the Frequency Band Choice 97 4 EQUIPMENT AND SUBSYSTEM TECHNOLOGY ASPECTS: A RADIO LINK DESIGNER APPROACH 100 4.1 Introduction 100 4.2 Basic Block Diagrams 102 4.3 Transport Technologies 107 4.4 Baseband Unit 114 4.5 Modulation and Demodulation 123 4.6 Transceiver Unit 139 4.7 Antenna Coupling Elements 142 4.8 Antennas 147 4.9 Redundancy Arrangements 166 4.10 System Monitoring and Management 171 5 PERFORMANCE OBJECTIVES AND CRITERIA FOR FIXED SERVICE MICROWAVE LINKS 174 5.1 Introduction 174 5.2 Error Performance Objectives and Criteria Based on Recommendation ITU-T G.821 176 5.3 Error Performance Objectives and Criteria Based on Recommendations ITU-T G.826 and ITU-T G.828 179 5.4 Availability Criteria 188 5.5 Availability Objectives for Microwave LOS Links Designed Before 2005 190 5.6 Availability Objectives for Microwave LOS Links Designed After 2005 192 5.7 ITU Error Performance and Availability Usage Guidelines 194 5.8 Degradation due to Interferences 195 6 LINK PATH ENGINEERING 207 6.1 General Considerations on Link Path Engineering 207 6.2 Site Selection Criteria 209 6.3 Digital Terrain Databases 211 6.4 Profile Extraction, Clearance, and Obstructions 212 6.5 Optimum Choice of Antenna Heights 216 7 PROPAGATION CALCULATION METHODS ACCORDING TO ITU-R P SERIES RECOMMENDATIONS 227 7.1 General Considerations on Propagation Calculation Methods 227 7.2 Fading Definition 228 7.3 Reflection on Earth’s Surface 230 7.4 Attenuation Due to Atmospheric Gases 236 7.5 Diffraction Fading 237 7.6 Multipath Flat Fading 245 7.7 Distortion Due to Multipath Propagation Effects Under Clear Sky 250 7.8 Attenuation due to Hydrometeors 255 7.9 Reduction of Cross-Polar Discrimination (XPD) 262 7.10 ITU-R Databases for Tropospheric Propagation Studies 265 8 LINK ENGINEERING ACCORDING TO AVAILABILITY AND ERROR PERFORMANCE CRITERIA 271 8.1 Introduction 271 8.2 Design According to Availability and Error Performance 272 8.3 Microwave LOS Link Design According to Availability Criteria 281 8.4 Microwave LOS Link Design According to Error Performance Objectives 285 8.5 Design in Problematic Propagation Environments 294 8.6 Quality and Availability Calculation Guidelines in Real Links 304 8.7 Interferences 306 8.8 Link Engineering Summary Procedure 319 9 LINK OPERATION AND MONITORING 321 9.1 Introduction 321 9.2 Reference Performance Objectives (RPO) 322 9.3 Bringing into Service (BIS) 325 9.4 Maintenance 328 Bibliography 333 APPENDIX 335 INDEX 378

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe first book of its kind to review the current status and future direction of the exciting new branch of machine learning/data mining called imbalanced learning Imbalanced learning focuses on how an intelligent system can learn when it is provided with imbalanced data. Solving imbalanced learning problems is critical in numerous data-intensive networked systems, including surveillance, security, Internet, finance, biomedical, defense, and more. Due to the inherent complex characteristics of imbalanced data sets, learning from such data requires new understandings, principles, algorithms, and tools to transform vast amounts of raw data efficiently into information and knowledge representation. The first comprehensive look at this new branch of machine learning, this book offers a critical review of the problem of imbalanced learning, covering the state of the art in techniques, principles, and real-world applications. Featuring contributions from experts in botTrade Review“This book certainly qualifies as a reference for graduate studies in machine learning. Research students are sure to find it highly valuable and a prized possession, especially taking into account the wealth of supporting literature that the authors have brought to the fore.” (Computing Reviews, 27 March 2014) Table of ContentsPreface ix Contributors xi 1 Introduction 1Haibo He 1.1 Problem Formulation 1 1.2 State-of-the-Art Research 3 1.3 Looking Ahead: Challenges and Opportunities 6 1.4 Acknowledgments 7 References 8 2 Foundations of Imbalanced Learning 13Gary M. Weiss 2.1 Introduction 14 2.2 Background 14 2.3 Foundational Issues 19 2.4 Methods for Addressing Imbalanced Data 26 2.5 Mapping Foundational Issues to Solutions 35 2.6 Misconceptions About Sampling Methods 36 2.7 Recommendations and Guidelines 38 References 38 3 Imbalanced Datasets: From Sampling to Classifiers 43T. Ryan Hoens and Nitesh V. Chawla 3.1 Introduction 43 3.2 Sampling Methods 44 3.3 Skew-Insensitive Classifiers for Class Imbalance 49 3.4 Evaluation Metrics 52 3.5 Discussion 56 References 57 4 Ensemble Methods for Class Imbalance Learning 61Xu-Ying Liu and Zhi-Hua Zhou 4.1 Introduction 61 4.2 Ensemble Methods 62 4.3 Ensemble Methods for Class Imbalance Learning 66 4.4 Empirical Study 73 4.5 Concluding Remarks 79 References 80 5 Class Imbalance Learning Methods for Support Vector Machines 83Rukshan Batuwita and Vasile Palade 5.1 Introduction 83 5.2 Introduction to Support Vector Machines 84 5.3 SVMs and Class Imbalance 86 5.4 External Imbalance Learning Methods for SVMs: Data Preprocessing Methods 87 5.5 Internal Imbalance Learning Methods for SVMs: Algorithmic Methods 88 5.6 Summary 96 References 96 6 Class Imbalance and Active Learning 101Josh Attenberg and Seyda Ertekin 6.1 Introduction 102 6.2 Active Learning for Imbalanced Problems 103 6.3 Active Learning for Imbalanced Data Classification 110 6.4 Adaptive Resampling with Active Learning 122 6.5 Difficulties with Extreme Class Imbalance 129 6.6 Dealing with Disjunctive Classes 130 6.7 Starting Cold 132 6.8 Alternatives to Active Learning for Imbalanced Problems 133 6.9 Conclusion 144 References 145 7 Nonstationary Stream Data Learning with Imbalanced Class Distribution 151Sheng Chen and Haibo He 7.1 Introduction 152 7.2 Preliminaries 154 7.3 Algorithms 157 7.4 Simulation 167 7.5 Conclusion 182 7.6 Acknowledgments 183 References 184 8 Assessment Metrics for Imbalanced Learning 187Nathalie Japkowicz 8.1 Introduction 187 8.2 A Review of Evaluation Metric Families and their Applicability to the Class Imbalance Problem 189 8.3 Threshold Metrics: Multiple- Versus Single-Class Focus 190 8.4 Ranking Methods and Metrics: Taking Uncertainty into Consideration 196 8.5 Conclusion 204 8.6 Acknowledgments 205 References 205 Index 207

Read more less

Book SynopsisZiemer and Tranter provide a thorough treatment of the principles of communications at the physical layer suitable for college seniors, beginning graduate students, and practicing engineers. This is accomplished by providing overviews of the necessary background in signal, system, probability, and random process theory required for the analog and digital communications topics covered in the book. In addition to stressing fundamental concepts, the seventh edition features sections on important areas such as spread spectrum, cellular communications, and orthogonal frequency-division multiplexing. While the book is aimed at a two-semester course, more than enough material is provided for structuring courses according to students need and instructor preference.Table of ContentsCHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1.1 The Block Diagram of a Communication System 4 1.2 Channel Characteristics 5 1.2.1 Noise Sources 5 1.2.2 Types of Transmission Channels 7 1.3 Summary of Systems-Analysis Techniques 13 1.3.1 Time and Frequency-Domain Analyses 13 1.3.2 Modulation and Communication Theories 13 1.4 Probabilistic Approaches to System Optimization 14 1.4.1 Statistical Signal Detection and EstimationTheory 14 1.4.2 Information Theory and Coding 15 1.4.3 Recent Advances 16 1.5 Preview of This Book 16 Further Reading 16 CHAPTER 2 SIGNAL AND LINEAR SYSTEM ANALYSIS 17 2.1 Signal Models 17 2.1.1 Deterministic and Random Signals 17 2.1.2 Periodic and Aperiodic Signals 18 2.1.3 Phasor Signals and Spectra 18 2.1.4 Singularity Functions 21 2.2 Signal Classifications 24 2.3 Fourier Series 26 2.3.1 Complex Exponential Fourier Series 26 2.3.2 Symmetry Properties of the Fourier Coefficients 27 2.3.3 Trigonometric Form of the Fourier Series 28 2.3.4 Parseval’s Theorem 28 2.3.5 Examples of Fourier Series 29 2.3.6 Line Spectra 30 2.4 The Fourier Transform 34 2.4.1 Amplitude and Phase Spectra 35 2.4.2 Symmetry Properties 36 2.4.3 Energy Spectral Density 37 2.4.4 Convolution 38 2.4.5 Transform Theorems: Proofs and Applications 40 2.4.6 Fourier Transforms of Periodic Signals 48 2.4.7 Poisson Sum Formula 50 2.5 Power Spectral Density and Correlation 50 2.5.1 The Time-Average Autocorrelation Function 51 2.5.2 Properties of 𝑅(𝜏) 52 2.6 Signals and Linear Systems 55 2.6.1 Definition of a Linear Time-Invariant System 56 2.6.2 Impulse Response and the SuperpositionIntegral 56 2.6.3 Stability 58 2.6.4 Transfer (Frequency Response) Function 58 2.6.5 Causality 58 2.6.6 Symmetry Properties of 𝐻(𝑓) 59 2.6.7 Input-Output Relationships for Spectral Densities 62 2.6.8 Response to Periodic Inputs 62 2.6.9 Distortionless Transmission 64 2.6.10 Group and Phase Delay 64 2.6.11 Nonlinear Distortion 67 2.6.12 Ideal Filters 68 2.6.13 Approximation of Ideal Lowpass Filters by Realizable Filters 70 2.6.14 Relationship of Pulse Resolution and Risetime to Bandwidth 75 2.7 Sampling Theory 78 2.8 The Hilbert Transform 82 2.8.1 Definition 82 2.8.2 Properties 83 2.8.3 Analytic Signals 85 2.8.4 Complex Envelope Representation of Bandpass Signals 87 2.8.5 Complex Envelope Representation of Bandpass Systems 89 2.9 The Discrete Fourier Transform and Fast Fourier Transform 91 Further Reading 95 Summary 95 Drill Problems 98 Problems 100 Computer Exercises 111 CHAPTER 3 LINEAR MODULATION TECHNIQUES 112 3.1 Double-Sideband Modulation 113 3.2 Amplitude Modulation (AM) 116 3.2.1 Envelope Detection 118 3.2.2 The Modulation Trapezoid 122 3.3 Single-Sideband (SSB) Modulation 124 3.4 Vestigial-Sideband (VSB) Modulation 133 3.5 Frequency Translation and Mixing 136 3.6 Interference in Linear Modulation 139 3.7 Pulse Amplitude Modulation---PAM 142 3.8 Digital Pulse Modulation 144 3.8.1 Delta Modulation 144 3.8.2 Pulse-Code Modulation 146 3.8.3 Time-Division Multiplexing 147 3.8.4 An Example: The Digital Telephone System 149 Further Reading 150 Summary 150 Drill Problems 151 Problems 152 Computer Exercises 155 CHAPTER 4 ANGLE MODULATION ANDMULTIPLEXING 156 4.1 Phase and Frequency Modulation Defined 156 4.1.1 Narrowband Angle Modulation 157 4.1.2 Spectrum of an Angle-Modulated Signal 161 4.1.3 Power in an Angle-Modulated Signal 168 4.1.4 Bandwidth of Angle-Modulated Signals 168 4.1.5 Narrowband-to-Wideband Conversion 173 4.2 Demodulation of Angle-Modulated Signals 175 4.3 Feedback Demodulators: The Phase-Locked Loop 181 4.3.1 Phase-Locked Loops for FM and PM Demodulation 181 4.3.2 Phase-Locked Loop Operation in the Tracking Mode: The Linear Model 184 4.3.3 Phase-Locked Loop Operation in the Acquisition Mode 189 4.3.4 Costas PLLs 194 4.3.5 Frequency Multiplication and Frequency Division 195 4.4 Interference in Angle Modulation 196 4.5 Analog Pulse Modulation 201 4.5.1 Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) 201 4.5.2 Pulse-Position Modulation (PPM) 203 4.6 Multiplexing 204 4.6.1 Frequency-Division Multiplexing 204 4.6.2 Example of FDM: Stereophonic FM Broadcasting 205 4.6.3 Quadrature Multiplexing 206 4.6.4 Comparison of Multiplexing Schemes 207 Further Reading 208 Summary 208 Drill Problems 209 Problems 210 Computer Exercises 213 CHAPTER 5 PRINCIPLES OF BASEBAND DIGITAL DATATRANSMISSION 215 5.1 Baseband Digital Data Transmission Systems 215 5.2 Line Codes and Their Power Spectra 216 5.2.1 Description of Line Codes 216 5.2.2 Power Spectra for Line-Coded Data 218 5.3 Effects of Filtering of Digital Data---ISI 225 5.4 Pulse Shaping: Nyquist’s Criterion for Zero ISI 227 5.4.1 Pulses Having the Zero ISI Property 228 5.4.2 Nyquist’s Pulse-Shaping Criterion 229 5.4.3 Transmitter and Receiver Filters for Zero ISI 231 5.5 Zero-Forcing Equalization 233 5.6 Eye Diagrams 237 5.7 Synchronization 239 5.8 Carrier Modulation of Baseband Digital Signals 243 Further Reading 244 Summary 244 Drill Problems 245 Problems 246 Computer Exercises 249 CHAPTER 6 OVERVIEW OF PROBABILITY AND RANDOMVARIABLES 250 6.1 What is Probability? 250 6.1.1 Equally Likely Outcomes 250 6.1.2 Relative Frequency 251 6.1.3 Sample Spaces and the Axioms of Probability 252 6.1.4 Venn Diagrams 253 6.1.5 Some Useful Probability Relationships 253 6.1.6 Tree Diagrams 257 6.1.7 Some More General Relationships 259 6.2 Random Variables and Related Functions 260 6.2.1 Random Variables 260 6.2.2 Probability (Cumulative) Distribution Functions 262 6.2.3 Probability-Density Function 263 6.2.4 Joint cdfs and pdfs 265 6.2.5 Transformation of Random Variables 270 6.3 Statistical Averages 274 6.3.1 Average of a Discrete Random Variable 274 6.3.2 Average of a Continuous Random Variable 275 6.3.3 Average of a Function of a Random Variable 275 6.3.4 Average of a Function of More Than One Random Variable 277 6.3.5 Variance of a Random Variable 279 6.3.6 Average of a Linear Combination of 𝑁Random Variables 280 6.3.7 Variance of a Linear Combination of Independent Random Variables 281 6.3.8 Another Special Average---The Characteristic Function 282 6.3.9 The pdf of the Sum of Two Independent Random Variables 283 6.3.10 Covariance and the Correlation Coefficient 285 6.4 Some Useful pdfs 286 6.4.1 Binomial Distribution 286 6.4.2 Laplace Approximation to the Binomial Distribution 288 6.4.3 Poisson Distribution and Poisson Approximation to the Binomial Distribution 289 6.4.4 Geometric Distribution 290 6.4.5 Gaussian Distribution 291 6.4.6 Gaussian 𝑄-Function 295 6.4.7 Chebyshev’s Inequality 296 6.4.8 Collection of Probability Functions and Their Means and Variances 296 Further Reading 298 Summary 298 Drill Problems 300 Problems 301 Computer Exercises 307 CHAPTER 7 RANDOM SIGNALS AND NOISE 308 7.1 A Relative-Frequency Description of Random Processes 308 7.2 Some Terminology of Random Processes 310 7.2.1 Sample Functions and Ensembles 310 7.2.2 Description of Random Processes in Terms of Joint pdfs 311 7.2.3 Stationarity 311 7.2.4 Partial Description of Random Processes: Ergodicity 312 7.2.5 Meanings of Various Averages for Ergodic Processes 315 7.3 Correlation and Power Spectral Density 316 7.3.1 Power Spectral Density 316 7.3.2 The Wiener--Khinchine Theorem 318 7.3.3 Properties of the Autocorrelation Function 320 7.3.4 Autocorrelation Functions for Random Pulse Trains 321 7.3.5 Cross-Correlation Function and Cross-Power Spectral Density 324 7.4 Linear Systems and Random Processes 325 7.4.1 Input-Output Relationships 325 7.4.2 Filtered Gaussian Processes 327 7.4.3 Noise-Equivalent Bandwidth 329 7.5 Narrowband Noise 333 7.5.1 Quadrature-Component and Envelope-Phase Representation 333 7.5.2 The Power Spectral Density Function of 𝑛𝑐(𝑡) and𝑛𝑠(𝑡) 335 7.5.3 Ricean Probability Density Function 338 Further Reading 340 Summary 340 Drill Problems 341 Problems 342 Computer Exercises 348 CHAPTER 8 NOISE IN MODULATION SYSTEMS 349 8.1 Signal-to-Noise Ratios 350 8.1.1 Baseband Systems 350 8.1.2 Double-Sideband Systems 351 8.1.3 Single-Sideband Systems 353 8.1.4 Amplitude Modulation Systems 355 8.1.5 An Estimator for Signal-to-Noise Ratios 361 8.2 Noise and Phase Errors in Coherent Systems 366 8.3 Noise in Angle Modulation 370 8.3.1 The Effect of Noise on the Receiver Input 370 8.3.2 Demodulation of PM 371 8.3.3 Demodulation of FM: Above Threshold Operation 372 8.3.4 Performance Enhancement through the Use ofDe-emphasis 374 8.4 Threshold Effect in FM Demodulation 376 8.4.1 Threshold Effects in FM Demodulators 376 8.5 Noise in Pulse-Code Modulation 384 8.5.1 Postdetection SNR 384 8.5.2 Companding 387 Further Reading 389 Summary 389 Drill Problems 391 Problems 391 Computer Exercises 394 CHAPTER 9 PRINCIPLES OF DIGITAL DATA TRANSMISSIONIN NOISE 396 9.1 Baseband Data Transmission in White Gaussian Noise 398 9.2 Binary Synchronous Data Transmission with Arbitrary Signal Shapes 404 9.2.1 Receiver Structure and Error Probability 404 9.2.2 The Matched Filter 407 9.2.3 Error Probability for the Matched-Filter Receiver 410 9.2.4 Correlator Implementation of the Matched-Filter Receiver 413 9.2.5 Optimum Threshold 414 9.2.6 Nonwhite (Colored) Noise Backgrounds 414 9.2.7 Receiver Implementation Imperfections 415 9.2.8 Error Probabilities for Coherent Binary Signaling 415 9.3 Modulation Schemes not Requiring Coherent References 421 9.3.1 Differential Phase-Shift Keying (DPSK) 422 9.3.2 Differential Encoding and Decoding of Data 427 9.3.3 Noncoherent FSK 429 9.4 M-ary Pulse-Amplitude Modulation (PAM) 431 9.5 Comparison of Digital Modulation Systems 435 9.6 Noise Performance of Zero-ISI Digital Data Transmission Systems 438 9.7 Multipath Interference 443 9.8 Fading Channels 449 9.8.1 Basic Channel Models 449 9.8.2 Flat-Fading Channel Statistics and Error Probabilities 450 9.9 Equalization 455 9.9.1 Equalization by Zero-Forcing 455 9.9.2 Equalization by MMSE 459 9.9.3 Tap Weight Adjustment 463 Further Reading 466 Summary 466 Drill Problems 468 Problems 469 Computer Exercises 476 CHAPTER 10 ADVANCED DATA COMMUNICATIONSTOPICS 477 10.1 M-ary Data Communications Systems 477 10.1.1 M-ary Schemes Based on Quadrature Multiplexing 477 10.1.2 OQPSK Systems 481 10.1.3 MSK Systems 482 10.1.4 M-ary Data Transmission in Terms of Signal Space 489 10.1.5 QPSK in Terms of Signal Space 491 10.1.6 M-ary Phase-Shift Keying 493 10.1.7 Quadrature-Amplitude Modulation (QAM) 495 10.1.8 Coherent FSK 497 10.1.9 Noncoherent FSK 498 10.1.10 Differentially Coherent Phase-Shift Keying 502 10.1.11 Bit Error Probability from Symbol Error Probability 503 10.1.12 Comparison of M-ary Communications Systems on the Basis of Bit Error Probability 505 10.1.13 Comparison of M-ary Communications Systems on the Basis of Bandwidth Efficiency 508 10.2 Power Spectra for Digital Modulation 510 10.2.1 Quadrature Modulation Techniques 510 10.2.2 FSK Modulation 514 10.2.3 Summary 516 10.3 Synchronization 516 10.3.1 Carrier Synchronization 517 10.3.2 Symbol Synchronization 520 10.3.3 Word Synchronization 521 10.3.4 Pseudo-Noise (PN) Sequences 524 10.4 Spread-Spectrum Communication Systems 528 10.4.1 Direct-Sequence Spread Spectrum 530 10.4.2 Performance of DSSS in CW Interference Environments 532 10.4.3 Performance of Spread Spectrum in Multiple User Environments 533 10.4.4 Frequency-Hop Spread Spectrum 536 10.4.5 Code Synchronization 537 10.4.6 Conclusion 539 10.5 Multicarrier Modulation and Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiplexing 540 10.6 Cellular Radio Communication Systems 545 10.6.1 Basic Principles of Cellular Radio 546 10.6.2 Channel Perturbations in Cellular Radio 550 10.6.3 Multiple-Input Multiple-Output (MIMO) Systems---Protection Against Fading 551 10.6.4 Characteristics of 1G and 2G Cellular Systems 553 10.6.5 Characteristics of cdma2000 and W-CDMA 553 10.6.6 Migration to 4G 555 Further Reading 556 Summary 556 Drill Problems 557 Problems 558 Computer Exercises 563 CHAPTER 11 OPTIMUM RECEIVERS AND SIGNAL-SPACECONCEPTS 564 11.1 Bayes Optimization 564 11.1.1 Signal Detection versus Estimation 564 11.1.2 Optimization Criteria 565 11.1.3 Bayes Detectors 565 11.1.4 Performance of Bayes Detectors 569 11.1.5 The Neyman-Pearson Detector 572 11.1.6 Minimum Probability of Error Detectors 573 11.1.7 The Maximum a Posteriori (MAP) Detector 573 11.1.8 Minimax Detectors 573 11.1.9 The M-ary Hypothesis Case 573 11.1.10 Decisions Based on Vector Observations 574 11.2 Vector Space Representation of Signals 574 11.2.1 Structure of Signal Space 575 11.2.2 Scalar Product 575 11.2.3 Norm 576 11.2.4 Schwarz’s Inequality 576 11.2.5 Scalar Product of Two Signals in Terms of Fourier Coefficients 578 11.2.6 Choice of Basis Function Sets---The Gram--Schmidt Procedure 579 11.2.7 Signal Dimensionality as a Function of Signal Duration 581 11.3 Map Receiver for Digital Data Transmission 583 11.3.1 Decision Criteria for Coherent Systems in Terms of Signal Space 583 11.3.2 Sufficient Statistics 589 11.3.3 Detection of𝑀-ary Orthogonal Signals 590 11.3.4 A Noncoherent Case 592 11.4 Estimation Theory 596 11.4.1 Bayes Estimation 596 11.4.2 Maximum-Likelihood Estimation 598 11.4.3 Estimates Based onMultiple Observations 599 11.4.4 Other Properties of ML Estimates 601 11.4.5 Asymptotic Qualities of ML Estimates 602 11.5 Applications of Estimation Theory to Communications 602 11.5.1 Pulse-Amplitude Modulation (PAM) 603 11.5.2 Estimation of Signal Phase: The PLL Revisited 604 Further Reading 606 Summary 607 Drill Problems 607 Problems 608 Computer Exercises 614 CHAPTER 12 INFORMATION THEORY AND CODING 615 12.1 Basic Concepts 616 12.1.1 Information 616 12.1.2 Entropy 617 12.1.3 Discrete Channel Models 618 12.1.4 Joint and Conditional Entropy 621 12.1.5 Channel Capacity 622 12.2 Source Coding 626 12.2.1 An Example of Source Coding 627 12.2.2 Several Definitions 630 12.2.3 Entropy of an Extended Binary Source 631 12.2.4 Shannon--Fano Source Coding 632 12.2.5 Huffman Source Coding 632 12.3 Communication in Noisy Environments: Basic Ideas 634 12.4 Communication in Noisy Channels: Block Codes 636 12.4.1 Hamming Distances and Error Correction 637 12.4.2 Single-Parity-Check Codes 638 12.4.3 Repetition Codes 639 12.4.4 Parity-Check Codes for Single Error Correction 640 12.4.5 Hamming Codes 644 12.4.6 Cyclic Codes 645 12.4.7 The Golay Code 647 12.4.8 Bose--Chaudhuri--Hocquenghem (BCH) Codes and Reed Solomon Codes 648 12.4.9 Performance Comparison Techniques 648 12.4.10 Block Code Examples 650 12.5 Communication in Noisy Channels: Convolutional Codes 657 12.5.1 Tree and Trellis Diagrams 659 12.5.2 The Viterbi Algorithm 661 12.5.3 Performance Comparisons for Convolutional Codes 664 12.6 Bandwidth and Power Efficient Modulation (TCM) 668 12.7 Feedback Channels 672 12.8 Modulation and Bandwidth Efficiency 676 12.8.1 Bandwidth and SNR 677 12.8.2 Comparison of Modulation Systems 678 12.9 Quick Overviews 679 12.9.1 Interleaving and Burst-Error Correction 679 12.9.2 Turbo Coding 681 12.9.3 Source Coding Examples 683 12.9.4 Digital Television 685 Further Reading 686 Summary 686 Drill Problems 688 Problems 688 Computer Exercises 692 APPENDIX A PHYSICAL NOISE SOURCES 693 A.1 Physical Noise Sources 693 A.1.1 Thermal Noise 693 A.1.2 Nyquist’s Formula 695 A.1.3 Shot Noise 695 A.1.4 Other Noise Sources 696 A.1.5 Available Power 696 A.1.6 Frequency Dependence 697 A.1.7 Quantum Noise 697 A.2 Characterization of Noise in Systems 698 A.2.1 Noise Figure of a System 699 A.2.2 Measurement of Noise Figure 700 A.2.3 Noise Temperature 701 A.2.4 Effective Noise Temperature 702 A.2.5 Cascade of Subsystems 702 A.2.6 Attenuator Noise Temperature and Noise Figure 704 A.3 Free-Space Propagation Example 705 Further Reading 708 Problems 708 APPENDIX B JOINTLY GAUSSIAN RANDOM VARIABLES 710 B.1 The pdf 710 B.2 The Characteristic Function 711 B.3 Linear Transformations 711 APPENDIX C PROOF OF THE NARROWBAND NOISEMODEL 712 APPENDIX D ZERO-CROSSING AND ORIGIN ENCIRCLEMENTSTATISTICS 714 D.1 The Zero-Crossing Problem 714 D.2 Average Rate of Zero Crossings 716 Problems 719 APPENDIX E CHI-SQUARE STATISTICS 720 APPENDIX F MATHEMATICAL AND NUMERICAL TABLES 722 F.1 The Gaussian Q-Function 722 F.2 Trigonometric Identities 724 F.3 Series Expansions 724 F.4 Integrals 725 F.4.1 Indefinite 725 F.4.2 Definite 726 F.5 Fourier-Transform Pairs 727 F.6 Fourier-Transform Theorems 727 APPENDIX G ANSWERS TO DRILL PROBLEMS www.wiley.com/college/ziemer BIBLIOGRAPHY www.wiley.com/college/ziemer INDEX 728

Read more less

Book SynopsisHelps you trouble-shoot and solve electrical problems in industrial and commercial settings. This book offers explanations for a wide range of electrical equipment and systems, from transformers and switchgears to alarm and wiring systems. It is packed with illustrations that help you grasp ideas.Table of ContentsIntroduction xiii Disclaimer xv Chapter 1 The Laws That Control and Explain Electricity 1 Power Factor 3 Three-Phase Power 6 Circuit Protective Devices 9 Chapter 2 Power Generation and Distribution Within Commercial and Industrial Facilities 11 Electrical Power Generators 17 Total Loads Served 17 Types of Onsite Power Generation 18 Chapter 3 Power, Control, and Lighting Transformer 21 Electrical Power 24 Insulation Material Temperature Rise 25 Grounding 26 Terminal Connection Markings 26 Three-Phase, Oil–Cooled Power Transformers 26 Three-Phase Dry-Type Transformers 28 Dry-Type Single-Phase Control Circuit Transformers 29 Chapter 4 Electrical Switchgear 31 Motor Control Center 31 Primary Functions of Switchgear 32 Low-Voltage Power Distribution 33 Bus Bar and Circuit Breaker Arrangements 34 Optional Protective Devices 37 Metal-Clad Switchgear 38 Continuous Current Ratings 38 Arc-Resistant Switchgear 39 Chapter 5 Electrical Circuit Protective Devices 41 Molded Case Circuit Breakers 43 Miniature Circuit Breakers 45 Vacuum Circuit Breakers 45 Insulated Case Circuit Breakers 47 Low-voltage Power Circuit Breakers 47 Supplemental Protectors 47 Motor Circuit Protectors 47 Oil Circuit Breakers 48 Gas Insulated Circuit Breakers 48 Fuses 48 Circuit Breaker Maintenance 50 Coordination Between Protective Devices 51 Chapter 6 Personnel Protective Devices 53 Introduction 53 Ground Fault Protection of Equipment 56 History and Nomenclature of GFCIs in the United States 56 Troubleshooting GFCIs 57 Time and Current Levels Protected by Circuit Breakers 58 Arc Fault Circuit Interrupters 59 Chapter 7 Three-Phase Motors 61 Electric Motor Principles of Operation 62 Rated Full Load Speed 66 Service Factor 67 Rated Ambient Temperature 67 Stator Winding Insulation Classes 68 Types of Torque Produced by a Motor 68 Chapter 8 Controlling and Protecting Three-Phase Motors 71 Components of a Motor Starter 71 Motor Starter Sizes 72 Methods of Starting Three-Phase Induction Motors 73 Full Voltage, Across the Line Motor Starters 73 How a Motor Starter Operates 73 Three-Wire Control Circuit Controlling a Three-Phase Motor Starter 76 Sizing of Overload Heater Elements 77 Chapter 9 Variable Frequency Drives 79 Four-Quadrant Operation 80 Torque 80 Parts of a Drive 82 Pulse Width Modulation 84 Six-Step Method of Drive Control 84 Programming Drives 85 Chapter 10 Programmable Logic Controllers 89 Black Box Concept 89 PLC Sizes 92 PLC Construction 92 Types of Inputs and Outputs 92 Timers 95 Counters 96 Benefits of Using PLCs 96 I/Os and Memory Adresses 97 Chapter 11 Electrical Services 99 Metering Equipment 101 Grounding of Electrical Systems 101 Bonding versus Grounding 103 Fault Current Path, Conduits, and Locknuts 103 Low and High Impedance Grounded Systems 104 Ungrounded Electrical Systems 104 Second Ground Fault 106 Separation of the Grounded System Conductor (Neutral) and the Equipment Grounding Conductor 106 What Conductors Must Be Grounded 107 Separately Derived Systems 108 Standard Voltages 108 Chapter 12 Electrical Light Fixtures 111 Aplications for Light Fixtures 112 Design of Lighting Systems 112 Major Types of Lamps Used in Commercial and Industrial Facilities 113 Light Fixture Performance 113 Pattern of Illuminance 114 Types of Glare 116 Illuminating Engineers Society 116 Lamp Selection Parameters 116 Light Fixture Operating Controls 117 Photocells 117 Incandescent Lamps 117 Gas Discharge Lamps 118 Fluorescent Lamps 119 Fluorescent Ballast 119 High-Intensity Discharge Lamps 120 Mercury Vapor Lamps 120 Metal Halide Lamps 120 High-Pressure Sodium Lamps 121 Types of HID Ballasts 121 What Ballasts Do 121 Ballast Voltage Ratings 122 Ballast Wiring Diagrams 122 Chapter 13 Electrical Timers 123 Sections of a Timer 123 Five Common Modes, or Functions,of Timers 125 Nine Types of Timer Operating Principles 126 Timing Chart Levels 129 Complete Timing Charts 133 Chapter 14 Electrical Diagrams 135 Electrical Ladder Diagrams 135 Elements in Electrical Circuits 135 One-Line Diagrams 142 Chapter 15 Electrical Test Instruments 145 Words Used with Meters 145 Multimeters 146 Auto Ranging Meters 147 Three-Step Method 148 Auto Function Features 148 Ohmmeters 149 Meg-Ohmmeter 151 Clamp-On Amp Meters 151 Chapter 16 Electrical Troubleshooting 153 Introduction to Troubleshooting 153 Not Where It Is, but Where It Was Lost 154 Safety First 155 What Tools Are Needed 156 Cause verses Efect 158 A Six-Step Method 158 Chapter 17 Acess, Fire, and Burglar Alarm Systems 163 Facilities Access Control 163 Fire Alarm Systems 164 Alarm Signals 165 System Monitoring 166 Human Machine Interfaces 167 Notification Circuit Voltage Drop 169 Mass Notification Systems 169 Conductors for Fire Alarm Systems 170 Chapter 18 Computer Voice and Data Wiring Systems 171 Introduction 171 Hot Swapping Computer Signal Cables 171 Connecting a Desktop Computer as an Island 172 Connecting a Desktop Computer to a Wired Network 183 Connecting a Desktop Computer to a Wireless Network 184 Types of Computer Networks 186 Telephone Voice Communications Systems Wiring 187 Chapter 19 Reference Material 189 Amperage-Current 189 Capacitance Formulas 192 Conductor Cross-Sectional Area in Circular Mils (CMIL) 193 Direct Current Formulas 193 Fuse Opening Time 196 Heat Produced in a Conductor per Watt 197 Impedance Formulas 197 Impedance of a Conductor in a Conduit 198 kW to Amps 199 kVA to Amps 199 Motor Formulas for Three-Phase AC Motors 199 Motor Formulas 201 Transformer Formulas 213 Requirements of the Driven Load 235 Three Phase Motor Reference Material 343 Index 353

Read more less

Book SynopsisOffers an overview of state of the art passive macromodeling techniques with an emphasis on black-box approaches This book offers coverage of developments in linear macromodeling, with a focus on effective, proven methods.Table of ContentsPreface xix 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Why Macromodeling? 1 1.2 Scope 4 1.3 Macromodeling Flows 6 1.3.1 Macromodeling via Model Order Reduction 6 1.3.2 Macromodeling from Field Solver Data 7 1.3.3 Macromodeling from Measured Responses 8 1.4 Rational Macromodeling 9 1.5 Physical Consistency Requirements 11 1.6 Time-Domain Implementation 15 1.7 An Example 16 1.8 What Can Go Wrong? 17 2 Linear Time-Invariant Circuits and Systems 23 2.1 Basic Definitions 24 2.1.1 Linearity 24 2.1.2 Memory and Causality 26 2.1.3 Time Invariance 26 2.1.4 Stability 27 2.1.5 Passivity 28 2.2 Linear Time-Invariant Systems 28 2.2.1 Impulse Response 29 2.2.2 Properties of LTI Systems 32 2.3 Frequency-Domain Characterizations 33 2.4 Laplace and Fourier Transforms 34 2.4.1 Bilateral Laplace Transform and Transfer Matrices 34 2.4.2 Causal LTI Systems and the Unilateral Laplace Transform 36 2.4.3 Fourier Transform 36 2.5 Signal and System Norms∗ 37 2.5.1 Signal Norms 38 2.5.2 System Norms 41 2.6 Multiport Representations 44 2.6.1 Ports and Terminals 44 2.6.2 Immittance Representations 45 2.6.3 Scattering Representations 46 2.6.4 Reciprocity 48 2.7 Passivity 49 2.7.1 Power and Energy 50 2.7.2 Passivity and Causality 51 2.7.3 The Static Case 52 2.7.4 The Dynamic Case 53 2.7.5 Positive Realness Bounded Realness and Passivity 54 2.7.6 Some Examples 56 2.8 Stability and Causality 59 2.8.1 Laplace-Domain Conditions for Causality 61 2.8.2 Laplace-Domain Conditions for BIBO Stability 62 2.8.3 Causality and Stability 62 2.9 Boundary Values and Dispersion Relations∗ 64 2.9.1 Assumptions 64 2.9.2 Reconstruction of H(s) for s ∈ ℂ+ 65 2.9.3 Reconstruction of H(s) for s ∈ jℝ 65 2.9.4 Causality and Dispersion Relations 67 2.9.5 Generalizations 68 2.10 Passivity Conditions on the Imaginary Axis∗ 70 Problems 71 3 Lumped LTI Systems 73 3.1 An Example from Circuit Theory 74 3.1.1 Variation on a Theme 76 3.1.2 Driving-Point Impedance 77 3.2 State-Space and Descriptor Forms 77 3.2.1 Singular Descriptor Forms 77 3.2.2 Internal Representations of Lumped LTI Systems 79 3.3 The Zero-Input Response 80 3.4 Internal Stability 81 3.4.1 Lyapunov Stability 81 3.4.2 Internal Stability of LTI Systems 83 3.5 The Lyapunov Equation 84 3.6 The Zero-State Response 87 3.6.1 Impulse Response 88 3.7 Operations on State-Space Systems 89 3.7.1 Interconnections 90 3.7.2 Inversion 91 3.7.3 Similarity Transformations 91 3.8 Gramians 91 3.8.1 Observability 92 3.8.2 Controllability 93 3.8.3 Minimal Realizations 95 3.9 Reciprocal State-Space Systems 95 3.10 Norms 97 3.10.1 L2 Norm 98 3.10.2 H∞ Norm 99 Problems 100 4 Distributed LTI Systems 103 4.1 One-Dimensional Distributed Circuits 104 4.1.1 The Discrete-Space Case 104 4.1.2 The Continuous-Space Case 106 4.1.3 Discussion 109 4.2 Two-Dimensional Distributed Circuits∗ 111 4.2.1 The Discrete-Space Case 112 4.2.2 The Continuous-Space Case 114 4.2.3 A Closed-Form Solution 116 4.2.4 Spatial Discretization 118 4.2.5 Discussion 120 4.3 General Electromagnetic Characterization 123 4.3.1 3D Electromagnetic Modeling 126 4.3.2 Summary and Outlook 130 Problems 131 5 Macromodeling Via Model Order Reduction 135 5.1 Model Order Reduction 135 5.2 Moment Matching 136 5.2.1 Moments 136 5.2.2 Padé Approximation and AWE 138 5.2.3 Complex Frequency Hopping 139 5.3 Reduction by Projection 140 5.3.1 Krylov Subspaces 141 5.3.2 Implicit Moment Matching: The Orthogonal Case 142 5.3.3 The Arnoldi Process 143 5.3.4 PRIMA 145 5.3.5 Multipoint Moment Matching 147 5.3.6 An Example 148 5.3.7 Implicit Moment Matching: The Biorthogonal Case 151 5.3.8 Padé Via Lanczos (PVL) 154 5.4 Reduction by Truncation 155 5.4.1 Balancing 156 5.4.2 Balanced Truncation 158 5.5 Advanced Model Order Reduction∗ 159 5.5.1 Passivity-Preserving Balanced Truncation 159 5.5.2 Balanced Truncation of Descriptor Systems 160 5.5.3 Reducing Large-Scale Systems 161 Problems 166 6 Black-Box Macromodeling and Curve Fitting 169 6.1 Basic Curve Fitting 171 6.1.1 Linear Least Squares 172 6.1.2 Maximum Likelihood Estimation 174 6.1.3 Polynomial Fitting 176 6.2 Direct Rational Fitting 182 6.2.1 Polynomial Ratio Form 183 6.2.2 Pole–Zero Form 183 6.2.3 Partial Fraction Form 184 6.2.4 Partial Fraction Form with Fixed Poles 184 6.2.5 Nonlinear Least Squares 185 6.3 Linearization via Weighting 187 6.4 Asymptotic Pole–Zero Placement 191 6.5 ARMA Modeling 193 6.5.1 Modeling from Time-Domain Responses 195 6.5.2 Modeling from Frequency Domain Responses 197 6.5.3 Conversion of ARMA Models 201 6.6 Prony’s Method 203 6.7 Subspace-Based Identification∗ 204 6.7.1 Discrete-Time State-Space Systems 204 6.7.2 Macromodeling from Impulse Response Samples 205 6.7.3 Macromodeling from Input–Output Samples 207 6.7.4 From Discrete-Time to Continuous-Time State-Space Models 210 6.7.5 Frequency-Domain Subspace Identification 211 6.7.6 Generalized Pencil-of-Function Methods 212 6.7.7 Examples 214 6.8 Loewner Matrix Interpolation∗ 215 6.8.1 The Scalar Case 216 6.8.2 The Multiport Case 218 Problems 222 7 The Vector Fitting Algorithm 225 7.1 The Sanathanan–Koerner Iteration 226 7.1.1 The Steiglitz–McBride Iteration 229 7.2 The Generalized Sanathanan–Koerner Iteration 231 7.2.1 General Basis Functions 231 7.2.2 The Partial Fraction Basis 233 7.3 Frequency-Domain Vector Fitting 234 7.3.1 A Simple Model Transformation 234 7.3.2 Computing the New Poles 236 7.3.3 The Vector Fitting Iteration 237 7.3.4 From GSK to VF 239 7.4 Consistency And Convergence 241 7.4.1 Consistency 241 7.4.2 Convergence 242 7.4.3 Formal Convergence Analysis 245 7.5 Practical VF Implementation 247 7.5.1 Causality Stability and Realness 247 7.5.2 Order Selection and Initialization 253 7.5.3 Improving Numerical Robustness 254 7.6 Relaxed Vector Fitting 256 7.6.1 Weight Normalization Noise and Convergence 256 7.6.2 Relaxed Vector Fitting 259 7.7 Tuning VF 264 7.7.1 Weighting and Error Control 264 7.7.2 High-Frequency Behavior 266 7.7.3 High-Frequency Constraints 268 7.7.4 DC Point Enforcement 269 7.7.5 Simultaneous Constraints 271 7.8 Time-Domain Vector Fitting 273 7.9 z-Domain Vector Fitting 278 7.10 Orthonormal Vector Fitting 281 7.10.1 Orthonormal Rational Basis Functions 281 7.10.2 The OVF Iteration 284 7.10.3 The OVF Pole Relocation Step 285 7.10.4 Finding Residues 286 7.11 Other Variants 288 7.11.1 Magnitude Vector Fitting 288 7.11.2 Vector Fitting with L1 Norm Minimization 291 7.11.3 Dealing with Higher Pole Multiplicities 293 7.11.4 Including Higher Order Derivatives 294 7.11.5 Hard Relocation of Poles 295 7.12 Notes on Overfitting and Ill-Conditioning 296 7.12.1 Exact Model Identification 296 7.12.2 Curve Fitting 297 7.13 Application Examples 299 7.13.1 Surface Acoustic Wave Filter 299 7.13.2 Subnetwork Equivalent 301 7.13.3 Transformer Modeling from Time-Domain Measurements 303 Problems 303 8 Advanced Vector Fitting for Multiport Problems 307 8.1 Introduction 307 8.2 Adapting VF to Multiple Responses 308 8.2.1 Pole Identification 308 8.2.2 Fast Vector Fitting 310 8.2.3 Residue Identification 311 8.3 Multiport Formulations 312 8.3.1 Single-Element Modeling: Multi-SISO Structure 314 8.3.2 Single-Column Modeling: Multi-SIMO Structure 316 8.3.3 Matrix Modeling: MIMO Structure 317 8.3.4 Matrix Modeling: Minimal Realizations 318 8.3.5 Sparsity Considerations 322 8.4 Enforcing Reciprocity 322 8.4.1 External Reciprocity 324 8.4.2 Internal Reciprocity∗ 325 8.5 Compressed Macromodeling 329 8.5.1 Data Compression 329 8.5.2 Compressed Rational Approximation 330 8.5.3 An Application Example 331 8.6 Accuracy Considerations 333 8.6.1 Noninteracting Models 333 8.6.2 Interacting Models Scalar Case 334 8.6.3 Error Magnification in Multiport Systems 338 8.7 Overcoming Error Magnification 340 8.7.1 Elementwise Inverse Weighting 340 8.7.2 Diagonalization 342 8.7.3 Mode-Revealing Transformations 347 8.7.4 Modal Vector Fitting 356 8.7.5 External and Internal Ports 358 Problems 363 9 Passivity Characterization of Lumped LTI Systems 365 9.1 Internal Characterization of Passivity 365 9.1.1 A First Order Example 365 9.1.2 The Dissipation Inequality 367 9.1.3 Lumped LTI Systems 368 9.2 Passivity of Lumped Immittance Systems 368 9.2.1 Rational Positive Real Matrices 369 9.2.2 Extracting Purely Imaginary Poles 372 9.2.3 The Positive Real Lemma 376 9.2.4 Positive Real Functions Revisited 378 9.2.5 Popov Functions and Spectral Factorizations 379 9.2.6 Hamiltonian Matrices 381 9.2.7 Passivity Characterization via Hamiltonian Matrices 385 9.2.8 Determination of Local Passivity Violations 387 9.2.9 Quantification of Passivity Violations via Bisection 390 9.2.10 Quantification of Passivity Violations via Sampling 393 9.2.11 Frequency Transformations 394 9.2.12 Extended Hamiltonian Pencils 396 9.2.13 Generalized Hamiltonian Pencils 398 9.2.14 Positive Real Lemma for Descriptor Systems 399 9.3 Passivity of Lumped Scattering Systems 402 9.3.1 Rational Bounded Real Matrices 402 9.3.2 The Bounded Real Lemma 406 9.3.3 Bounded Real Functions Revisited 408 9.3.4 Popov Functions Spectral Factorizations and Hamiltonian Matrices 409 9.3.5 Passivity Characterization via Hamiltonian Matrices 410 9.3.6 Determination of Local Passivity Violations 413 9.3.7 Quantification of Passivity Violations via Bisection 416 9.3.8 Quantification of Passivity Violations via Sampling 420 9.3.9 Extended Hamiltonian Pencils 421 9.3.10 Generalized Hamiltonian Pencils 422 9.3.11 Bounded Real Lemma for Descriptor Systems 423 9.4 Advanced Passivity Characterization 426 9.4.1 On the Computation of Imaginary Hamiltonian Eigenvalues 426 9.4.2 Large-Scale Hamiltonian Eigenvalue Problems∗ 427 9.4.3 Half-Size Passivity Test Matrices 430 Problems 433 10 Passivity Enforcement of Lumped LTI Systems 437 10.1 Passivity Constraints for Lumped LTI Systems 437 10.1.1 Passive State-Space Immittance Systems 438 10.1.2 Passive State-Space Scattering Systems 439 10.2 State-Space Perturbation 440 10.2.1 Asymptotic Perturbation 441 10.2.2 Dynamic Perturbation 441 10.2.3 Input-State Perturbation 442 10.2.4 State-Output Perturbation 443 10.2.5 A Perturbation Strategy for Passivity Enforcement 444 10.3 Asymptotic Passivity Enforcement 445 10.3.1 Immittance Systems 445 10.3.2 Scattering Systems 446 10.4 Imaginary Poles of Immittance Systems 447 10.5 Local Passivity Enforcement 448 10.5.1 Local Passivity Constraints 449 10.5.2 Enforcing Local Passivity Constraints 454 10.6 Passivity Enforcement Via Hamiltonian Perturbation 460 10.6.1 Hamiltonian Perturbation of Immittance Systems 462 10.6.2 Hamiltonian Perturbation of Scattering Systems 464 10.6.3 Hamiltonian Perturbation Strategies 465 10.6.4 Slopes 468 10.6.5 Global Passivity Enforcement via Hamiltonian Perturbation 471 10.7 Linear Matrix Inequalities 474 10.7.1 Parameterizations 476 10.8 Computational Cost 477 10.9 Advanced Accuracy Control 478 10.9.1 Frequency-Selective Norms 478 10.9.2 Individual Response Weighting 480 10.9.3 Bandlimited Norms 481 10.9.4 Relative Norms 484 10.9.5 Data-Based Cost Functions 486 10.10 Least-Squares Residue Perturbation 487 10.10.1 Basic Residue Perturbation (RP) 487 10.10.2 Spectral Residue Perturbation (SRP) 492 10.10.3 Mode-Revealing Transformations 493 10.10.4 Modal Perturbation (MP) 494 10.10.5 Robust Iterations 495 10.11 Alternative Formulations 496 10.11.1 Passivity Constraints Based on H∞ norm∗ 496 10.11.2 Iterative Update by Fitting Passivity Violations 503 10.11.3 Pole Perturbation Approaches 505 10.11.4 Parameterization via Positive Fractions 506 10.12 Descriptor Systems∗ 508 10.12.1 Perturbation of Generalized Hamiltonian Pencils 508 10.12.2 Handling Singular Direct Coupling Terms 509 10.12.3 Proper Part Extraction 510 10.12.4 Handling Impulsive Terms 511 10.12.5 Accuracy Control 512 Problems 512 11 Time-Domain Simulation 517 11.1 Discretization of ODE Systems 518 11.2 Interconnection of Macromodels 520 11.3 Direct Convolution 522 11.3.1 Equivalent Circuit Implementations 524 11.3.2 Discussion 527 11.4 Interfacing State-Space Macromodels 528 11.4.1 Equivalent Circuit Interfaces 530 11.5 Interfacing Pole-Residue Macromodels 533 11.5.1 Scalar Single-Pole System 533 11.5.2 General Multiport High-Order Systems 535 11.5.3 Discussion 537 11.6 Equivalent Circuit Synthesis 537 11.6.1 Direct Admittance Synthesis 538 11.6.2 Direct State-Space Synthesis 541 11.6.3 Sparse Synthesis 543 11.6.4 Classical RLCT Synthesis∗ 545 Problems 559 12 Transmission Lines and Distributed Systems 563 12.1 Introduction 563 12.2 Multiconductor Transmission Lines 564 12.2.1 Per-Unit-Length Matrices 564 12.2.2 Frequency-Domain Solution via Modal Decomposition 566 12.2.3 Frequency-Domain Solution in the Physical Domain 570 12.3 Direct Macromodeling Approaches 573 12.3.1 Folded Line Equivalent Models 573 12.4 Lumped Segmentation Approaches 577 12.4.1 Segmenting 577 12.4.2 Topology-Based Methods 578 12.5 Matrix Rational Approximations 582 12.5.1 Padé Matrix Rational Approximations 583 12.5.2 Series Expansion into Eigenfunctions 586 12.6 Traveling Wave Formulations 590 12.6.1 Voltage Waves 591 12.6.2 Current Waves 592 12.6.3 Thévenin and Norton Equivalents 593 12.6.4 Terminal Admittance from Traveling Wave Model 593 12.6.5 Modal Traveling Waves 594 12.7 Lossless Traveling Wave Modeling 595 12.7.1 Delay Extraction for Lossless MTL 597 12.8 Traveling Wave Modeling of Scalar Lossy Transmission Lines 599 12.9 Representations Based on Multiple Reflections 601 12.9.1 The Delayed Vector Fitting Scheme 604 12.10 Basic Delay Extraction for Lossy MTL 606 12.11 Frequency-Dependent Traveling Wave Modeling 607 12.11.1 Modal Domain 608 12.11.2 Physical Domain 613 12.11.3 Delay Extraction and Optimization∗ 625 12.12 General Delayed-Rational Macromodeling 626 12.12.1 Delay Estimation 629 12.12.2 Passivity Enforcement 631 12.12.3 Equivalent Circuit Synthesis 637 12.13 Passivity of Traveling Wave Models∗ 638 12.14 Time-Domain Implementation for Traveling Wave Models 641 12.14.1 The Scalar Lossless Line 641 12.14.2 The Scalar Lossy Line 643 12.14.3 Lossy Multiconductor Transmission Lines 648 12.14.4 Examples 652 12.15 Discussion 657 Problems 658 13 Applications 663 13.1 Modeling for Signal and Power Integrity 663 13.1.1 Prelayout Analysis of Backplane Interconnects 664 13.1.2 Full Package Analysis 667 13.1.3 Full Board Analysis and Simulation 672 13.1.4 High-Speed Channel Modeling and Simulation 681 13.1.5 Model Extraction from Measurements 687 13.2 Computational Electromagnetics 691 13.2.1 Dynamic Subcell Models in Time-Domain Solvers 691 13.2.2 Automatic Stopping Criteria for Time-Domain Solvers 695 13.2.3 VF-Based Adaptive Frequency Sampling 698 13.3 Small-Signal Macromodels for RF and AMS Applications 701 13.4 Modeling for High-Voltage Power Systems 704 13.4.1 Subnetwork Equivalencing 705 13.4.2 Power Transformer Modeling from Frequency Sweep Measurements 708 13.4.3 Power Transformer Modeling from Manufacturer’s White-Box Model 715 13.5 Fluid Transmission Lines 720 13.6 Mechanical Systems 726 13.7 Ship Motion in Irregular Seas 728 13.8 Summary 733 14 Summary and Outlook 735 14.1 Parameterized Macromodels 735 14.1.1 Parameterized Macromodels with Fixed Poles 736 14.1.2 Fully Parameterized Macromodels 738 14.1.3 Higher Dimensional Parameter Spaces 742 14.2 Open Issues 743 14.2.1 Optimal Passivity Enforcement 743 14.2.2 Systems with Many Ports 744 14.2.3 White-Box Model Identification and Tuning 744 14.2.4 Transmission Line Models 745 14.2.5 Delay Systems 746 14.2.6 Extension to NL Systems 749 14.2.7 Integration with other solvers 749 Appendix A Notation 751 Appendix B Acronyms 757 Appendix C Linear Algebra 761 Appendix D Optimization Templates 781 Appendix E Signals and Transforms 805 Bibliography 839 Index 863

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe only book on the market that provides current, necessary, and comprehensive technical knowledge of extruded cables and high-voltage direct-current transmission This is the first book to fully address the technical aspects of high-voltage direct-current (HVDC) link projects with extruded cables. It covers design and engineering techniques for cable lines, insulation materials, and accessories, as well as cable performance and life span and reliability issues. Beginning with a discussion on the fundamentals of HVDC cable transmission theory, Extruded Cables for High-Voltage Direct-Current Transmission: Advances in Research and Development covers: Both the cable and the accessories (joints and terminations), each of which affects cable line performance The basic designs of HVDC cables?including a comparison of mass insulated non-draining cables with extruded HVDC cables The theoretical elements on which the design of HVDC cables is basTrade Review“The authors have done a great job, presenting a blend of experimental results to reinforce the theory and showing how to apply the theory to practical designs.” (IEEE Electrical Insulation Magazine, 1 January 2014) Table of ContentsFOREWORD xi ACKNOWLEDGMENTS xv LIST OF SYMBOLS AND ACRONYMS xvii INTRODUCTION xxvii 1 INTRODUCTION 1 2 FUNDAMENTALS OF HVDC CABLE TRANSMISSION 11 2.1 Historical Evolution of HVDC Power Transmission 11 2.2 Economic Comparison Between HVAC and HVDC Transmission Systems 18 2.3 Configurations and Operating Modes of HVDC Transmission Systems 20 2.4 CSC and VSC Converters 23 2.4.1 Operation of a Line-Commutated Current Source Converter (LCC-CSC) 23 2.4.2 Operation of a Self-Commutated Voltage Source Converter (VSC) 25 2.4.3 CSC versus VSC: How Do They Affect Cable Insulation? 27 2.5 Cables for HVDC Transmission 27 2.5.1 Underground and Undersea Cable Transmission 27 2.5.2 Different HVDC Cable Types 29 2.5.2.1 Mass-Impregnated Nondraining (MIND) Cables 31 2.5.2.2 Oil-Filled (OF) Cables 32 2.5.2.3 Polypropylene Paper Laminate (known under a few different acronyms, i.e., PPL, MI-PPL, PPLP) or Lapped Thin-Film Insulated Cable 33 2.5.2.4 Polymer-Insulated or Extruded-Insulation Cable 33 2.5.3 HVDC Cable Insulation 36 2.5.3.1 Oil–Paper (or Lapped) Insulation 37 2.5.3.2 Extruded Insulation 37 3 MAIN PRINCIPLES OF HVDC EXTRUDED CABLE DESIGN 41 3.1 Differences Between HVAC and HVDC Extruded Cables 42 3.1.1 Differences in the Structure 42 3.1.2 Typical Formations of HVDC Extruded Cables 42 3.1.2.1 Conductor 42 3.1.2.2 Inner Semiconductive Layer 43 3.1.2.3 Insulation Layer 44 3.1.2.4 Outer Semiconductive Layer 44 3.1.2.5 Metallic Screen 45 3.1.2.6 Water Sealing (or Blocking) Systems 46 3.1.2.7 Protective Thermoplastic Sheath 47 3.1.2.8 Armoring 47 3.1.2.9 Jacketing (or External Sheath) 48 3.1.3 Differences in the Electric Field Distribution 48 3.1.3.1 Electric Field Distribution Within the Insulation of an HVAC Cable 48 3.1.3.2 Steady Electric Field DistributionWithin the Insulation of an HVDC Cable 49 3.2 Transient DC Field Distribution 63 3.2.1 Time to Reach Steady-State DC Field Distribution 64 3.2.2 Definition of Operational Stages of HVDC Cables 65 3.2.3 Field Distributions in the Various Stages 67 3.2.3.1 Stage I: Raising the Voltage 68 3.2.3.2 Stage II: After Raising the Voltage 68 3.2.3.3 Stage III: Steady Resistive Field and Relevant Space Charge 71 3.2.3.4 Stage IIIa: After Switching off the Load 73 3.2.3.5 Stage IV: After Switching off the Voltage 74 3.2.3.6 Stages at Polarity Reversal 75 3.3 Influence of the Environment Temperature on the Steady Field of an HVDC Extruded Cable 75 3.4 Impulses Superimposed onto a DC Voltage 76 3.5 Statistical Approach to Impulse Voltage Test Levels for HVDC Cables 79 3.6 Modification of the Stress Distribution by Trapped Space Charge Effects 86 3.7 Dielectrics for HVDC Extruded Cables 88 3.8 Morphology of Polyethylene and Its Influence on Electrical Properties 92 4 SPACE CHARGE IN HVDC EXTRUDED INSULATION: STORAGE, EFFECTS, AND MEASUREMENT METHODS 99 4.1 Space Charge in HVDC Cable Insulation 100 4.2 Charge Injection and Transport in Insulating Polymers 107 4.2.1 Low-Field Conduction Mechanisms 107 4.2.1.1 Ohmic Conduction 107 4.2.1.2 Ionic Conduction 110 4.2.2 High-Field Conduction Mechanisms 112 4.2.2.1 Charge Injection From Electrodes 112 4.2.2.2 Bulk-Controlled High-Field Conduction Mechanisms 114 4.3 Space-Charge Accumulation 118 4.3.1 Charge Generation 119 4.3.1.1 Electronic Charge Injection 119 4.3.1.2 Field-Assisted Thermal Ionization of Impurities 119 4.3.1.3 Spatially Inhomogeneous Electric Polarization 119 4.3.1.4 Steady Direct Current Coupled with a Spatially Varying Ratio of Permittivity to Conductivity 122 4.3.2 Charge Trapping 125 4.3.2.1 Physical Defects 128 4.3.2.2 Chemical Defects 128 4.4 Review of Space-Charge Measurement Methods for HVDC Extruded Insulation 130 4.4.1 Thermal Methods 133 4.4.1.1 Thermal Pulse Method 134 4.4.1.2 Laser Intensity Modulation Method (LIMM) 135 4.4.1.3 Thermal Step Method (TSM) 137 4.4.2 Pressure Pulse Methods 142 4.4.2.1 Pressure Wave Propagation Method 145 4.4.2.2 Laser-Induced Pressure Pulse (LIPP) Method 146 4.4.2.3 Pulsed Electroacoustic (PEA) Method 148 4.4.3 Techniques for Estimating the Trap Depth and the Mobility of Space Charges 159 4.5 Up-to-Date Developments of the Best Techniques for Measuring Space Charges 164 4.5.1 Space-Charge Measurements in HVDC Cables with the TSM Technique 164 4.5.1.1 Experimental Facility 164 4.5.1.2 Cable 1: Under Field Measurements 167 4.5.1.3 Study of Cable 2: Volt-Off Measurements 169 4.5.2 Space-Charge Measurements in HVDC Cables with the PEATechnique 171 4.5.2.1 Space-Charge Measurements Related to the Semicon-Insulation Interface 172 4.5.2.2 Space-Charge Measurements Related to the Insulation-Insulation Interface 176 4.5.2.3 Space-Charge Measurements Related to the Effect of Temperature Gradient 183 4.5.3 Recent Developments in the Pressure Wave Propagation Method 191 4.6 Final Comparison between the Best Space-Charge Measurement Methods for Power Cables: PEA versus TSM 193 5 IMPROVED DESIGN OF HVDC EXTRUDED CABLE SYSTEMS 209 5.1 R&D Trends in Improving Extruded Polymeric Insulation for HVDC Cables 210 5.1.1 Problems to be Solved for Improving HVDC Extruded Insulation 210 5.1.2 Optimum Characteristics of Polymeric Insulating Materials for HVDC Cables 212 5.1.3 Historical Development Activities of HVDC Extruded Insulation 213 5.2 Use of AC LDPE, XLPE, or HDPE Cable Compounds for HVDC Applications without any Modifications 215 5.3 Stress Inversion-Free or -Limited DC Cable 217 5.4 Suppression of Space Charge in the Polymer 218 5.4.1 Modification of the Characteristics of the Electrode-Insulation Interfaces 218 5.4.1.1 Traditional Approaches 218 5.4.1.2 Effect of Surface Fluorination on the Space-Charge Behavior of PE 219 5.4.2 Modification of Bulk Insulation Characteristics 220 5.4.2.1 Blending PE with Another Polymer 221 5.4.2.2 Using Additives or Fillers in PE-Based Compounds 221 5.4.2.3 Additives and the Morphology of Polyethylene 227 5.4.2.4 Effect of Nanostructuration 228 5.5 Further Requirements for the Improvement of HVDC Extruded Cable Design 229 5.6 Improved Design of HVDC Extruded Cables 232 5.6.1 First Example of Improved Design of HVDC Extruded Cables 232 5.6.2 Cable Design Relevant to the Gotland Project 233 5.6.3 Cable Design Relevant to the Murraylink Project 234 5.6.4 Cable Design Relevant to the Trans Bay Project 236 5.6.5 Other Improved Cable Designs 237 5.7 Improved Design of Accessories for HVDC Extruded Cable Systems 239 5.7.1 Accessories Design Relevant to the Gotland Project 243 5.7.1.1 Joints for the Gotland Project 243 5.7.1.2 Terminations for the Gotland Project 244 5.7.2 Accessories Design Relevant to the Murraylink Project 244 5.7.2.1 Joints for the Murraylink Project 244 5.7.2.2 Terminations for the Murraylink Project 246 5.7.3 State of the Art of HVDC Extruded Cable Accessories 246 5.7.3.1 Prefabricated Joints 247 5.7.3.2 Terminations 249 5.7.3.3 Electric Fields in Accessories 249 5.7.3.4 Installation of Accessories 250 5.8 Improved Cable System Design 251 5.9 Testing of HVDC Extruded Cable Systems 252 6 LIFE MODELING OF HVDC EXTRUDED CABLE INSULATION 265 6.1 Fundamentals of Life Modeling and Reliability Estimates of Power Cables 266 6.1.1 Traditional Approach to Insulation Life Modeling 268 6.1.2 Probabilistic Framework of HVDC Extruded Insulation Life Modeling 277 6.1.2.1 Basic Aspects of Probabilistic Life Modeling 277 6.1.2.2 Probabilistic Life Models for HVDC Extruded Cable Insulation 279 6.1.2.3 Life Models for HVDC Extruded Cables under Single and Combined Stress 286 6.2 Space-Charge-Based Life Models for Extruded HVDC Cables 293 6.2.1 Field-Limited Space-Charge Model 294 6.2.2 Space-Charge DMM Model 296 6.2.2.1 The DC DMM Model 297 6.2.2.2 Application of the DC DMM Model to HVDC Extruded Insulation 298 6.3 From Space Charges to Partial Discharges: Life Model Based on Damage Growth from Microvoids 300 6.3.1 Charge Storage at PE-Void Interface and Injection into the Void 302 6.3.2 Hot-Electron Avalanche Formation inside the Void 303 6.3.3 Damage at Void-PE Interface Growing into the Polymer 304 6.3.4 Fitting the Model to Extruded HVDC Insulation Times to Failure 305 6.4 Space Charge: Cause or Effect of Aging? 308 7 MAIN REALIZATIONS OF HVDC EXTRUDED CABLE SYSTEMS IN THE WORLD 323 7.1 Overview 323 7.2 Extruded Systems in Service 327 7.2.1 Gotland Link 328 7.2.2 Murraylink 330 7.2.3 Cross Sound Cable (CSC) 332 7.2.4 Troll A Platform 333 7.2.5 Estlink 334 7.2.6 BorWin 1 335 7.2.7 The Trans Bay Project 336 7.2.8 The Hokkaido-Honshu Intertie 339 References 340 INDEX 343

Read more less

Book SynopsisBased on their own experiences of in-depth case studies of software projects in international corporations, in this bookthe authors present detailed practical guidelines on the preparation, conduct, design and reporting of case studies of software engineering. This is the first software engineering specific book on thecase study research method.Table of ContentsFOREWORD xiii PREFACE xv ACKNOWLEDGMENTS xvii PART I CASE STUDY METHODOLOGY 1 INTRODUCTION 3 1.1 What is a Case Study? 3 1.2 A Brief History of Case Studies in Software Engineering 5 1.3 Why a Book on Case Studies of Software Engineering? 6 1.4 Conclusion 9 2 BACKGROUND AND DEFINITION OF CONCEPTS 11 2.1 Introduction 11 2.2 Research Strategies 11 2.3 Characteristics of Research Strategies 13 2.3.1 Purpose 13 2.3.2 Control and Data 14 2.3.3 Triangulation 15 2.3.4 Replication 16 2.3.5 Inductive and Deductive Enquiries 16 2.4 What Makes a Good Case Study? 17 2.5 When is the Case Study Strategy Feasible? 19 2.6 Case Study Research Process 20 2.7 Conclusion 21 3 DESIGN OF THE CASE STUDY 23 3.1 Introduction 23 3.2 Elements of the Case Study Design 24 3.2.1 Rationale for the Study 24 3.2.2 Objective of the Study 24 3.2.3 Cases and Units of Analyses 26 3.2.4 Theoretical Framework 29 3.2.5 Research Questions 30 3.2.6 Propositions and Hypotheses 31 3.2.7 Concepts 32 3.2.8 Methods of Data Collection 32 3.2.9 Methods of Data Analysis 33 3.2.10 Case Selection 33 3.2.11 Selection of Data 35 3.2.12 Data Definition and Data Storage 36 3.2.13 Quality Control and Assurance 36 3.2.14 Maintaining the Case Study Protocol 37 3.2.15 Reporting and Disseminating the Case Study 38 3.3 Legal, Ethical, and Professional Issues 40 3.4 Conclusion 45 4 DATA COLLECTION 47 4.1 Introduction 47 4.2 Different Types of Data Source 47 4.2.1 Classification of Data Sources 47 4.2.2 Data Source Selection 49 4.3 Interviews 50 4.3.1 Planning Interviews 50 4.3.2 The Interview Session 52 4.3.3 Postinterview Activities 53 4.4 Focus groups 54 4.5 Observations 56 4.6 Archival Data 57 4.7 Metrics 58 4.8 Conclusion 60 5 DATA ANALYSIS AND INTERPRETATION 61 5.1 Introduction 61 5.2 Analysis of Data in Flexible Research 62 5.2.1 Introduction 62 5.2.2 Level of Formalism 64 5.2.3 Relation to Hypotheses 65 5.3 Process for Qualitative Data Analysis 65 5.3.1 Introduction 65 5.3.2 Steps in the Analysis 66 5.3.3 Techniques 68 5.3.4 Tool support 70 5.4 Validity 71 5.4.1 Construct Validity 71 5.4.2 Internal Validity 71 5.4.3 External Validity 71 5.4.4 Reliability 72 5.5 Improving Validity 72 5.6 Quantitative Data Analysis 74 5.7 Conclusion 76 6 REPORTING AND DISSEMINATION 77 6.1 Introduction 77 6.2 Why Report and Disseminate 78 6.3 The Audience for the Report 79 6.4 Aspects of the Case Study to Report and Disseminate 80 6.5 When to Report and Disseminate 81 6.6 Guidelines on Reporting 82 6.6.1 The Generic Content of an Academic Report 82 6.6.2 Reporting Recommendations from Evaluative Case Studies 84 6.6.3 Reporting to Stakeholders, Including Sponsor(s) 85 6.6.4 Reporting the Context of the Case Study 87 6.6.5 Reporting to Students 89 6.6.6 Ad Hoc and Impromptu Reporting 90 6.7 Formats and Structures for a Report 91 6.8 Where to Report 94 6.9 Ethics and Confidentiality 94 6.10 Conclusion 95 7 SCALING UP CASE STUDY RESEARCH TO REAL-WORLD SOFTWARE PRACTICE 97 7.1 Introduction 97 7.2 The Aims of Scaling up Case Studies 98 7.3 Dimensions of Scale 99 7.4 Longitudinal Case Studies 100 7.5 Multiple Case Studies 102 7.5.1 Multiple Cases and Replications 102 7.5.2 Selecting the Cases 104 7.6 Multiresearcher Case Studies 105 7.7 Conclusion 107 8 USING CASE STUDY RESEARCH 109 8.1 Introduction 109 8.2 Reading and Reviewing Case Studies 109 8.2.1 Development of Checklists 110 8.2.2 Checklists for Conducting Case Study Research 111 8.2.3 Checklists for Reading and Reviewing Case Studies 111 8.2.4 Development of Practice 111 8.3 Identifying and Synthesizing Use Case Research 111 8.3.1 Identifying Primary Studies 112 8.3.2 Synthesis of Evidence from Multiple Case Studies 113 8.3.3 Current State of Synthesis 117 8.4 The Economics of Case Study Research 118 8.4.1 Costs and Benefits of Evaluation Techniques 119 8.4.2 Evaluation of the DESMET Methodology 119 8.4.3 Frameworks for Organizing Methods of Evaluation 119 8.5 Specializing Case Study Research for Software Engineering 121 8.5.1 The Longitudinal Chronological Case Study Research Strategy 122 8.5.2 Controlled Case Studies 123 8.6 Case Studies and Software Process Improvement 123 8.7 Conclusion 125 PART II EXAMPLES OF CASE STUDIES 9 INTRODUCTION TO CASE STUDY EXAMPLES 129 9.1 Introduction 129 10 CASE STUDY OF EXTREME PROGRAMMING IN A STAGE–GATE CONTEXT 133 10.1 Introduction 133 10.1.1 Methodological Status 133 10.2 Case Study Design 134 10.2.1 Rationale 134 10.2.2 Objectives 134 10.2.3 Cases and Units of Analysis 135 10.2.4 Theoretical Frame of Reference 136 10.2.5 Research Questions 136 10.3 Planning 136 10.3.1 Methods of Data Collection 136 10.3.2 Selection of Data 137 10.3.3 Case Selection Strategy 137 10.3.4 Case Study Protocol 137 10.3.5 Ethical Considerations 137 10.4 Data Collection 139 10.5 Data Analysis 139 10.5.1 Threats to Validity 144 10.6 Reporting 144 10.6.1 Academics 144 10.6.2 Practitioners 144 10.7 Lessons Learned 146 11 TWO LONGITUDINAL CASE STUDIES OF SOFTWARE PROJECT MANAGEMENT 149 11.1 Introduction 149 11.2 Background to the Research Project 149 11.3 Case Study Design and Planning 150 11.3.1 Rationale 150 11.3.2 Objective 150 11.3.3 Definition of the Case 150 11.3.4 Units of Analyses 151 11.3.5 Theoretical Frame of Reference and Research Questions 151 11.3.6 Case Selection 151 11.3.7 Replication Strategy 152 11.3.8 Case Study Protocol 152 11.3.9 Quality Assurance, Validity, and Reliability 152 11.3.10 Legal, Ethical, and Professional Considerations 153 11.4 Data Collection 154 11.4.1 Sources of Data 154 11.5 Data Analysis 157 11.6 Reporting 159 11.6.1 Internal Reporting of Results 160 11.6.2 Dissemination of Artifacts 160 11.7 Lessons Learned 160 12 AN ITERATIVE CASE STUDY OF QUALITY MONITORING 163 12.1 Introduction 163 12.2 Case Study Design 164 12.2.1 Objectives 164 12.2.2 Cases and Units of Analysis 165 12.2.3 Theoretical Frame of Reference 165 12.2.4 Research Questions 165 12.3 Planning 165 12.3.1 Methods of Data Collection 165 12.3.2 Case Selection Strategy 167 12.3.3 Case Study Protocol 167 12.3.4 Ethical Considerations 167 12.3.5 Data Collection 168 12.3.6 Exploratory Study 168 12.3.7 Confirmatory Study 168 12.3.8 Explanatory Study 168 12.4 Data Analysis 169 12.5 Reporting 169 12.6 Lessons Learned 169 13 A CASE STUDY OF THE EVALUATION OF REQUIREMENTS MANAGEMENT TOOLS 171 13.1 Introduction 171 13.2 Design of the Case Study 172 13.2.1 Rationale 172 13.2.2 Objective 172 13.2.3 The Case and Its Context 173 13.2.4 The Units of Analyses 174 13.2.5 Theoretical Framework 175 13.2.6 Research Questions 175 13.2.7 Propositions, Concepts, and Measures 175 13.2.8 Case Study Protocol 175 13.2.9 Methods of Data Collection 176 13.2.10 Methods of Data Analysis 176 13.2.11 Case Selection Strategy 177 13.2.12 Data Selection Strategy 177 13.2.13 Replication Strategy 177 13.2.14 Quality Assurance, Validity, and Reliability 177 13.3 Data Collection 178 13.4 Data Analysis 179 13.5 Reporting and Dissemination 180 13.6 Lessons Learned 181 14 A LARGE-SCALE CASE STUDY OF REQUIREMENTS AND VERIFICATION ALIGNMENT 183 14.1 Introduction 183 14.2 Case Study Design 184 14.2.1 Rationale 184 14.2.2 Objectives 184 14.2.3 Cases and Units of Analysis 185 14.2.4 Theoretical Frame of Reference 186 14.2.5 Research Questions 187 14.3 Planning 188 14.3.1 Methods of Data Collection 189 14.3.2 Case Selection Strategy 190 14.3.3 Selection of Data 191 14.3.4 Case Study Protocol 191 14.3.5 Ethical Considerations 192 14.4 Data Collection 192 14.5 Data Analysis 193 14.6 Lessons Learned 195 14.6.1 Effort Estimation Lessons 195 14.6.2 Design and Planning Lessons 196 14.6.3 Data Collection Lessons 197 14.6.4 Data Analysis Lessons 198 14.6.5 Reporting Lessons 199 14.6.6 A General Lesson 199 EPILOGUE 201 Appendix A: CHECKLISTS FOR READING AND REVIEWING CASE STUDIES 203 A.1 Design of the Case Study 203 A.2 Data Collection 204 A.3 Data Analysis and Interpretation 204 A.4 Reporting and Dissemination 204 A.5 Reader’s Checklist 205 Appendix B: EXAMPLE INTERVIEW INSTRUMENT (XP) 207 Appendix C: EXAMPLE INTERVIEW INSTRUMENT (REVV) 209 Appendix D: EXAMPLE OF A CODING GUIDE 213 D.1 Coding Instructions 213 D.2 Codes 214 D.2.1 High Level Codes: Research Questions 214 D.2.2 Medium Level Codes: Categories 216 D.2.3 Coding Example 216 Appendix E: EXAMPLE OF A CONSENT INFORMATION LETTER 219 REFERENCES 221 INDEX 235

Read more less

Book SynopsisQuartz crystal-a technology that changed the tide of World War II Some of the defining leaps in technology in the twentieth century occurred during the Second World War, from radar to nuclear energy. Often left out of historical discussions are quartz crystals, which proved to be just as pivotal to the Allied victory-and to post-war development-as other technologies. Quartz crystals provided the U.S. military, for the first time, with reliable communication on the front lines, and then went on to become the core of some of the most basic devices of the post-war era, from watches, clocks, and color televisions, to cell phones and computers. In Crystal Clear, Richard Thompson relates the story of the quartz crystal in World War II, from its early days as a curiosity for amateur radio enthusiasts, to its use by the United States Armed Forces. It follows the intrepid group of scientists and engineers from the Office of the Chief Signal Officer of the U.S. Army as tTable of ContentsAcknowledgments vii Introduction: "We Were Heavily Armed and We Had Crystals" 1 1 From Wire to Wireless: The Development—and Acceptance—of Tactical Radio 5 2 Crystal Control—the Great Gamble 17 3 The Signal Corps Lays the Foundation 31 4 Nothing Else to Do but Grind Crystals 55 5 Riding the "Flat Wheel Limited"—Overseeing a Mass Production Industry 69 6 Supplying a Mass Production Industry—the Civilian Government Steps In 93 7 "The Whole Radio Crystal Program of the Armed Services Depends Upon the Success of the Procurement Program in Brazil. Nothing Must Be Allowed to Interfere With It" 117 8 "God Made Lots of Small Crystals" 129 9 The Aging Crisis—Stopgap Measures 145 10 The Aging Crisis—Physics to the Rescue! 153 11 "Without Crystals You Have Radio; With Them, Communications" 163 Appendix 1: Crystal-Controlled Equipment 175 Appendix 2: Crystal Manufacturers 179 References 183 Index 219

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book describes the application of polarimetric synthetic aperture radar to earth remote sensing based on research at the NASA Jet Propulsion Laboratory (JPL). This book synthesizes all current research to provide practical information for both the newcomer and the expert in radar polarimetry.Trade Review“It is also an ideal reference for radar remote sensing researchers, engineers and practitioners in the aerospace industry.” (Photogrammetric Engineering and Remote Sensing, 1 August 2013)Table of ContentsNote From the Series Editor xi Foreword xiii Preface xv Acknowledgments xvii Authors xix 1. Synthetic Aperture Radar (SAR) Imaging Basics 1 1.1 Basic Principles of Radar Imaging 2 1.2 Radar Resolution 6 1.3 Radar Equation 10 1.4 Real Aperture Radar 11 1.5 Synthetic Aperture Radar 13 1.6 Radar Image Artifacts and Noise 16 1.7 Summary 22 References 22 2. Basic Principles of SAR Polarimetry 23 2.1 Polarization of Electromagnetic Waves 23 2.2 Mathematical Representations of Scatterers 27 2.3 Implementation of a Radar Polarimeter 32 2.4 Polarization Response 34 2.5 Optimum Polarizations 53 2.6 Contrast Enhancement 65 2.7 Summary 71 References 71 3. Advanced Polarimetric Concepts 73 3.1 Vector-Matrix Duality of Scatterer Representation 73 3.2 Eigenvalue- and Eigenvector-Based Polarimetric Parameters 76 3.3 Decomposition of Polarimetric Scattering 88 3.4 Image Classification 125 3.5 Polarimetric SAR Interferometry 135 3.6 Summary 141 References 141 4. Polarimetric SAR Calibration 145 4.1 Polarimetric Radar System Model 145 4.2 Cross Talk Estimation and Removal 152 4.3 Copolarized Channel Imbalance Calibration 161 4.4 Absolute Radiometric Calibration 166 4.5 Faraday Rotation 177 4.6 Summary 179 References 180 5. Applications: Measurement of Surface Soil Moisture 182 5.1 Surface Electrical and Geometrical Properties 183 5.2 Scattering from Bare Rough Surfaces 196 5.3 Example Bare Surface Soil Moisture Inversion Models 201 5.4 Comparison of the Performance of Bare Surface Inversion Models 211 5.5 Parameterizing Scattering Models 216 5.6 Inverting the IEM Model 222 5.7 Scattering from Vegetated Terrain 225 5.8 Simulation Results 239 5.9 Time Series Estimation of Soil Moisture 252 5.10 Summary 257 References 258 Appendixes A. Tilted Small Perturbation Model Details 262 B. Bistatic Scattering Matrix of a Cylinder with Arbitrary Orientation 267 C. Nomenclature 276 Index 279

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe advent of increasingly large consumer collections of audio (e.g., iTunes), imagery (e.g., Flickr), and video (e.g., YouTube) is driving a need not only for multimedia retrieval but also information extraction from and across media. Furthermore, industrial and government collections fuel requirements for stock media access, media preservation, broadcast news retrieval, identity management, and video surveillance. While significant advances have been made in language processing for information extraction from unstructured multilingual text and extraction of objects from imagery and video, these advances have been explored in largely independent research communities who have addressed extracting information from single media (e.g., text, imagery, audio). And yet users need to search for concepts across individual media, author multimedia artifacts, and perform multimedia analysis in many domains. This collection is intended to serve several purposes, including reporting the currenTable of ContentsFOREWORD ix Alan F. Smeaton PREFACE xiii Mark T. Maybury ACKNOWLEDGMENTS xv CONTRIBUTORS xvii 1 INTRODUCTION 1 Mark T. Maybury 2 MULTIMEDIA INFORMATION EXTRACTION: HISTORY AND STATE OF THE ART 13 Mark T. Maybury SECTION 1 IMAGE EXTRACTION 41 3 VISUAL FEATURE LOCALIZATION FOR DETECTING UNIQUE OBJECTS IN IMAGES 45 Madirakshi Das, Alexander C. Loui, and Andrew C. Blose 4 ENTROPY-BASED ANALYSIS OF VISUAL AND GEOLOCATION CONCEPTS IN IMAGES 63 Keiji Yanai, Hidetoshi Kawakubo, and Kobus Barnard 5 THE MEANING OF 3D SHAPE AND SOME TECHNIQUES TO EXTRACT IT 81 Sven Havemann, Torsten Ullrich, and Dieter W. Fellner 6 A DATA-DRIVEN MEANINGFUL REPRESENTATION OF EMOTIONAL FACIAL EXPRESSIONS 99 Nicolas Stoiber, Gaspard Breton, and Renaud Seguier SECTION 2 VIDEO EXTRACTION 113 7 VISUAL SEMANTICS FOR REDUCING FALSE POSITIVES IN VIDEO SEARCH 119 Rohini K. Srihari and Adrian Novischi 8 AUTOMATED ANALYSIS OF IDEOLOGICAL BIAS IN VIDEO 129 Wei-Hao Lin and Alexander G. Hauptmann 9 MULTIMEDIA INFORMATION EXTRACTION IN A LIVE MULTILINGUAL NEWS MONITORING SYSTEM 145 David D. Palmer, Marc B. Reichman, and Noah White 10 SEMANTIC MULTIMEDIA EXTRACTION USING AUDIO AND VIDEO 159 Evelyne Tzoukermann, Geetu Ambwani, Amit Bagga, Leslie Chipman, Anthony R. Davis, Ryan Farrell, David Houghton, Oliver Jojic, Jan Neumann, Robert Rubinoff, Bageshree Shevade, and Hongzhong Zhou 11 ANALYSIS OF MULTIMODAL NATURAL LANGUAGE CONTENT IN BROADCAST VIDEO 175 Prem Natarajan, Ehry MacRostie, Rohit Prasad, and Jonathan Watson 12 WEB-BASED MULTIMEDIA INFORMATION EXTRACTION BASED ON SOCIAL REDUNDANCY 185 Jose San Pedro, Stefan Siersdorfer, Vaiva Kalnikaite, and Steve Whittaker 13 INFORMATION FUSION AND ANOMALY DETECTION WITH UNCALIBRATED CAMERAS IN VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 201 Erhan Baki Ermis, Venkatesh Saligrama, and Pierre-Marc Jodoin SECTION 3 AUDIO, GRAPHICS, AND BEHAVIOR EXTRACTION 217 14 AUTOMATIC DETECTION, INDEXING, AND RETRIEVAL OF MULTIPLE ATTRIBUTES FROM CROSS-LINGUAL MULTIMEDIA DATA 221 Qian Hu, Fred J. Goodman, Stanley M. Boykin, Randall K. Fish, Warren R. Greiff, Stephen R. Jones, and Stephen R. Moore 15 INFORMATION GRAPHICS IN MULTIMODAL DOCUMENTS 235 Sandra Carberry, Stephanie Elzer, Richard Burns, Peng Wu, Daniel Chester, and Seniz Demir 16 EXTRACTING INFORMATION FROM HUMAN BEHAVIOR 253 Fabio Pianesi, Bruno Lepri, Nadia Mana, Alessandro Cappelletti, and Massimo Zancanaro SECTION 4 AFFECT EXTRACTION FROM AUDIO AND IMAGERY 269 17 RETRIEVAL OF PARALINGUISTIC INFORMATION IN BROADCASTS 273 Björn Schuller, Martin Wöllmer, Florian Eyben, and Gerhard Rigoll 18 AUDIENCE REACTIONS FOR INFORMATION EXTRACTION ABOUT PERSUASIVE LANGUAGE IN POLITICAL COMMUNICATION 289 Marco Guerini, Carlo Strapparava, and Oliviero Stock 19 THE NEED FOR AFFECTIVE METADATA IN CONTENT-BASED RECOMMENDER SYSTEMS FOR IMAGES 305 Marko TkalÈiÈ, Jurij TasiÈ, and Andrej Košir 20 AFFECT-BASED INDEXING FOR MULTIMEDIA DATA 321 Gareth J. F. Jones and Ching Hau Chan SECTION 5 MULTIMEDIA ANNOTATION AND AUTHORING 347 21 MULTIMEDIA ANNOTATION, QUERYING, AND ANALYSIS IN ANVIL 351 Michael Kipp 22 TOWARD FORMALIZATION OF DISPLAY GRAMMAR FOR INTERACTIVE MEDIA PRODUCTION WITH MULTIMEDIA INFORMATION EXTRACTION 369 Robin Bargar 23 MEDIA AUTHORING WITH ONTOLOGICAL REASONING: USE CASE FOR MULTIMEDIA INFORMATION EXTRACTION 385 Insook Choi 24 ANNOTATING SIGNIFICANT RELATIONS ON MULTIMEDIA WEB DOCUMENTS 401 Matusala Addisu, Danilo Avola, Paola Bianchi, Paolo Bottoni, Stefano Levialdi, and Emanuele Panizzi ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS 419 REFERENCES 425 INDEX 461

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book focuses on providing a detailed and practical explanation of key existing and emerging wireless networking technologies and trends,while minimizing the amount of theoretical background information. The book also goes beyond simply presenting what the technology is, but also examines why the technology is the way it is, the history of its development, standardization, and deployment. The book also describes how each technology is used, what problems it was designed to solve, what problems it was not designed to solve., how it relates to other technologies in the marketplace, and internetworking challenges faced withing the context of the Internet, as well as providing deployment trends and standardization trends. Finally, this book decomposes evolving wireless technologies to identify key technical and usage trends in order to discuss the likely characteristics of future wireless networks.Table of ContentsPreface xi Acknowledgments xiii About the Authors xv List of Acronyms xvii 1. Introduction 1 1.1 Data Networks versus Cellular Networks 2 1.2 The History of the Wireless Internet 3 1.3 The Difference between Wireless and Wired 4 1.4 The Wireless Internet: Different Models 6 1.5 A Review of Layered Communications Models 9 1.6 Wireless Data Networking Technologies at a Glance 13 1.7 Cellular Networking Technologies at a Glance 18 2. The Wireless Ecosystem 29 2.1 Wireless Standardization Process 29 2.2 IEEE 30 2.3 IETF 32 2.4 3GPP 35 2.5 3GPP2 39 2.6 International Telecommunications Union 40 2.7 Wi-Fi Alliance 45 2.8 WiMax Forum 47 2.9 Bluetooth Special Interest Group 48 2.10 Summary of The Wireless Ecosystem 49 3. Wireless Personal Area Networks 51 3.1 Bluetooth 51 3.2 ZigBee 71 3.3 Ultra Wideband 106 4. Wireless Local Area Networks 112 4.1 The Original 802.11 Specification 113 4.2 IEEE 802.11b 129 4.3 IEEE 802.11a 134 4.4 IEEE 802.11g 138 4.5 IEEE 802.11e 139 4.6 IEEE 802.11n 142 4.7 IEEE 802.11 Security Models 174 4.8 Other WLAN Technologies 178 4.9 Performance of IEEE 802.11 WLAN Technologies 182 4.10 The Future Direction of IEEE 802.11 192 Additional Reading and Online Resources 194 5. Wireless Metropolitan Area Networks 195 5.1 Fixed WiMAX Technology Overview 199 5.2 Usage 246 5.3 Evolution 247 5.4 WiMAX Transition to Cellular Technology 247 Recommended Additional Reading 248 6. Second-Generation (2G) Cellular Communications 250 6.1 Historical Perspectives 251 6.2 Overview of 2G Technologies 252 6.3 2G Deployments 253 6.4 Chapter Overview 254 6.5 An Introduction to GSM 254 6.6 GSM Technology Overview 263 6.7 GSM Physical Layer 303 6.8 GSM Signaling at the Air Interface 308 6.9 GPRS Overview 312 6.10 GSM Security Aspects 345 6.11 EDGE Enhancements 347 6.12 GSM Evolution 351 6.13 GSM Usage 361 Further GSM Reading 363 Acknowledgments 365 7. Third-Generation (3G) Cellular Communications 366 7.1 Universal Mobile Telecommunications System/Wideband Code Division Multiple Access 366 7.2 Mobile WiMAX 402 7.3 CDMA2000 420 Recommended Additional Reading 468 8. Fourth-Generation (4G) Cellular Communications 469 8.1 Long-Term Evolution 470 8.2 LTE-Advanced 549 8.3 IEEE 802.16M 557 Acknowledgments 558 9. Mobile Internetworking 559 9.1 What Is Meant by Mobile Internetworking? 559 9.2 Network Layer Considerations 560 9.3 Transport Layer Considerations 578 10. Key Wireless Technology Trends: A Look at the Future 593 10.1 MIMO 594 10.2 Multicarrier Modulation 601 10.3 Cognitive Radio 611 10.4 Cross-Layer Radio 615 10.5 Network Coding 618 11. Building the Wireless Internet: Putting It All Together 623 11.1 Dimensions of Performance 624 11.2 Concluding Remarks 630 References 632 Index 650

Read more less

Book SynopsisUnmanned systems and robotics technologies have become very popular recently owing to their ability to replace human beings in dangerous, tedious, or repetitious jobs.Table of ContentsList of Figures xv List of Tables xix Foreword xxi Preface xxiii Acknowledgments xxv Acronyms xxvii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Monograph Roadmap 1 1.1.1 Sensing and Control in the Information-Rich World 1 1.1.2 Typical Civilian Application Scenarios 3 1.1.3 Challenges in Sensing and Control Using Unmanned Vehicles 5 1.2 Research Motivations 7 1.2.1 Small Unmanned Aircraft System Design for Remote Sensing 7 1.2.2 State Estimation for Small UAVs 8 1.2.3 Advanced Flight Control for Small UAVs 9 1.2.4 Cooperative Remote Sensing Using Multiple UAVs 10 1.2.5 Diffusion Control Using Mobile Actuator and Sensor Networks 11 1.3 Monograph Contributions 11 1.4 Monograph Organization 12 References 12 2 AggieAir: A Low-Cost Unmanned Aircraft System for Remote Sensing 15 2.1 Introduction 15 2.2 Small UAS Overview 17 2.2.1 Autopilot Hardware 19 2.2.2 Autopilot Software 21 2.2.3 Typical Autopilots for Small UAVs 22 2.3 AggieAir UAS Platform 26 2.3.1 Remote Sensing Requirements 26 2.3.2 AggieAir System Structure 27 2.3.3 Flying-Wing Airframe 30 2.3.4 OSAM-Paparazzi Autopilot 31 2.3.5 OSAM Image Payload Subsystem 32 2.3.6 gRAID Image Georeference Subsystem 36 2.4 OSAM-Paparazzi Interface Design for IMU Integration 39 2.4.1 Hardware Interface Connections 40 2.4.2 Software Interface Design 41 2.5 AggieAir UAS Test Protocol and Tuning 45 2.5.1 AggieAir UAS Test Protocol 45 2.5.2 AggieAir Controller Tuning Procedure 46 2.6 Typical Platforms and Flight Test Results 47 2.6.1 Typical Platforms 47 2.6.2 Flight Test Results 48 2.7 Chapter Summary 50 References 50 3 Attitude Estimation Using Low-Cost IMUs for Small Unmanned Aerial Vehicles 53 3.1 State Estimation Problem Definition 54 3.2 Rigid Body Rotations Basics 55 3.2.1 Frame Definition 55 3.2.2 Rotation Representations 56 3.2.3 Conversion Between Rotation Representations 57 3.2.4 UAV Kinematics 58 3.3 Low-Cost Inertial Measurement Units: Hardware and Sensor Suites 60 3.3.1 IMU Basics and Notations 60 3.3.2 Sensor Packs 61 3.3.3 IMU Categories 63 3.3.4 Example Low-Cost IMUs 63 3.4 Attitude Estimation Using Complementary Filters on SO(3) 65 3.4.1 Passive Complementary Filter 66 3.4.2 Explicit Complementary Filter 66 3.4.3 Flight Test Results 67 3.5 Attitude Estimation Using Extended Kalman Filters 68 3.5.1 General Extended Kalman Filter 68 3.5.2 Quaternion-Based Extended Kalman Filter 69 3.5.3 Euler Angles-Based Extended Kalman Filter 69 3.6 AggieEKF: GPS-Aided Extended Kalman Filter 70 3.7 Chapter Summary 74 References 74 4 Lateral Channel Fractional Order Flight Controller Design for a Small UAV 77 4.1 Introduction 77 4.2 Preliminaries of UAV Flight Control 78 4.3 Roll-Channel System Identification and Control 79 4.3.1 System Model 80 4.3.2 Excitation Signal for System Identification 80 4.3.3 Parameter Optimization 81 4.4 Fractional Order Controller Design 81 4.4.1 Fractional Order Operators 81 4.4.2 PIλ Controller Design 82 4.4.3 Fractional Order Controller Implementation 85 4.5 Simulation Results 86 4.5.1 Introduction to Aerosim Simulation Platform 87 4.5.2 Roll-Channel System Identification 87 4.5.3 Fractional-Order PI Controller Design Procedure 89 4.5.4 Integer-Order PID Controller Design 90 4.5.5 Comparison 90 4.6 UAV Flight Testing Results 92 4.6.1 The ChangE UAV Platform 92 4.6.2 System Identification 94 4.6.3 Proportional Controller and Integer Order PI Controller Design 96 4.6.4 Fractional Order PI Controller Design 97 4.6.5 Flight Test Results 98 4.7 Chapter Summary 99 References 99 5 Remote Sensing Using Single Unmanned Aerial Vehicle 101 5.1 Motivations for Remote Sensing 102 5.1.1 Water Management and Irrigation Control Requirements 102 5.1.2 Introduction of Remote Sensing 102 5.2 Remote Sensing Using Small UAVs 103 5.2.1 Coverage Control 103 5.2.2 Georeference Problem 105 5.3 Sample Applications for AggieAir UAS 109 5.3.1 Real-Time Surveillance 109 5.3.2 Farmland Coverage 109 5.3.3 Road Surveying 111 5.3.4 Water Area Coverage 112 5.3.5 Riparian Surveillance 112 5.3.6 Remote Data Collection 115 5.3.7 Other Applications 116 5.4 Chapter Summary 119 References 119 6 Cooperative Remote Sensing Using Multiple Unmanned Vehicles 121 6.1 Consensus-Based Formation Control 122 6.1.1 Consensus Algorithms 122 6.1.2 Implementation of Consensus Algorithms 123 6.1.3 MASnet Hardware Platform 123 6.1.4 Experimental Results 125 6.2 Surface Wind Profile Measurement Using Multiple UAVs 129 6.2.1 Problem Definition: Wind Profile Measurement 131 6.2.2 Wind Profile Measurement Using UAVs 133 6.2.3 Wind Profile Measurement Using Multiple UAVs 135 6.2.4 Preliminary Simulation and Experimental Results 136 6.3 Chapter Summary 140 References 140 7 Diffusion Control Using Mobile Sensor and Actuator Networks 143 7.1 Motivation and Background 143 7.2 Mathematical Modeling and Problem Formulation 144 7.3 CVT-Based Dynamical Actuator Motion Scheduling Algorithm 146 7.3.1 Motion Planning for Actuators with the First-Order Dynamics 146 7.3.2 Motion Planning for Actuators with the Second-Order Dynamics 147 7.3.3 Neutralizing Control 147 7.4 Grouping Effect in CVT-Based Diffusion Control 147 7.4.1 Grouping for CVT-Based Diffusion Control 148 7.4.2 Diffusion Control Simulation with Different Group Sizes 148 7.4.3 Grouping Effect Summary 150 7.5 Information Consensus in CVT-Based Diffusion Control 154 7.5.1 Basic Consensus Algorithm 154 7.5.2 Requirements of Diffusion Control 154 7.5.3 Consensus-Based CVT Algorithm 155 7.6 Simulation Results 158 7.7 Chapter Summary 164 References 164 8 Conclusions and Future Research Suggestions 167 8.1 Conclusions 167 8.2 Future Research Suggestions 168 8.2.1 VTOL UAS Design for Civilian Applications 168 8.2.2 Monitoring and Control of Fast-Evolving Processes 169 8.2.3 Other Future Research Suggestions 169 References 170 Appendix 171 A.1 List of Documents for CSOIS Flight Test Protocol 171 A.1.1 Sample CSOIS-OSAM Flight Test Request Form 171 A.1.2 Sample CSOIS-OSAM 48 in. UAV (IR) In-lab Inspection Form 172 A.1.3 Sample Preflight Checklist 172 A.2 IMU/GPS Serial Communication Protocols 173 A.2.1 u-blox GPS Serial Protocol 173 A.2.2 Crossbow MNAV IMU Serial Protocol 173 A.2.3 Microstrain GX2 IMU Serial Protocol 174 A.2.4 Xsens Mti-g IMU Serial Protocol 178 A.3 Paparazzi Autopilot Software Architecture: A Modification Guide 182 A.3.1 Autopilot Software Structure 182 A.3.2 Airborne C Files 183 A.3.3 OSAM-Paparazzi Interface Implementation 184 A.3.4 Configuration XML Files 185 A.3.5 Roll-Channel Fractional Order Controller Implementation 189 A.4 DiffMas2D Code Modification Guide 192 A.4.1 Files Description 192 A.4.2 Diffusion Animation Generation 193 A.4.3 Implementation of CVT-Consensus Algorithm 193 References 195 Topic Index 197

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis revised edition immerses practicing and aspiring industry professionals in the complex world of RF design.Table of ContentsPREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION xix PART 1 DESIGN TECHNOLOGIES AND SKILLS 1 1 DIFFERENCE BETWEEN RF AND DIGITAL CIRCUIT DESIGN 3 1.1 Controversy 3 1.2 Difference of RF and Digital Block in a Communication System 6 1.3 Conclusions 9 1.4 Notes for High-Speed Digital Circuit Design 9 2 REFLECTION AND SELF-INTERFERENCE 15 2.1 Introduction 15 2.2 Voltage Delivered from a Source to a Load 16 2.3 Power Delivered from a Source to a Load 23 2.4 Impedance Conjugate Matching 33 2.5 Additional Effect of Impedance Matching 42 3 IMPEDANCE MATCHING IN THE NARROW-BAND CASE 61 3.1 Introduction 61 3.2 Impedance Matching by Means of Return Loss Adjustment 63 3.3 Impedance Matching Network Built by One Part 68 3.4 Impedance Matching Network Built by Two Parts 74 3.5 Impedance Matching Network Built By Three Parts 84 3.6 Impedance Matching When ZS Or ZL Is Not 50 85 3.7 Parts In An Impedance Matching Network 93 4 IMPEDANCE MATCHING IN THE WIDEBAND CASE 131 4.1 Appearance of Narrow and Wideband Return Loss on a Smith Chart 131 4.2 Impedance Variation Due to the Insertion of One Part Per Arm or Per Branch 136 4.3 Impedance Variation Due to the Insertion of Two Parts Per Arm or Per Branch 145 4.4 Partial Impedance Matching for an IQ (in Phase Quadrature) Modulator in a UWB (Ultra Wide Band) System 151 4.5 Discussion of Passive Wideband Impedance Matching Network 174 5 IMPEDANCE AND GAIN OF A RAW DEVICE 181 5.1 Introduction 181 5.2 Miller Effect 183 5.3 Small-Signal Model of a Bipolar Transistor 187 5.4 Bipolar Transistor with CE (Common Emitter) Configuration 190 5.5 Bipolar Transistor with CB (Common Base) Configuration 204 5.6 Bipolar Transistor with CC (Common Collector) Configuration 214 5.7 Small-Signal Model of a MOSFET 221 5.8 Similarity Between a Bipolar Transistor and a MOSFET 225 5.9 MOSFET with CS (Common Source) Configuration 235 5.10 MOSFET with CG (Common Gate) Configuration 244 5.11 MOSFET with CD (Common Drain) Configuration 249 5.12 Comparison of Transistor Configuration of Single-stage Amplifiers with Different Configurations 252 6 IMPEDANCE MEASUREMENT 259 6.1 Introduction 259 6.2 Scalar and Vector Voltage Measurement 260 6.3 Direct Impedance Measurement by a Network Analyzer 263 6.4 Alternative Impedance Measurement by Network Analyzer 272 6.5 Impedance Measurement Using a Circulator 276 7 GROUNDING 281 7.1 Implication of Grounding 281 7.2 Possible Grounding Problems Hidden in a Schematic 283 7.3 Imperfect or Inappropriate Grounding Examples 284 7.4 'Zero' Capacitor 290 7.5 Quarter Wavelength of Microstrip Line 300 8 EQUIPOTENTIALITY AND CURRENT COUPLING ON THE GROUND SURFACE 325 8.1 Equipotentiality on the Ground Surface 325 8.2 Forward and Return Current Coupling 335 8.3 PCB or IC Chip with Multimetallic Layers 344 9 LAYOUT 349 9.1 Difference in Layout between an Individual Block and a System 349 9.2 Primary Considerations of a PCB 350 9.3 Layout of a PCB for Testing 352 9.4 VIA Modeling 355 9.5 Runner 360 9.6 Parts 369 9.7 Free Space 371 10 MANUFACTURABILITY OF PRODUCT DESIGN 377 10.1 Introduction 377 10.2 Implication of 6σ Design 379 10.3 Approaching 6σ Design 383 10.4 Monte Carlo Analysis 386 11 RFIC (RADIO FREQUENCY INTEGRATED CIRCUIT) 401 11.1 Interference and Isolation 401 11.2 Shielding for an RF Module by a Metallic Shielding Box 403 11.3 Strong Desirability to Develop RFIC 405 11.4 Interference going along IC Substrate Path 406 11.5 Solution for Interference Coming from Sky 411 11.6 Common Grounding Rules for RF Module and RFIC Design 412 11.7 Bottlenecks in RFIC Design 414 11.8 Calculating of Quarter Wavelength 420 PART 2 RF SYSTEM 427 12 MAIN PARAMETERS AND SYSTEM ANALYSIS IN RF CIRCUIT DESIGN 429 12.1 Introduction 429 12.2 Power Gain 431 12.3 Noise 441 12.4 Nonlinearity 453 12.5 Other Parameters 480 12.6 Example of RF System Analysis 482 13 SPECIALITY OF "‘ZERO IF"’ SYSTEM 501 13.1 Why Differential Pair? 501 13.2 Can DC Offset be Blocked out by a Capacitor? 508 13.3 Chopping Mixer 511 13.4 DC Offset Cancellation by Calibration 516 13.5 Remark on DC Offset Cancellation 517 14 DIFFERENTIAL PAIRS 521 14.1 Fundamentals of Differential Pairs 521 14.2 CMRR (Common Mode Rejection Ratio) 533 15 RF BALUN 547 15.1 Introduction 547 15.2 Transformer Balun 549 15.3 LC Balun 571 15.4 Microstrip Line Balun 580 15.5 Mixing Type of Balun 583 16 SOC (SYSTEM-ON-A-CHIP) AND NEXT 611 16.1 SOC 611 16.2 What is Next 612 PART 3 INDIVIDUAL RF BLOCKS 625 17 LNA (LOW-NOISE AMPLIFIER) 627 17.1 Introduction 627 17.2 Single-Ended Single Device LNA 628 17.3 Single-Ended Cascode LNA 662 17.4 LNA with AGC (Automatic Gain Control) 684 18 MIXER 695 18.1 Introduction 695 18.2 Passive Mixer 698 18.3 Active Mixer 706 18.4 Design Schemes 717 19 TUNABLE FILTER 731 19.1 Tunable Filter in A Communication System 731 19.2 Coupling between two Tank Circuits 733 19.3 Circuit Description 738 19.4 Effect of Second Coupling 739 19.5 Performance 743 20 VCO (VOLTAGE-CONTROLLED OSCILLATOR) 749 20.1 "Three-Point" Types of Oscillator 749 20.2 Other Single-Ended Oscillators 755 20.3 VCO and PLL (Phase Lock Loop) 759 20.4 Design Example of a Single-Ended VCO 769 20.5 Differential VCO and Quad-Phases VCO 778 21 PA (POWER AMPLIFIER) 789 21.1 Classification of PA 789 21.2 Single-Ended PA 794 21.3 Single-Ended PA IC Design 798 21.4 Push–Pull PA Design 799 21.5 PA with Temperature Compensation 822 21.6 PA with Output Power Control 823 21.7 Linear PA 824 References 828 Further Reading 828 Exercises 829 Answers 829 INDEX 833

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book covers channel coding and modulation technologies in DTTB systems from the general concepts to the detailed analysis and implementation. Covers theChinese DTTB standard which was announced recently and hasn't been covered in detail Introduces the SFN network using the successful implementation of DTMB in Hong Kong as an example Introduces the latest announced systems including the ATSC M/H and DVB-NGH Table of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Basic Concepts of Digital Terrestrial Television Transmission System 11.1 Introduction and Historic Review 11.1.1 Birth and Development of Television Black-and-White TV Era 11.1.2 Analog Color TV Era 21.1.3 Digital TV Era 31.2 Major International and Regional DTV Organizations 71.2.1 International DTV Broadcasting Standards 71.2.2 Related International and Regional Organizations 91.3 Composition of DTV System 111.3.1 Constitution of DTV System 111.3.2 Functional Layers of DTV 141.4 Compression Layer and Multiplexing Layer 191.4.1 Image Format 191.4.2 Compression Modes for DTV Signal 191.4.3 MPEG-2 for Video Compression 201.4.4 Intraframe Coding 211.4.5 Interframe Coding Method 231.4.6 Audio Compression 241.4.7 MPEG-2 Coding 251.4.8 MPEG-2 Multiplexing 261.4.9 Transport Stream 261.5 Current Deployment of DTTB Systems 291.5.1 Developments of ATSC DVB-T and ISDB-T 301.5.2 Development and Deployment of DTMB System 331.5.3 Network Convergence with DTTB Systems 351.6 Summary 37References 372 Channel Characteristics of Digital Terrestrial Television Broadcasting Systems 392.1 Introduction 392.2 Mathematical Models of Wireless Radio Channel 422.2.1 Statistical Model of Channel Impulse Response 422.2.2 Channel Impulse Response with Deterministic Parameters 442.3 Property of Wireless Fading Channel Parameters 462.3.1 Multipath Delay Spread and Frequency-Selective Fading 462.3.2 Doppler Shift and Time-Selective Fading 502.3.3 Time- and Frequency-Selective Fading of Wireless Radio Channel 542.4 Commonly Used Statistical Models for Fading Channel 552.4.1 Rayleigh Fading Model 552.4.2 Ricean Fading Model 562.5 DTTB Channel Model 582.5.1 Typical DTTB Channel Model 582.5.2 Single-Frequency Network of Channel Model for DTTB Systems 632.6 Summary 67References 683 Channel Coding for DTTB System 693.1 Channel Capacity and Shannon’s Channel Coding Theorem 693.2 Error Control and Classification of Channel Coding 733.3 Linear Block Code 753.3.1 Basic Concept of Linear Block Code 753.3.2 BCH Code 783.3.3 Reed–Solomon Code 793.4 Convolutional Codes 803.4.1 Construction and Description of Convolutional Codes 813.4.2 Distance Property and Decoding of Convolutional Codes 843.5 Interleaving 873.5.1 Block Interleaving 873.5.2 Convolutional Interleaving 883.6 Concatenation Codes 893.7 Parallel Codes 923.7.1 Product Codes 923.7.2 Turbo Codes and Iterative Decoding 943.8 Trellis Coding and Modulation 1003.8.1 Mapping by Set Partition of TCM Codes 1003.8.2 Code Construction and Basic Principles of TCM Codes 1013.9 Low-Density Parity-Check Code 1033.9.1 Basic Concept of LDPC Codes 1043.9.2 Decoding Algorithms of LDPC Codes 1063.10 Channel Coding Adopted by Different DTV Broadcasting Standards 1083.11 Summary 110References 1104 Modulation Technologies for DTTB System 1134.1 Introduction 1134.2 Digital Modulation 1144.2.1 Signal Space and Its Representation 1144.2.2 Typical Digital Modulations 1174.2.3 The Power Spectrum of Modulated Signal 1244.2.4 Demodulation and Performance Evaluation 1294.2.5 Variations of Digital Modulations 1374.3 Bit-Interleaved Coded Modulation 1404.3.1 BICM System Model 1404.3.2 BICM Design and Performance Evaluation 1414.3.3 BICM-ID System Model 1444.3.4 BICM-ID with Doping: Design and Performance Evaluation 1454.3.5 BICM-ID Design Based on EXIT Charts 1464.3.6 BICM-ID with LDPC Coding 1474.4 Multicarrier Modulation 1484.4.1 Principle of Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing 1494.4.2 Implementation of OFDMwith Discrete Fourier Transform 1514.4.3 Guard Interval and Cyclic Prefix of OFDM 1524.4.4 Frequency Domain Property 1564.4.5 General Comparison between OFDM and Single-Carrier Modulation System 1574.5 Design Considerations of DTTB Modulation 1594.5.1 Modulation Scheme Determination 1594.5.2 Modulation Schemes in Typical DTTB Standards 1604.6 Summary 160References 1615 First-Generation DTTB Standards 1635.1 General Introduction 1635.1.1 ATSC Standard 1635.1.2 DVB-T Standard 1645.1.3 ISDB-T Standard 1645.1.4 DTMB Standard 1645.2 Introduction to ATSC Standard 1645.2.1 Scrambler 1665.2.2 RS Encoding and Data Interleaving 1675.2.3 TCM Encoder and Interleaver 1685.2.4 Multiplexing 1695.2.5 Pilot Insertion and VSB Modulation 1705.3 Introduction to DVB-T Standard 1715.3.1 Channel Coding 1735.3.2 Modulation 1765.4 Introduction to ISDB-T Standard 1805.4.1 Multiplexing 1845.4.2 Channel Coding 1855.4.3 Constellation Mapping and Modulation 1865.4.4 TMCC Information 1945.5 Introduction to DTMB Standard 1955.5.1 Major System Parameters 1975.5.2 Input Data Format 1985.5.3 Scrambler 1985.5.4 FEC Coding 1985.5.5 Constellation Mapping 2015.5.6 Interleaving 2035.5.7 System Information 2055.5.8 Signal Frame Structure 2065.5.9 Frame Header (FH) 2075.5.10 Frame Body Data Processing 2095.5.11 Baseband Signal Post Processing 2105.5.12 RF Output Interface 2105.5.13 System Payload Data Throughput 2135.6 Summary 213References 2136 Second-Generation DTTB Standards 2156.1 Introduction to Second-Generation Digital Video Broadcasting 2156.1.1 System Structure 2176.1.2 Input Processing 2176.1.3 Bit-Interleaved Coding and Modulation 2206.1.4 Frame Builder 2266.1.5 OFDM Symbol Generation 2286.2 Introduction to DTMB-A System 2356.2.1 System Architecture 2356.2.2 Interface and Data Preprocessing 2366.2.3 Scrambling Interleaving and Modulation 2386.2.4 Superframe Structure 2456.2.5 Signal Frame 2476.2.6 Synchronization Channel 2486.2.7 Transmit Diversity 2516.2.8 Baseband Postprocessing 2526.2.9 RF Signal 2526.2.10 Baseband Signal Spectrum Characteristics and Spectrum Mask 2526.2.11 System Payload Data Rate 2536.3 Summary 254References 2547 Design and Implementation of DTV Receiver 2557.1 Introduction 2557.2 Mathematical Principles 2597.2.1 Channel Synchronization 2597.2.2 Channel Estimation 2627.3 Single-Carrier Systems 2697.3.1 Timing Synchronization 2697.3.2 Carrier Synchronization 2727.3.3 Channel Estimation and Equalization 2767.4 Multicarrier Systems 2807.4.1 Timing Synchronization 2807.4.2 Carrier Synchronization 2807.4.3 Channel Estimation/Equalization for OFDM System 2857.5 Introduction to DTMB Inner Receiver 2887.5.1 Frame Synchronization 2897.5.2 Carrier Synchronization 2917.5.3 Channel Estimation and Equalization 2927.6 Summary 297References 2978 Network Planning for DTTB Systems 2998.1 Introduction 2998.2 Basic Concepts 3008.2.1 Carrier-to-Noise Ratio 3008.2.2 Minimal Field Strength 3008.2.3 Cliff Effect 3018.2.4 Location Coverage Probability 3018.2.5 Protection Ratio 3028.3 Analog and Digital TV Broadcasting 3038.3.1 Comparison between Analog and Digital Transmissions 3038.3.2 Frequency Planning for Terrestrial Broadcasting 3038.3.3 Simulcast of Digital and Analog TV 3048.3.4 Frequency Utilization of Terrestrial Broadcasting 3058.4 Multiple-Frequency and Single-Frequency Networks 3068.4.1 Introduction to MFN 3068.4.2 Introduction to SFN 3078.4.3 Classification of SFNs 3088.4.4 Interference Analysis of SFN 3098.4.5 Synchronization in SFN 3108.4.6 Network Gain in SFN 3128.4.7 Application of SFN 3148.5 Transmission System of DTTB 3148.5.1 DTTB Transmitter System 3168.5.2 DTTB Exciter 3188.5.3 Power Amplifier 3218.5.4 Multiplexer 3228.5.5 Transmitting Antenna 3258.6 Signal Reception of DTTB 3278.6.1 Main Impact Factors of Physical DTTB Channel 3278.6.2 Fixed Reception 3288.6.3 Portable Reception 3288.6.4 Mobile Reception 3298.7 Diversity Techniques 3298.7.1 Various Diversity Schemes 3298.7.2 Design Principles of Diversity Schemes for DTTB System 3308.7.3 Transmit Diversity Technique 3318.7.4 Receiving Diversity 3378.8 Summary 343References 3439 Performance Measurement on DTTB Systems 3459.1 Introduction 3459.2 Measurement Description 3459.2.1 BER Measurement and Decision Threshold 3469.2.2 C/N Measurement 3509.2.3 Input Signal Level to the Receiver 3519.2.4 Interface Parameters 3519.2.5 Multipath Models 3519.2.6 Laboratory Test 3519.3 Laboratory Test Plan Using DTMB System as Example 3549.3.1 Laboratory Test Platform 3549.3.2 Interface Setup of Test Platform 3559.3.3 C/N Threshold under Gaussian Channel 3559.3.4 Minimum Reception Level in Gaussian Channel 3579.3.5 Maximum Reception Level 3599.3.6 C/N Threshold in Ricean Channel 3609.3.7 C/N Threshold in Rayleigh Channel 3619.3.8 Maximum Doppler Frequency Shift in Dynamic Multipath Channel 3629.3.9 Maximum Delay Spread in Two-Path Channel with 0-dB Echo 3649.3.10 C/N Threshold in Two-Path Channel with 0-dB Echo 3659.3.11 Maximum Pulse Width of Impulse Noise Interference 3669.3.12 C/I Measurement with Cochannel and Adjacent-Channel Analog TV Signal Interference 3689.3.13 C/I Measurement with Cochannel and Adjacent-Channel DTV Signal Interference 3719.3.14 C/I Measurement with Single-Tone Interference 3729.3.15 Antiphase Noise Measurement 3759.4 Field Test Plan 3769.4.1 Field Test 3769.4.2 Objectives of Field Test 3779.4.3 Testing Signal 3799.4.4 Antenna 3799.4.5 Measurement Time 3809.4.6 Channel Characteristic Recoding 3819.4.7 Test Location 3819.4.8 Test Calibration 3819.4.9 Records and Documents 3819.4.10 Test: Instruments and Auxiliary Equipment 3829.4.11 Coverage Test Procedure 3839.4.12 Service Test Procedures 3869.4.13 Measurement Guideline of Field Test for DTTB System 3899.4.14 Field Test Platform 3909.4.15 Procedure for Fixed Reception Test 3909.4.16 Mobile Test 3919.5 Summary 392References 39210 Digital Mobile Multimedia Broadcasting Systems 39310.1 Introduction 39310.2 DVB-H System 39510.2.1 Block Diagram of DVB-H System 39610.2.2 Technical Features of DVB-H System 39710.3 ATSC-M/H System 40210.3.1 Frame Structure of ATSC-M/H System 40310.3.2 ATSC-M/H System Block Diagram 40310.3.3 Frame Encoding of ATSC-M/H System 40510.3.4 Block Processor of ATSC-M/H System 40610.3.5 ATSC-M/H Trellis Encoder 40610.4 CMMB System 40810.4.1 Frame Structure of CMMB System 40810.4.2 Channel Coding of CMMB System 40810.4.3 CMMB Byte Interleaving 40910.4.4 Modulation Scheme of CMMB System 41110.4.5 Payload Data Rate of CMMB System 41110.5 DVB-NGH 41310.5.1 Alamouti Scheme 41510.5.2 eSFN Scheme 41610.5.3 eSM-PH Scheme 41910.5.4 Hybrid System 42210.6 Summary 424References 426Index 427

Read more less

Book SynopsisA timely book containing foundations and current research directions on emotion recognition by facial expression, voice, gesture and biopotential signalsThis book provides a comprehensive examination of the research methodology of different modalities of emotion recognition. Key topics of discussion include facial expression, voice and biopotential signal-based emotion recognition. Special emphasis is given to feature selection, feature reduction, classifier design and multi-modal fusion to improve performance of emotion-classifiers.Written by several experts, the book includes several tools and techniques, including dynamic Bayesian networks, neural nets, hidden Markov model, rough sets, type-2 fuzzy sets, support vector machines and their applications in emotion recognition by different modalities. The book ends with a discussion on emotion recognition in automotive fields to determine stress and anger of the drivers, responsible for degradation of tTable of ContentsPreface xix Acknowledgments xxvii Contributors xxix 1 Introduction to Emotion Recognition 1 Amit Konar, Anisha Halder, and Aruna Chakraborty 1.1 Basics of Pattern Recognition, 1 1.2 Emotion Detection as a Pattern Recognition Problem, 2 1.3 Feature Extraction, 3 1.4 Feature Reduction Techniques, 15 1.5 Emotion Classification, 17 1.6 Multimodal Emotion Recognition, 24 1.7 Stimulus Generation for Emotion Arousal, 24 1.8 Validation Techniques, 26 1.9 Summary, 27 References, 28 Author Biographies, 44 2 Exploiting Dynamic Dependencies Among Action Units for Spontaneous Facial Action Recognition 47 Yan Tong and Qiang Ji 2.1 Introduction, 48 2.2 Related Work, 49 2.3 Modeling the Semantic and Dynamic Relationships Among AUs With a DBN, 50 2.4 Experimental Results, 60 2.5 Conclusion, 64 References, 64 Author Biographies, 66 3 Facial Expressions: A Cross-Cultural Study 69 Chandrani Saha, Washef Ahmed, Soma Mitra, Debasis Mazumdar, and Sushmita Mitra 3.1 Introduction, 69 3.2 Extraction of Facial Regions and Ekman’s Action Units, 71 3.3 Cultural Variation in Occurrence of Different AUs, 76 3.4 Classification Performance Considering Cultural Variability, 79 3.5 Conclusion, 84 References, 84 Author Biographies, 86 4 A Subject-Dependent Facial Expression Recognition System 89 Chuan-Yu Chang and Yan-Chiang Huang 4.1 Introduction, 89 4.2 Proposed Method, 91 4.3 Experiment Result, 103 4.4 Conclusion, 109 Acknowledgment, 110 References, 110 Author Biographies, 112 5 Facial Expression Recognition Using Independent Component Features and Hidden Markov Model 113 Md. Zia Uddin and Tae-Seong Kim 5.1 Introduction, 114 5.2 Methodology, 115 5.3 Experimental Results, 123 5.4 Conclusion, 125 Acknowledgments, 125 References, 126 Author Biographies, 127 6 Feature Selection for Facial Expression Based on Rough Set Theory 129 Yong Yang and Guoyin Wang 6.1 Introduction, 129 6.2 Feature Selection for Emotion Recognition Based on Rough Set Theory, 131 6.3 Experiment Results and Discussion, 137 6.4 Conclusion, 143 Acknowledgments, 143 References, 143 Author Biographies, 145 7 Emotion Recognition from Facial Expressions Using Type-2 Fuzzy Sets 147 Anisha Halder, Amit Konar, Aruna Chakraborty, and Atulya K. Nagar 7.1 Introduction, 148 7.2 Preliminaries on Type-2 Fuzzy Sets, 150 7.3 Uncertainty Management in Fuzzy-Space for Emotion Recognition, 152 7.4 Fuzzy Type-2 Membership Evaluation, 157 7.5 Experimental Details, 161 7.6 Performance Analysis, 167 7.7 Conclusion, 175 References, 176 Author Biographies, 180 8 Emotion Recognition from Non-frontal Facial Images 183 Wenming Zheng, Hao Tang, and Thomas S. Huang 8.1 Introduction, 184 8.2 A Brief Review of Automatic Emotional Expression Recognition, 187 8.3 Databases for Non-frontal Facial Emotion Recognition, 191 8.4 Recent Advances of Emotion Recognition from Non-Frontal Facial Images, 196 8.5 Discussions and Conclusions, 205 Acknowledgments, 206 References, 206 Author Biographies, 211 9 Maximum a Posteriori Based Fusion Method for Speech Emotion Recognition 215 Ling Cen, Zhu Liang Yu, and Wee Ser 9.1 Introduction, 216 9.2 Acoustic Feature Extraction for Emotion Recognition, 219 9.3 Proposed Map-Based Fusion Method, 223 9.4 Experiment, 229 9.5 Conclusion, 232 References, 232 Author Biographies, 234 10 Emotion Recognition in Naturalistic Speech and Language—A Survey 237 Felix Weninger, Martin W¨ollmer, and Björn Schuller 10.1 Introduction, 238 10.2 Tasks and Applications, 239 10.3 Implementation and Evaluation, 244 10.4 Challenges, 253 10.5 Conclusion and Outlook, 257 Acknowledgment, 259 References, 259 Author Biographies, 267 11 EEG-Based Emotion Recognition Using Advanced Signal Processing Techniques 269 Panagiotis C. Petrantonakis and Leontios J. Hadjileontiadis 11.1 Introduction, 270 11.2 Brain Activity and Emotions, 271 11.3 EEG-ER Systems: An Overview, 272 11.4 Emotion Elicitation, 273 11.5 Advanced Signal Processing in EEG-ER, 275 11.6 Concluding Remarks and Future Directions, 287 References, 289 Author Biographies, 292 12 Frequency Band Localization on Multiple Physiological Signals for Human Emotion Classification Using DWT 295 M. Murugappan 12.1 Introduction, 296 12.2 Related Work, 297 12.3 Research Methodology, 299 12.4 Experimental Results and Discussions, 306 12.5 Conclusion, 310 12.6 Future Work, 310 Acknowledgments, 310 References, 310 Author Biography, 312 13 Toward Affective Brain–Computer Interface: Fundamentals and Analysis of EEG-Based Emotion Classification 315 Yuan-Pin Lin, Tzyy-Ping Jung, Yijun Wang, and Julie Onton 13.1 Introduction, 316 13.2 Materials and Methods, 323 13.3 Results and Discussion, 327 13.4 Conclusion, 332 13.5 Issues and Challenges Toward ABCIs, 332 Acknowledgments, 336 References, 336 Author Biographies, 340 14 Bodily Expression for Automatic Affect Recognition 343 Hatice Gunes, Caifeng Shan, Shizhi Chen, and YingLi Tian 14.1 Introduction, 344 14.2 Background and Related Work, 345 14.3 Creating a Database of Facial and Bodily Expressions: The FABO Database, 353 14.4 Automatic Recognition of Affect from Bodily Expressions, 356 14.5 Automatic Recognition of Bodily Expression Temporal Dynamics, 361 14.6 Discussion and Outlook, 367 14.7 Conclusions, 369 Acknowledgments, 370 References, 370 Author Biographies, 375 15 Building a Robust System for Multimodal Emotion Recognition 379 Johannes Wagner, Florian Lingenfelser, and Elisabeth André 15.1 Introduction, 380 15.2 Related Work, 381 15.3 The Callas Expressivity Corpus, 382 15.4 Methodology, 386 15.5 Multisensor Data Fusion, 390 15.6 Experiments, 395 15.7 Online Recognition System, 399 15.8 Conclusion, 403 Acknowledgment, 404 References, 404 Author Biographies, 410 16 Semantic Audiovisual Data Fusion for Automatic Emotion Recognition 411 Dragos Datcu and Leon J. M. Rothkrantz 16.1 Introduction, 412 16.2 Related Work, 413 16.3 Data Set Preparation, 416 16.4 Architecture, 418 16.5 Results, 431 16.6 Conclusion, 432 References, 432 Author Biographies, 434 17 A Multilevel Fusion Approach for Audiovisual Emotion Recognition 437 Girija Chetty, Michael Wagner, and Roland Goecke 17.1 Introduction, 437 17.2 Motivation and Background, 438 17.3 Facial Expression Quantification, 440 17.4 Experiment Design, 444 17.5 Experimental Results and Discussion, 450 17.6 Conclusion, 456 References, 456 Author Biographies, 459 18 From a Discrete Perspective of Emotions to Continuous, Dynamic, and Multimodal Affect Sensing 461 Isabelle Hupont, Sergio Ballano, Eva Cerezo, and Sandra Baldassarri 18.1 Introduction, 462 18.2 A Novel Method for Discrete Emotional Classification of Facial Images, 465 18.3 A 2D Emotional Space for Continuous and Dynamic Facial Affect Sensing, 469 18.4 Expansion to Multimodal Affect Sensing, 474 18.5 Building Tools That Care, 479 18.6 Concluding Remarks and Future Work, 486 Acknowledgments, 488 References, 488 Author Biographies, 491 19 Audiovisual Emotion Recognition Using Semi-Coupled Hidden Markov Model with State-Based Alignment Strategy 493 Chung-Hsien Wu, Jen-Chun Lin, and Wen-Li Wei 19.1 Introduction, 494 19.2 Feature Extraction, 495 19.3 Semi-Coupled Hidden Markov Model, 500 19.4 Experiments, 504 19.5 Conclusion, 508 References, 509 Author Biographies, 512 20 Emotion Recognition in Car Industry 515 Christos D. Katsis, George Rigas, Yorgos Goletsis, and Dimitrios I. Fotiadis 20.1 Introduction, 516 20.2 An Overview of Application for the Car Industry, 517 20.3 Modality-Based Categorization, 517 20.4 Emotion-Based Categorization, 520 20.5 Two Exemplar Cases, 523 20.6 Open Issues and Future Steps, 536 20.7 Conclusion, 537 References, 537 Author Biographies, 543 Index 545

Read more less

Book SynopsisProvides an up-to-date, in-depth look at the current research, design, and implementation of cooperative vehicle safety communication protocols and technology Improving traffic safety has been a top concern for transportation agencies around the world and the focus of heavy research and development efforts sponsored by both governments and private industries. Cooperative vehicle systemswhich use sensors and wireless technologies to reduce traffic accidentscan play a major role in making the world''s roads safer. Vehicle Safety Communications: Protocols, Security, and Privacy describes fundamental issues in cooperative vehicle safety and recent advances in technologies for enabling cooperative vehicle safety. It gives an overview of traditional vehicle safety issues, the evolution of vehicle safety technologies, and the need for cooperative systems where vehicles work together to reduce the number of crashes or mitigate damage when crashes become unavoidabTable of ContentsForeword xv Ralf G. Herrtwich Foreword xvii Flavio Bonomi Foreword xix Adam Drobot Preface xxi Acknowledgments xxv 1 Traffic Safety 1 1.1 Traffic Safety Facts 1 1.1.1 Fatalities 2 1.1.2 Leading Causes of Crashes 3 1.1.3 Current Trends 5 1.2 European Union 5 1.3 Japan 7 1.4 Developing Countries 7 References 8 2 Automotive Safety Evolution 10 2.1 Passive Safety 10 2.1.1 Safety Cage and the Birth of Passive Safety 10 2.1.2 Seat Belts 11 2.1.3 Air Bags 11 2.2 Active Safety 12 2.2.1 Antilock Braking System 12 2.2.2 Electronic Stability Control 13 2.2.3 Brake Assist 13 2.3 Advanced Driver Assistance Systems 14 2.3.1 Adaptive Cruise Control 15 2.3.2 Blind Spot Assist 16 2.3.3 Attention Assist 16 2.3.4 Precrash Systems 16 2.4 Cooperative Safety 17 References 18 3 Vehicle Architectures 20 3.1 Electronic Control Units 20 3.2 Vehicle Sensors 21 3.2.1 Radars 21 3.2.2 Cameras 21 3.3 Onboard Communication Networks 22 3.3.1 Controller Area Network 23 3.3.2 Local Interconnect Network 23 3.3.3 FlexRay 24 3.3.4 Media Oriented Systems Transport 24 3.3.5 Onboard Diagnostics 24 3.4 Vehicle Data 25 3.5 Vehicle Data Security 26 3.6 Vehicle Positioning 27 3.6.1 Global Positioning System 27 3.6.2 Galileo 29 3.6.3 Global Navigation Satellite System 29 3.6.4 Positioning Accuracy 30 References 30 4 Connected Vehicles 32 4.1 Connected Vehicle Applications 32 4.1.1 Hard Safety Applications 32 4.1.2 Soft Safety Applications 33 4.1.3 Mobility and Convenience Applications 33 4.2 Uniqueness in Consumer Vehicle Networks 34 4.3 Vehicle Communication Modes 36 4.3.1 Vehicle-to-Vehicle Local Broadcast 36 4.3.2 V2V Multihop Message Dissemination 37 4.3.3 Infrastructure-to-Vehicle Local Broadcast 38 4.3.4 Vehicle-to-Infrastructure Bidirectional Communications 39 4.4 Wireless Communications Technology for Vehicles 39 References 42 5 Dedicated Short-Range Communications 44 5.1 The 5.9 GHz Spectrum 44 5.1.1 DSRC Frequency Band Usage 45 5.1.2 DSRC Channels 45 5.1.3 DSRC Operations 46 5.2 DSRC in the European Union 46 5.3 DSRC in Japan 47 5.4 DSRC Standards 48 5.4.1 Wireless Access in Vehicular Environments 48 5.4.2 Wireless Access in Vehicular Environments Protocol Stack 48 5.4.3 International Harmonization 50 References 50 6 WAVE Physical Layer 52 6.1 Physical Layer Operations 52 6.1.1 Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing 52 6.1.2 Modulation and Coding Rates 53 6.1.3 Frame Reception 54 6.2 PHY Amendments 55 6.2.1 Channel Width 56 6.2.2 Spectrum Masks 56 6.2.3 Improved Receiver Performance 57 6.3 PHY Layer Modeling 57 6.3.1 Network Simulator Architecture 58 6.3.2 RF Model 59 6.3.3 Wireless PHY 61 References 62 7 WAVE Media Access Control Layer 64 7.1 Media Access Control Layer Operations 64 7.1.1 Carrier Sensing Multiple Access with Collision Avoidance 64 7.1.2 Hidden Terminal Effects 65 7.1.3 Basic Service Set 66 7.2 MAC Layer Amendments 66 7.3 MAC Layer Modeling 67 7.3.1 Transmission 68 7.3.2 Reception 68 7.3.3 Channel State Manager 68 7.3.4 Back-Off Manager 69 7.3.5 Transmission Coordination 70 7.3.6 Reception Coordination 71 7.4 Overhauled ns-2 Implementation 72 References 74 8 DSRC Data Rates 75 8.1 Introduction 75 8.2 Communication Density 76 8.2.1 Simulation Study 77 8.2.2 Broadcast Reception Rates 78 8.2.3 Channel Access Delay 81 8.2.4 Frames Reception Failures 83 8.3 Optimal Data Rate 85 8.3.1 Modulation and Coding Rates 85 8.3.2 Simulation Study 86 8.3.3 Simulation Matrix 87 8.3.4 Simulation Results 88 References 91 9 WAVE Upper Layers 93 9.1 Introduction 93 9.2 DSRC Multichannel Operations 94 9.2.1 Time Synchronization 94 9.2.2 Synchronization Intervals 95 9.2.3 Guard Intervals 96 9.2.4 Channel Switching 96 9.2.5 Channel Switching State Machine 96 9.3 Protocol Evaluation 97 9.3.1 Simulation Study 98 9.3.2 Simulation Scenarios 99 9.3.3 Simulation Results 99 9.3.4 Protocol Enhancements 102 9.4 WAVE Short Message Protocol 103 References 104 10 Vehicle-to-Infrastructure Safety Applications 106 10.1 Intersection Crashes 106 10.2 Cooperative Intersection Collision Avoidance System for Violations 107 10.2.1 CICAS-V Design 107 10.2.2 CICAS-V Development 110 10.2.3 CICAS-V Testing 116 10.3 Integrated Safety Demonstration 118 10.3.1 Demonstration Concept 118 10.3.2 Hardware Components 120 10.3.3 Demo Design 121 References 124 11 Vehicle-to-Vehicle Safety Applications 126 11.1 Cooperation among Vehicles 126 11.2 V2V Safety Applications 127 11.3 V2V Safety Applications Design 128 11.3.1 Basic Safety Messages 129 11.3.2 Minimum Performance Requirements 129 11.3.3 Target Classifi cation 131 11.3.4 Vehicle Representation 132 11.3.5 Sample Applications 133 11.4 System Implementation 135 11.4.1 Onboard Unit Hardware Components 135 11.4.2 OBU Software Architecture 135 11.4.3 Driver–Vehicle Interface 137 11.5 System Testing 138 11.5.1 Communications Coverage and Antenna Considerations 138 11.5.2 Positioning 139 References 140 12 DSRC Scalability 141 12.1 Introduction 141 12.2 DSRC Data Traffic 142 12.2.1 DSRC Safety Messages 142 12.2.2 Transmission Parameters 143 12.2.3 Channel Load Assessment 144 12.3 Congestion Control Algorithms 145 12.3.1 Desired Properties 145 12.3.2 Transmission Power Adjustment 146 12.3.3 Message Rate Adjustment 147 12.3.4 Simulation Study 148 12.4 Conclusions 148 References 149 13 Security and Privacy Threats and Requirements 151 13.1 Introduction 151 13.2 Adversaries 151 13.3 Security Threats 152 13.3.1 Send False Safety Messages Using Valid Security Credentials 152 13.3.2 Falsely Accuse Innocent Vehicles 153 13.3.3 Impersonate Vehicles or Other Network Entities 153 13.3.4 Denial-of-Service Attacks Specific to Consumer Vehicle Networks 154 13.3.5 Compromise OBU Software or Firmware 155 13.4 Privacy Threats 155 13.4.1 Privacy in a Vehicle Network 155 13.4.2 Privacy Threats in Consumer Vehicle Networks 156 13.4.3 How Driver Privacy can be Breached Today 158 13.5 Basic Security Capabilities 159 13.5.1 Authentication 159 13.5.2 Misbehavior Detection and Revocation 160 13.5.3 Data Integrity 160 13.5.4 Data Confidentiality 160 13.6 Privacy Protections Capabilities 161 13.7 Design and Performance Considerations 161 13.7.1 Scalability 162 13.7.2 Balancing Competing Requirements 162 13.7.3 Minimal Side Effects 163 13.7.4 Quantifi able Levels of Security and Privacy 163 13.7.5 Adaptability 163 13.7.6 Security and Privacy Protection for V2V Broadcast 163 13.7.7 Security and Privacy Protection for Communications with Security Servers 164 References 165 14 Cryptographic Mechanisms 167 14.1 Introduction 167 14.2 Categories of Cryptographic Mechanisms 167 14.2.1 Cryptographic Hash Functions 168 14.2.2 Symmetric Key Algorithms 169 14.2.3 Public Key (Asymmetric Key) Algorithms 170 14.3 Digital Signature Algorithms 172 14.3.1 The RSA Algorithm 172 14.3.2 The DSA Algorithm 178 14.3.3 The ECDSA Algorithm 184 14.3.4 ECDSA for Vehicle Safety Communications 194 14.4 Message Authentication and Message Integrity Verifi cation 196 14.4.1 Authentication and Integrity Verifi cation Using Hash Functions 197 14.4.2 Authentication and Integrity Verifi cation Using Digital Signatures 198 14.5 Diffi e–Hellman Key Establishment Protocol 200 14.5.1 The Original Diffie–Hellman Key Establishment Protocol 200 14.5.2 Elliptic Curve Diffie–Hellman Key Establishment Protocol 201 14.6 Elliptic Curve Integrated Encryption Scheme (ECIES) 202 14.6.1 The Basic Idea 202 14.6.2 Scheme Setup 202 14.6.3 Encrypt a Message 202 14.6.4 Decrypt a Message 204 14.6.5 Performance 204 References 206 15 Public Key Infrastructure for Vehicle Networks 209 15.1 Introduction 209 15.2 Public Key Certificates 210 15.3 Message Authentication with Certificates 211 15.4 Certifi cate Revocation List 212 15.5 A Baseline Reference Vehicular PKI Model 213 15.6 Confi gure Initial Security Parameters and Assign Initial Certificates 215 15.6.1 Vehicles Create Their Private and Public Keys 216 15.6.2 Certificate Authority Creates Private and Public Keys for Vehicles 217 15.7 Acquire New Keys and Certifi cates 217 15.8 Distribute Certifi cates to Vehicles for Signature Verifications 220 15.9 Detect Misused Certifi cates and Misbehaving Vehicles 222 15.9.1 Local Misbehavior Detection 223 15.9.2 Global Misbehavior Detection 224 15.9.3 Misbehavior Reporting 224 15.10 Ways for Vehicles to Acquire CRLs 226 15.11 How Often CRLs should be Distributed to Vehicles? 228 15.12 PKI Hierarchy 230 15.12.1 Certifi cate Chaining to Enable Hierarchical CAs 231 15.12.2 Hierarchical CA Architecture Example 231 15.13 Privacy-Preserving Vehicular PKI 233 15.13.1 Quantitative Measurements of Vehicle Anonymity 234 15.13.2 Quantitative Measurement of Message Unlinkability 234 References 235 16 Privacy Protection with Shared Certificates 237 16.1 Shared Certificates 237 16.2 The Combinatorial Certificate Scheme 237 16.3 Certificate Revocation Collateral Damage 239 16.4 Certified Intervals 242 16.4.1 The Concept of Certified Interval 242 16.4.2 Certified Interval Produced by the Original Combinatorial Certificate Scheme 242 16.5 Reduce Collateral Damage and Improve Certified Interval 244 16.5.1 Reduce Collateral Damage Caused by a Single Misused Certificate 245 16.5.2 Vehicles Become Statistically Distinguishable When Misusing Multiple Certificates 248 16.5.3 The Dynamic Reward Algorithm 250 16.6 Privacy in Low Vehicle Density Areas 253 16.6.1 The Problem 253 16.6.2 The Blend-In Algorithm to Improve Privacy 256 References 259 17 Privacy Protection with Short-Lived Unique Certificates 260 17.1 Short-Lived Unique Certificates 260 17.2 The Basic Short-Lived Certificate Scheme 261 17.3 The Problem of Large CRL 263 17.4 Anonymously Linked Certificates to Reduce CRL Size 264 17.4.1 Certificate Tags 264 17.4.2 CRL Processing by Vehicles 265 17.4.3 Backward Unlinkability 267 17.5 Reduce CRL Search Time 268 17.6 Unlinked Short-Lived Certificates 269 17.7 Reduce the Volume of Certificate Request and Response Messages 270 17.8 Determine the Number of Certificates for Each Vehicle 270 References 273 18 Privacy Protection with Group Signatures 274 18.1 Group Signatures 274 18.2 Zero-Knowledge Proof of Knowledge 275 18.3 The ACJT Group Signature Scheme and its Extensions 277 18.3.1 The ACJT Group Signature Scheme 277 18.3.2 The Challenge of Group Membership Revocation 282 18.3.3 ACJT Extensions to Support Membership Revocation 283 18.4 The CG Group Signature Scheme with Revocation 286 18.5 The Short Group Signatures Scheme 288 18.5.1 The Short Group Signatures Scheme 288 18.5.2 Membership Revocation 291 18.6 Group Signature Schemes with Verifier-Local Revocation 292 References 293 19 Privacy Protection against Certificate Authorities 295 19.1 Introduction 295 19.2 Basic Idea 295 19.3 Baseline Split CA Architecture, Protocol, and Message Processing 297 19.4 Split CA Architecture for Shared Certifi cates 301 19.5 Split CA Architecture for Unlinked Short-Lived Certificates 302 19.5.1 Acquire One Unlinked Certifi cate at a Time 302 19.5.2 Assign Batches of Unlinked Short-Lived Certifi cates 304 19.5.3 Revoke Batches of Unlinked Certifi cates 306 19.5.4 Request for Decryption Keys for Certificate Batches 307 19.6 Split CA Architecture for Anonymously Linked Short-Lived Certificates 308 19.6.1 Assign One Anonymously Linked Short-Lived Certificate at a Time 308 19.6.2 Assign Batches of Anonymously Linked Short-Lived Certificates 311 19.6.3 Revoke Batches of Anonymously Linked Short-Lived Certificates 312 19.6.4 Request for Decryption Keys for Certificate Batches 313 References 314 20 Comparison of Privacy-Preserving Certificate Management Schemes 315 20.1 Introduction 315 20.2 Comparison of Main Characteristics 316 20.3 Misbehavior Detection 320 20.4 Abilities to Prevent Privacy Abuse by CA and MDS Operators 321 20.5 Summary 322 21 IEEE 1609.2 Security Services 323 21.1 Introduction 323 21.2 The IEEE 1609.2 Standard 323 21.3 Certificates and Certificate Authority Hierarchy 325 21.4 Formats for Public Key, Signature, Certificate, and CRL 327 21.4.1 Public Key Formats 327 21.4.2 Signature Formats 328 21.4.3 Certificate Format 329 21.4.4 CRL Format 332 21.5 Message Formats and Processing for Generating Encrypted Messages 333 21.6 Sending Messages 335 21.7 Request Certifi cates from the CA 336 21.8 Request and Processing CRL 343 21.9 What the Current IEEE 1609.2 Standard Does Not Cover 344 21.9.1 No Support for Anonymous Message Authentication 344 21.9.2 Separate Vehicle-CA Communication Protocols Are Required 344 21.9.3 Interactions and Interfaces between CA Entities Not Addressed / 346 References 346 22 4G for Vehicle Safety Communications 347 22.1 Introduction 347 22.2 Long-Term Revolution (LTE) 347 22.3 LTE for Vehicle Safety Communications/ 353 22.3.1 Issues to Be Addressed 353 22.3.2 LTE for V2I Safety Communications 353 22.3.3 LTE for V2V Safety Communications 356 22.3.4 LTE Broadcast and Multicast Services 357 References 358 Glossary 360 Index 367

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe semiconductor manufacturing industry is highly dynamic and releases new, better, and cheaper products day by day. But how do electronic and also non-electronic systems that need to be manufactured and supported for decades manage to continue operation using parts that were available for a few years at most? This book answers these questions.Table of ContentsPreface xiii 1 Introduction to Obsolescence Problems 1 1.1 Definition of Obsolescence 1 1.2 Categorization of Obsolescence Types 3 1.3 Definition of Obsolescence Management 4 1.4 Categorization of Obsolescence Management Approaches 5 1.5 Historical Perspective on Obsolescence 6 1.6 Occurrence of Obsolescence 8 1.7 Product Sectors Affected by Obsolescence Problems 11 1.8 Parts Affected by Obsolescence Problems 13 2 Part Change and Discontinuation Management 17 2.1 The Change Process 18 2.2 Change-Control Policies of Major Part Manufacturers 18 2.3 Change-Notification Policies of Major Companies 19 2.4 Change-Notification 24 2.5 Change-Notification Paths 27 2.6 Examples of Common Changes 29 3 Introduction to Electronic Part Product Life Cycles 33 3.1 Product Life Cycle Stages 34 3.2 Special Cases of the Product Life Cycle Curve 39 3.3 Product Life Cycle Stages as a Basis for Forecasting 40 4 Obsolescence Forecasting Methodologies 41 4.1 Obsolescence Forecasting—Parts with Evolutionary Parametric Drivers 42 4.2 Obsolescence Forecasting—Parts without Evolutionary Parametric Drivers 56 4.3 Non-Database Obsolescence Forecasting Methodology 70 5 Case Study Hardware Forecasts and Trends 77 5.1 Dynamic RAMs (DRAMs) 77 5.2 Static Random Access Memories (SRAMs) 84 5.3 Non-Volatile Memories 94 5.4 Microprocessors 105 5.5 Microcontrollers and Digital Signal Processors (DSPs) 115 5.6 Logic Parts 120 5.7 Analog Parts 129 5.8 Application-Specific Integrated Circuits (ASICs) 136 6 Software Obsolescence 143 6.1 The Root Causes of Software Obsolescence 145 6.2 Software Obsolescence Mechanisms 146 6.3 Discussion 155 7 Reactive Obsolescence Management 157 7.1 Change and Discontinuance Notifications 158 7.2 Obsolescence Recovery (Mitigation) Tactics 160 7.3 Selecting the Proper Reactive Obsolescence Management Strategy 186 7.4 Reactive Obsolescence Management Checklist 188 7.5 Reactive Obsolescence Management Guideline 188 8 Proactive Obsolescence Management 193 8.1 Members of the Proactive Obsolescence Management Board 194 8.2 Schedule and Milestones 194 8.3 Initial Obsolescence Risk Analysis 195 8.4 Tracking Parts’ Availability 197 8.5 Product Obsolescence and Aftersales 197 9 Strategic Obsolescence Management 199 9.1 Applying Project Management Principles to Obsolescence Management 200 9.2 Initiation Stage 202 9.3 Planning and Design Stage 205 9.4 Execution Stage 210 9.5 Monitoring and Controlling Stage 225 9.6 Strategic Obsolescence Management Guidelines 229 10 Obsolescence Management Standards and Organizations 233 10.1 Helpful Standards for Obsolescence Management 233 10.2 Helpful Organizations for Obsolescence Management 237 References 245 Index 267

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe latest in parallel EM solutions with both in-core and out-of-core solvers The solution of complex electromagnetic (EM) problems requires one to address the issues related with numerical accuracy and efficient distribution of the solution procedure over multiple computational nodes. With the advent of multicore processors and high performance computing (HPC) technology, the EM software designers need to know how to add new functionality to computational EM codes so that they can run efficiently on these new processors. Higher Order Basis Based Integral Equation Solver [HOBBIES] presents a road map for the analysis of complex material structures using the high-performance parallel simulation software known as HOBBIES. Focusing on the Method of Moments (MoM), the book features new parallel programming techniques and user-friendly code with superior capabilities for solving challenging EM radiation and scattering problems. It provides readers with Table of ContentsPreface xv Acknowledgments xxi Acronyms xxiii Chapter 1. Electromagnetic Modeling of Composite Metallic and Dielectric Structures Using Higher Order Basis Functions 1 1.0 Summary 1.1 Integral Equations for Dielectric Structures 1.2 A General Formulation for the Analysis of Composite Metallic and Dielectric Structures 5 1.3 Geometric Modeling 8 1.4 MoM Modeling of the Structures 14 1.5 Description of Higher Order Basis Functions 21 1.6 Testing Procedure 28 1.7 Modeling of the Excitations 35 1.8 Examples Illustrating the Requirements of the Geometrical Modeling 39 1.9 Examples Illustrating the Salient Features of the Higher Order Basis Functions 43 1.10 Performance of the PMCHW Formulation Using Higher Order Basis Functions for Different Values of the Dielectric Constants 48 1.11 Performance of the PMCHW Formulation at Very Low Frequencies Using Higher Order Basis Functions for Dielectric Bodies 50 1.12 Evaluation of Antenna and Scatterer Characteristics 52 1.13 Conclusions 55 References 55 Chapter 2. Parallel In-Core and Out-of-Core LU Factorization for Solving a Matrix Equation and the Corresponding Parallel Matrix Filling in HOBBIES 57 2.0 Summary 5 2.1 Matrix Equation Resulting from a MoM Code 58 2.2 In-core Matrix Equation Solver 58 2.3 Parallel Implementation of an In-core Solver 60 2.4 Data Decomposition for an Out-of-Core Solver 64 2.5 On-slab, Left-looking, Out-of-core LU Algorithm 66 2.6 Solving a Matrix Equation Using the Out-of-core LU Matrices 74 2.7 Parallel In-core and Out-of-core Matrix Filling Schemes 76 2.8 Conclusions 80 References 81 Chapter 3. Getting Started and Working with HOBBIES Projects 83 3.0 Summary 83 3.1 System Requirements 83 3.2 Installing HOBBIES 84 3.3 Starting HOBBIES 90 3.4 Navigation through HOBBIES 91 3.5 Working with HOBBIES Projects 101 3.6 Flowchart for Making a HOBBIES Simulation 103 3.7 Exiting HOBBIES 105 3.8 Getting Help 105 3.9 Quick Start 105 3.10 Conclusion 106 References 106 Chapter 4. Creating a Geometry Model in HOBBIES 107 4.0 Summary 107 4.1 Creating a Simple Model Using the Structure Menu 107 4.2 Creating an Arbitrarily Shaped Model Using the Geometry Menu 156 4.3 Operations on a Model 171 4.4 Manipulations on a Model 189 4.5 Delete a Model 197 4.6 Conclusion 197 References 198 Chapter 5. Meshing a Model in HOBBIES 199 5.0 Summary 199 5.1 Unstructured Mesh 200 5.2 Structured Mesh 202 5.3 Element Type 205 5.4 Mesh Criteria 206 5.5 Reset Mesh Data 207 5.6 Draw 208 5.7 Generate Mesh 210 5.8 Erase Mesh 211 5.9 Edit Mesh 211 5.10 Show Errors 212 5.11 Mesh Quality 213 5.12 Mesh Options from Model 214 5.13 Mesh Generation Example for Surfaces 214 5.14 Example of Mesh Generation for a Curve 218 5.15 Assigning Element Sizes for Generating the Mesh 221 5.16 Conclusion 226 References 226 Chapter 6. Setting up a HOBBIES Solution and Running a Simulation 227 6.0 Summary 227 6.1 Operation Mode 228 6.2 Units 228 6.3 Frequency Range 230 6.4 Domains 230 6.5 Loadings 238 6.6 Excitation 242 6.7 Symmetry 248 6.8 Edge 250 6.9 Output Settings 254 6.10 Options 258 6.11 Running Simulations 265 6.12 Conclusion 272 Chapter 7. HOBBIES Post-Processing for Visualizing the Results 273 7.0 Summary 273 7.1 Entering Post-Processing Window 274 7.2 Post-Processing Window 274 7.3 Example of Operations in Post-Processing 280 7.4 Leaving Post-Processing Window 316 7.5 Limitation of Post-Processing display in Academic Version of HOBBIES 320 7.6 Conclusion 320 Chapter 8. Solving Electromagnetic Field Problems Using HOBBIES 321 8.0 Summary 321 8.1 Metallic Structures 322 8.2 Composite Metallic and Dielectric Structures 350 8.3 Loadings 374 8.4 Use of Symmetry in the Analysis of a Problem 398 8.5 Antenna above a Real Ground 428 8.6 Use of Imaging for Generating an Accurate Solution 436 8.7 Conclusion 442 References 442 Chapter 9. Advanced Electromagnetic Modeling Using HOBBIES 443 9.0 Summary 443 9.1 Radiation Analysis of Complicated Antennas 444 9.2 Radar Cross Section (RCS) Calculation of Complex Targets 458 9.3 Conclusion 476 References 476 Chapter 10. HOBBIES Optimizer and its Applications 479 10.0 Summary 10.1 Flowchart of the HOBBIES Optimizer 480 10.2 Optimization Algorithms Used in the Optimizer 482 10.3 Setting up the HOBBIES Optimizer 487 10.4 Optimization Examples 507 10.5 Conclusion 516 References 516 Appendix A. A Brief Summary of Some Commands Used in HOBBIES 517 Appendix B. A List of all Codes in the Accompanying CD 525 Index 531

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn Integrated Approach to Product Development Reliability Engineering presents an integrated approach to the design, engineering, and management of reliability activities throughout the life cycle of a product, including concept, research and development, design, manufacturing, assembly, sales, and service.Table of ContentsPreface xv 1 Reliability Engineering in the Twenty-First Century 1 1.1 What Is Quality? 1 1.2 What Is Reliability? 2 1.2.1 The Ability to Perform as Intended 4 1.2.2 For a Specified Time 4 1.2.3 Life-Cycle Conditions 5 1.2.4 Reliability as a Relative Measure 5 1.3 Quality, Customer Satisfaction, and System Effectiveness 6 1.4 Performance, Quality, and Reliability 7 1.5 Reliability and the System Life Cycle 8 1.6 Consequences of Failure 12 1.6.1 Financial Loss 12 1.6.2 Breach of Public Trust 13 1.6.3 Legal Liability 15 1.6.4 Intangible Losses 15 1.7 Suppliers and Customers 16 1.8 Summary 16 Problems 17 2 Reliability Concepts 19 2.1 Basic Reliability Concepts 19 2.1.1 Concept of Probability Density Function 23 2.2 Hazard Rate 26 2.2.1 Motivation and Development of Hazard Rate 27 2.2.2 Some Properties of the Hazard Function 28 2.2.3 Conditional Reliability 31 2.3 Percentiles Product Life 33 2.4 Moments of Time to Failure 35 2.4.1 Moments about Origin and about the Mean 35 2.4.2 Expected Life or Mean Time to Failure 36 2.4.3 Variance or the Second Moment about the Mean 36 2.4.4 Coefficient of Skewness 37 2.4.5 Coefficient of Kurtosis 37 2.5 Summary 39 Problems 40 3 Probability and Life Distributions for Reliability Analysis 45 3.1 Discrete Distributions 45 3.1.1 Binomial Distribution 46 3.1.2 Poisson Distribution 50 3.1.3 Other Discrete Distributions 50 3.2 Continuous Distributions 51 3.2.1 Weibull Distribution 55 3.2.2 Exponential Distribution 61 3.2.3 Estimation of Reliability for Exponential Distribution 64 3.2.4 The Normal (Gaussian) Distribution 67 3.2.5 The Lognormal Distribution 73 3.2.6 Gamma Distribution75 3.3 Probability Plots 77 3.4 Summary 83 Problems 84 4 Design for Six Sigma 89 4.1 What Is Six Sigma? 89 4.2 Why Six Sigma? 90 4.3 How Is Six Sigma Implemented? 91 4.3.1 Steps in the Six Sigma Process 92 4.3.2 Summary of the Six Sigma Steps 97 4.4 Optimization Problems in the Six Sigma Process 98 4.4.1 System Transfer Function 99 4.4.2 Variance Transmission Equation 100 4.4.3 Economic Optimization and Quality Improvement 101 4.4.4 Tolerance Design Problem 102 4.5 Design for Six Sigma 103 4.5.1 Identify (I) 105 4.5.2 Characterize (C) 106 4.5.3 Optimize (O) 106 4.5.4 Verify (V) 106 4.6 Summary 108 Problems 108 5 Product Development 111 5.1 Product Requirements and Constraints 112 5.2 Product Life Cycle Conditions 113 5.3 Reliability Capability 114 5.4 Parts and Materials Selection 114 5.5 Human Factors and Reliability 115 5.6 Deductive versus Inductive Methods 117 5.7 Failure Modes, Effects, and Criticality Analysis 117 5.8 Fault Tree Analysis 119 5.8.1 Role of FTA in Decision-Making 121 5.8.2 Steps of Fault Tree Analysis 122 5.8.3 Basic Paradigms for the Construction of Fault Trees 122 5.8.4 Definition of the Top Event 122 5.8.5 Faults versus Failures 122 5.8.6 Minimal Cut Sets 127 5.9 Physics of Failure 128 5.9.1 Stress Margins 128 5.9.2 Model Analysis of Failure Mechanisms 129 5.9.3 Derating 129 5.9.4 Protective Architectures 130 5.9.5 Redundancy 131 5.9.6 Prognostics 131 5.10 Design Review 131 5.11 Qualification 132 5.12 Manufacture and Assembly 134 5.12.1 Manufacturability 134 5.12.2 Process Verification Testing 136 5.13 Analysis, Product Failure, and Root Causes 137 5.14 Summary 138 Problems 138 6 Product Requirements and Constraints 141 6.1 Defining Requirements 141 6.2 Responsibilities of the Supply Chain 142 6.2.1 Multiple-Customer Products 142 6.2.2 Single-Customer Products 143 6.2.3 Custom Products 144 6.3 The Requirements Document 144 6.4 Specifications 144 6.5 Requirements Tracking 146 6.6 Summary 147 Problems 147 7 Life-Cycle Conditions 149 7.1 Defining the Life-Cycle Profile 149 7.2 Life-Cycle Events 150 7.2.1 Manufacturing and Assembly 151 7.2.2 Testing and Screening 151 7.2.3 Storage 151 7.2.4 Transportation 151 7.2.5 Installation 151 7.2.6 Operation 152 7.2.7 Maintenance 152 7.3 Loads and Their Effects 152 7.3.1 Temperature 152 7.3.2 Humidity 155 7.3.3 Vibration and Shock 156 7.3.4 Solar Radiation 156 7.3.5 Electromagnetic Radiation 157 7.3.6 Pressure 157 7.3.7 Chemicals 158 7.3.8 Sand and Dust 159 7.3.9 Voltage 159 7.3.10 Current 159 7.3.11 Human Factors 160 7.4 Considerations and Recommendations for LCP Development 160 7.4.1 Extreme Specifications-Based Design (Global and Local Environments) 160 7.4.2 Standards-Based Profiles 161 7.4.3 Combined Load Conditions 161 7.4.4 Change in Magnitude and Rate of Change of Magnitude 165 7.5 Methods for Estimating Life-Cycle Loads 165 7.5.1 Market Studies and Standards Based Profiles as Sources of Data 165 7.5.2 In Situ Monitoring of Load Conditions 166 7.5.3 Field Trial Records, Service Records, and Failure Records 166 7.5.4 Data on Load Histories of Similar Parts, Assemblies, or Products 166 7.6 Summary 166 Problems 167 8 Reliability Capability 169 8.1 Capability Maturity Models 169 8.2 Key Reliability Practices 170 8.2.1 Reliability Requirements and Planning 170 8.2.2 Training and Development 171 8.2.3 Reliability Analysis 172 8.2.4 Reliability Testing 172 8.2.5 Supply-Chain Management 173 8.2.6 Failure Data Tracking and Analysis 173 8.2.7 Verification and Validation 174 8.2.8 Reliability Improvement 174 8.3 Summary 175 Problems 175 9 Parts Selection and Management 177 9.1 Part Assessment Process 177 9.1.1 Performance Assessment 178 9.1.2 Quality Assessment 179 9.1.3 Process Capability Index 179 9.1.4 Average Outgoing Quality 182 9.1.5 Reliability Assessment 182 9.1.6 Assembly Assessment 185 9.2 Parts Management 185 9.2.1 Supply Chain Management 185 9.2.2 Part Change Management 186 9.2.3 Industry Change Control Policies 187 9.3 Risk Management 188 9.4 Summary 190 Problems 191 10 Failure Modes, Mechanisms, and Effects Analysis 193 10.1 Development of FMMEA 193 10.2 Failure Modes, Mechanisms, and Effects Analysis 195 10.2.1 System Definition, Elements, and Functions 195 10.2.2 Potential Failure Modes 196 10.2.3 Potential Failure Causes 197 10.2.4 Potential Failure Mechanisms 197 10.2.5 Failure Models 197 10.2.6 Life-Cycle Profile 198 10.2.7 Failure Mechanism Prioritization 198 10.2.8 Documentation 200 10.3 Case Study 201 10.4 Summary 205 Problems 206 11 Probabilistic Design for Reliability and the Factor of Safety 207 11.1 Design for Reliability 207 11.2 Design of a Tension Element 208 11.3 Reliability Models for Probabilistic Design 209 11.4 Example of Probabilistic Design and Design for a Reliability Target 211 11.5 Relationship between Reliability, Factor of Safety, and Variability 212 11.6 Functions of Random Variables 215 11.7 Steps for Probabilistic Design 219 11.8 Summary 219 Problems 220 12 Derating and Uprating 223 12.1 Part Ratings 223 12.1.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings 224 12.1.2 Recommended Operating Conditions 224 12.1.3 Factors Used to Determine Ratings 225 12.2 Derating 225 12.2.1 How Is Derating Practiced? 225 12.2.2 Limitations of the Derating Methodology 231 12.2.3 How to Determine These Limits 238 12.3 Uprating 239 12.3.1 Parts Selection and Management Process 241 12.3.2 Assessment for Uprateability 241 12.3.3 Methods of Uprating 242 12.3.4 Continued Assurance 245 12.4 Summary 245 Problems 246 13 Reliability Estimation Techniques 247 13.1 Tests during the Product Life Cycle 247 13.1.1 Concept Design and Prototype 247 13.1.2 Performance Validation to Design Specification 248 13.1.3 Design Maturity Validation 248 13.1.4 Design and Manufacturing Process Validation 248 13.1.5 Preproduction Low Volume Manufacturing 248 13.1.6 High Volume Production 249 13.1.7 Feedback from Field Data 249 13.2 Reliability Estimation 249 13.3 Product Qualification and Testing 250 13.3.1 Input to PoF Qualification Methodology 250 13.3.2 Accelerated Stress Test Planning and Development 255 13.3.3 Specimen Characterization 257 13.3.4 Accelerated Life Tests 259 13.3.5 Virtual Testing 260 13.3.6 Virtual Qualification 261 13.3.7 Output 262 13.4 Case Study: System-in-Package Drop Test Qualification 263 13.4.1 Step 1: Accelerated Test Planning and Development 263 13.4.2 Step 2: Specimen Characterization 265 13.4.3 Step 3: Accelerated Life Testing 266 13.4.4 Step 4: Virtual Testing 270 13.4.5 Global FEA 271 13.4.6 Strain Distributions Due to Modal Contributions 272 13.4.7 Acceleration Curves 273 13.4.8 Local FEA 273 13.4.9 Step 5: Virtual Qualification 274 13.4.10 PoF Acceleration Curves 275 13.4.11 Summary of the Methodology for Qualification 276 13.5 Basic Statistical Concepts 276 13.5.1 Confidence Interval 277 13.5.2 Interpretation of the Confidence Level 277 13.5.3 Relationship between Confidence Interval and Sample Size 279 13.6 Confidence Interval for Normal Distribution 279 13.6.1 Unknown Mean with a Known Variance for Normal Distribution 279 13.6.2 Unknown Mean with an Unknown Variance for Normal Distribution 280 13.6.3 Differences in Two Population Means with Variances Known 281 13.7 Confidence Intervals for Proportions 282 13.8 Reliability Estimation and Confidence Limits for Success–Failure Testing 283 13.8.1 Success Testing 286 13.9 Reliability Estimation and Confidence Limits for Exponential Distribution 287 13.10 Summary 292 Problems 292 14 Process Control and Process Capability 295 14.1 Process Control System 295 14.1.1 Control Charts: Recognizing Sources of Variation 297 14.1.2 Sources of Variation 297 14.1.3 Use of Control Charts for Problem Identification 297 14.2 Control Charts 299 14.2.1 Control Charts for Variables 306 14.2.2 X-Bar and R Charts 306 14.2.3 Moving Range Chart Example 308 14.2.4 X-Bar and S Charts 311 14.2.5 Control Charts for Attributes 312 14.2.6 p Chart and np Chart 312 14.2.7 np Chart Example 313 14.2.8 c Chart and u Chart 314 14.2.9 c Chart Example 315 14.3 Benefits of Control Charts 316 14.4 Average Outgoing Quality 317 14.4.1 Process Capability Studies 318 14.5 Advanced Control Charts 323 14.5.1 Cumulative Sum Control Charts 323 14.5.2 Exponentially Weighted Moving Average Control Charts 324 14.5.3 Other Advanced Control Charts 325 14.6 Summary 325 Problems 326 15 Product Screening and Burn-In Strategies 331 15.1 Burn-In Data Observations 332 15.2 Discussion of Burn-In Data 333 15.3 Higher Field Reliability without Screening 334 15.4 Best Practices 335 15.5 Summary 336 Problems 337 16 Analyzing Product Failures and Root Causes 339 16.1 Root-Cause Analysis Processes 341 16.1.1 Preplanning 341 16.1.2 Collecting Data for Analysis and Assessing Immediate Causes 343 16.1.3 Root-Cause Hypothesization 344 16.1.4 Analysis and Interpretation of Evidence 348 16.1.5 Root-Cause Identification and Corrective Actions 348 16.1.6 Assessment of Corrective Actions 350 16.2 No-Fault-Found 351 16.2.1 An Approach to Assess NFF 353 16.2.2 Common Mode Failure 355 16.2.3 Concept of Common Mode Failure 356 16.2.4 Modeling and Analysis for Dependencies for Reliability Analysis 360 16.2.5 Common Mode Failure Root Causes 362 16.2.6 Common Mode Failure Analysis 364 16.2.7 Common Mode Failure Occurrence and Impact Reduction 366 16.3 Summary 373 Problems 374 17 System Reliability Modeling 375 17.1 Reliability Block Diagram 375 17.2 Series System 376 17.3 Products with Redundancy 381 17.3.1 Active Redundancy 381 17.3.2 Standby Systems 385 17.3.3 Standby Systems with Imperfect Switching 387 17.3.4 Shared Load Parallel Models 390 17.3.5 (k, n) Systems 391 17.3.6 Limits of Redundancy 393 17.4 Complex System Reliability 393 17.4.1 Complete Enumeration Method 393 17.4.2 Conditional Probability Method 395 17.4.3 Concept of Coherent Structures 396 17.5 Summary 401 Problems 402 18 Health Monitoring and Prognostics 409 18.1 Conceptual Model for Prognostics 410 18.2 Reliability and Prognostics 412 18.3 PHM for Electronics 414 18.4 PHM Concepts and Methods 417 18.4.1 Fuses and Canaries 418 18.5 Monitoring and Reasoning of Failure Precursors 420 18.5.1 Monitoring Environmental and Usage Profiles for Damage Modeling 424 18.6 Implementation of PHM in a System of Systems 429 18.7 Summary 431 Problems 431 19 Warranty Analysis 433 19.1 Product Warranties 434 19.2 Warranty Return Information 435 19.3 Warranty Policies 436 19.4 Warranty and Reliability 437 19.5 Warranty Cost Analysis 439 19.5.1 Elements of Warranty Cost Models 440 19.5.2 Failure Distributions 440 19.5.3 Cost Modeling Calculation 440 19.5.4 Modeling Assumptions and Notation 441 19.5.5 Cost Models Examples 442 19.5.6 Information Needs 444 19.5.7 Other Cost Models 446 19.6 Warranty and Reliability Management 448 19.7 Summary 449 Problems 449 Appendix A: Some Useful Integrals 451 Appendix B: Table for Gamma Function 453 Appendix C: Table for Cumulative Standard Normal Distribution 455 Appendix D: Values for the Percentage Points tα,ν of the t-Distribution 457 Appendix E: Percentage Points χ2α,ν of the Chi-Square Distribution 461 Appendix F: Percentage Points for the F-Distribution 467 Bibliography 473 Index 487

Read more less

Book SynopsisFacilitates both the understanding and adoption of 802.1aq as a networking solution 802.1aq Shortest Path Bridging (SPB) is a technology that greatly simplifies the creation and configuration of carrier, enterprise, and cloud computing networksby using modern computing power to deprecate signaling, and to integrate multicast, multipath routing, and large-scale virtualization. It is arguably one of the most significant enhancements in Ethernet''s history. 802.1aq Shortest Path Bridging Design and Evolution explains both the what and the why of the technology standard being set today. It covers which decisions were elective and which were dictated by the design goals by using a multipart approach that first explains what SPB is, before transitioning into narrative form to describe the design processes and decisions behind it. To make SPB accessible to the data networking professional from multiple perspectives, the book: Provides a RTable of Contents Figures vii Acknowledgments ix Introduction xi Abbreviations xvii 1. IEEE 802.1aq in a Nutshell: Antecedents and Technology 1 2. Why SPB Looks as It Does 36 3. Why the SPB Control Plane Looks as It Does 74 4. Practical Deployment Considerations 130 5. Applications of SPB 150 6. Futures 158 Conclusion 186 References 188 Index 190

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn in-depth look at the theory and applications of frequency stability An understanding of the acquisition of stable frequency is essential for anyone who needs to solve noise problems in wireless communications. This book offers a thorough introduction to the principles and applications of frequency stability, arming practicing engineers with the tools they need to minimize noise in systems and devices that affect everyday communications for millions of people. With an emphasis on both practical and scientific points of view, Frequency Stability: Introduction and Applications examines frequency and time fluctuations in resonators, as well as the stability of both standard and practical microwave oscillators. It explains noise properties of building circuit blocks, introducing time domain properties and how they relate to noise spectral densities. Including a special chapter devoted to the design and properties of phase locked loopsa crucial topic for freTable of ContentsPreface xv Symbols xxi 1. Noise and Frequency Stability 1 1.1 White Noise 2 1.2 Colored Noises 7 1.3 Small and Band Limited Perturbations of Sinusoidal Signals 14 1.4 Statistical Approach 17 1.5 Power Spectra of Stochastic Processes 29 2. Noise in Resonators and Oscillators 37 2.1 Noise Generated in Resonators 37 2.2 Phase Noise of Resonators: Experimental Results 44 2.3 Noise in Oscillators 50 2.4 Leeson Model 60 3. Noise Properties of Practical Oscillators 65 3.1 Precision Oscillators 65 3.2 Practical Oscillators 102 3.3 Practical RC Oscillators 111 4. Noise of Building Elements 123 4.1 Resistors 123 4.2 Inductances 124 4.3 Capacitance 126 4.4 Semiconductors 129 4.5 Amplifiers 137 4.6 Mixers 143 4.7 Frequency Dividers 161 4.8 Frequency Multiphers 178 5. Time Domain Measurements 183 5.1 Basic Properties of Sample Variances 184 5.2 Transfer Functions of Several Time Domain 186 5.3 Time Jitter 205 6. Phase-Locked Loops 231 6.1 PLL Basic 231 6.2 PLL Design 237 6.3 Stability of the PLL 243 6.4 Tracking 253 6.5 Working Ranges of PLL 258 6.6 Digital PLL 267 6.7 PLL Phase Noise 275 6.8 PLL Time Jitter 283 6.9 Spurious Signals 284 6.10 Synchronized Oscillators 288 Index 299

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis technical book explores current and future applications of solar power as an unlimited source of energy that earth receives every day. Photosynthetic organisms have learned to utilize this abundant source of energy by converting it into high-energy biochemical compounds. Inspired by the efficient conversion of solar energy into an electron flow, attempts have been made to construct artificial photosynthetic systems capable of establishing a charge separation state for generating electricity or driving chemical reactions. Another important aspect of photosynthesis is the CO2 fixation and the production of high energy compounds. Photosynthesis can produce biomass using solar energy while reducing the CO2 level in air. Biomass can be converted into biofuels such as biodiesel and bioethanol. Under certain conditions, photosynthetic organisms can also produce hydrogen gas which is one of the cleanest sources of energy.Table of ContentsPreface xv Contributors xix Acronyms xxiii 1 Physics Overview of Solar Energy 1 Diego Castano 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 The Sun 2 1.3 Light 3 1.4 Thermodynamics 6 1.5 Photovoltaics 9 1.6 Photosynthesis 11 References 12 2 Oxygenic Photosynthesis 13 Dmitriy Shevela, Lars Olof Bj¨orn, and Govindjee 2.1 Introduction 13 2.2 Path of Energy: From Photons to Charge Separation 16 2.3 Electron Transfer Pathways 22 2.4 Photophosphorylation 30 2.5 Carbon Dioxide to Organic Compounds 33 2.6 Evolution of Oxygenic Photosynthesis 37 2.7 Some Interesting Questions about Whole Plants 42 2.8 Perspectives for the Future 48 2.9 Summary 48 Acknowledgments 49 References 49 3 Apparatus and Mechanism of Photosynthetic Water Splitting as Nature’s Blueprint for Efficient Solar Energy Exploitation 65 Gernot Renger 3.1 Introduction 65 3.2 Overall Reaction Pattern of Photosynthesis and Respiration 67 3.3 Bioenergetic Limit of Solar Energy Exploitation: Water Splitting 68 3.4 Humankind’s Dream of Using Water and Solar Radiation as “Clean Fuel” 69 3.5 Nature’s Blueprint of Light-Induced Water Splitting 71 3.6 Types of Approaches in Performing Light-Driven H2 and O2 Formation from Water 71 3.7 Light-Induced “Stable” Charge Separation 78 3.8 Energetics of Light-Induced Charge Separation 80 3.9 Oxidative Water Splitting: The Kok Cycle 82 3.10 YZ Oxidation by P680+• 83 3.11 Structure and Function of the WOC 86 3.12 Concluding Remarks 102 Acknowledgments 102 References 103 4 Artificial Photosynthesis 121 Reza Razeghifard 4.1 Introduction 121 4.2 Organic Pigment Assemblies on Electrodes 122 4.3 Photosystem Assemblies on Electrodes 124 4.4 Hydrogen Production by Photosystem I Hybrid Systems 127 4.5 Mimicking Water Oxidation with Manganese Complexes 128 4.6 Protein Design for Introducing Manganese Chemistry in Proteins 130 4.7 Protein Design and Photoactive Proteins with Chl Derivatives 131 4.8 Conclusion 133 Acknowledgment 133 References 134 5 Artificial Photosynthesis: Ruthenium Complexes 143 Dimitrios G. Giarikos 5.1 Ruthenium(II) 143 5.2 Ligand Influence on the Photochemistry of Ru(II) 145 5.3 Importance of Polypyridyl Ligands and Metal Ion for Tuning of MLCT Transitions 149 5.4 Electron Transfer of Ru(II) Complexes 150 5.5 Light-Harvesting Complexes Using Ru(II) Complexes 151 5.6 Ru(II) Artificial Photosystem Models for Photosystem II 157 5.7 Ru (II) Artificial Photosystem Models for Hydrogenase 161 5.8 Conclusion 166 References 166 6 CO2 Sequestration and Hydrogen Production Using Cyanobacteria and Green Algae 173 Kanhaiya Kumar and Debabrata Das 6.1 Introduction 173 6.2 Microbiology 174 6.3 Biochemistry of CO2 Fixation 176 6.4 Parameters Affecting the CO2 Sequestration Process 180 6.5 Hydrogen Production by Cyanobacteria 183 6.6 Mechanisms of H2 Production in Green Algae 194 6.7 Photobioreactors 202 6.8 Conclusion 206 Acknowledgments 206 References 206 7 Cyanobacterial Biofuel and Chemical Production for CO2 Sequestration 217 John W. K. Oliver and Shota Atsumi 7.1 Carbon Sequestration by Biomass 217 7.2 Introduction to Cyanobacteria 219 7.3 CO2 Uptake Efficiency of Cyanobacteria 219 7.4 Mitigation of Costs Through Captured-Carbon Products 221 7.5 Captured-Carbon Products from Engineered Cyanobacteria 222 7.6 Conclusion 227 References 227 8 Hydrogen Production by Microalgae 231 Helena M. Amaro, M. Gl´oria Esqu´ývel, Teresa S. Pinto, and F. Xavier Malcata 8.1 Introduction 231 8.2 Hydrogenase Engineering 233 8.3 Metabolic Reprograming 233 8.4 Light Capture Improvement 236 Acknowledgments 238 References 238 9 Algal Biofuels 243 Archana Tiwari and Anjana Pandey 9.1 Introduction 243 9.2 Advantages of Algae 243 9.3 Algal Strains and Biofuel Production 246 9.4 Algal Biofuels 247 9.5 Algal Cultivation for Biofuel Production 252 9.6 Photobioreactors Employed for Algal Biofuels 254 9.7 Recent Achievements in Algal Biofuels 255 9.8 Strategies for Enhancement of Algal Biofuel Production 258 9.9 Conclusion 261 References 261 10 Green Hydrogen: Algal Biohydrogen Production 267 Ela Eroglu, Matthew Timmins, and Steven M. Smith 10.1 Introduction 267 10.2 Hydrogen Production by Algae 267 10.3 Hydrogenase Enzyme 269 10.4 Diversity of Hydrogen-Producing Algae 270 10.5 Model Microalgae for H2 Production Studies: Chlamydomonas Reinhardtii 272 10.6 Approaches for Enhancing Hydrogen Production 273 10.7 Conclusion 279 References 279 11 Growth in Photobioreactors 285 Niels Thomas Eriksen 11.1 Introduction 285 11.2 Design of Photobioreactors 286 11.3 Limitations to Productivity of Microalgal Cultures 287 11.4 Actual Productivities of Microalgal Cultures 290 11.5 Distribution of Light in Photobioreactors 292 11.6 Gas Exchange in Photobioreactors 294 11.7 Shear Stress in Photobioreactors 297 11.8 Current Trends in Photobioreactor Development 298 Acknowledgment 299 References 299 12 Industrial Cultivation Systems for Intensive Production of Microalgae 307 Giuseppe Olivieri, Piero Salatino, and Antonio Marzocchella 12.1 Introduction 307 12.2 Relevant Issues for Design and Operation of Systems for Microalgal Cultures 308 12.3 Open Systems 318 12.4 Closed Systems: Photobioreactors 321 12.5 Novel Photobioreactor Configurations 326 12.6 Case Study: Intensive Production of Bio-Oil 333 Acknowledgments 337 References 337 13 Microalgae Biodiesel and Macroalgae Bioethanol: The Solar Conversion Challenge for Industrial Renewable Fuels 345 Navid R. Moheimani, Mark P. McHenry, and Pouria Mehrani 13.1 Introduction 345 13.2 Biofuel Supply, Demand, Production, and New Feedstocks 346 13.3 Feasibility of Photosynthetic Fuel Production 348 13.4 Biodiesel Production and Feedstocks 349 13.5 Macroalgae Biofuel Feedstocks and Production 352 13.6 Conclusion 354 References 355 14 Technoeconomic Assessment of Large-Scale Production of Bioethanol from Microalgal Biomass 361 Razif Harun, Hassan J, Li J. S. Shu, Lucy A. Arthur, and Michael K. Danquah 14.1 Introduction 361 14.2 Technology Selection and Process Design 362 14.3 Economic Analysis 375 14.4 Reduction of Overall Production Cost 383 14.5 Conclusion 384 References 385 15 Microalgae-Derived Chemicals: Opportunity for an Integrated Chemical Plant 387 Azadeh Kermanshahi-pour, Julie B. Zimmerman, and Paul T. Anastas 15.1 Introduction 387 15.2 Microalgae Cultivation Systems 388 15.3 Lipids 392 15.4 Carbohydrates 408 15.5 Protein 410 15.6 Process Integration 413 15.7 Conclusion 420 References 422 16 Fuels and Chemicals from Lignocellulosic Biomass 435 Ian M. O’Hara, Zhanying Zhang, Philip A. Hobson, Mark D. Harrison, Sagadevan G. Mundree, and William O. S. Doherty 16.1 Introduction 435 16.2 The Nature of Lignocellulosic Biomass 436 16.3 Feedstocks for Biomass Processing 439 16.4 Production of Fermentable Sugars from Biomass 441 16.5 Thermochemical Conversion of Biomass to Fuels and Chemicals 445 16.6 Fuels and Chemicals from Biomass 449 16.7 Conclusion 449 References 450 Index 457

Read more less

Book SynopsisReviews the latest advances in the all-important field of scalable computing In telecommunications and software engineering, scalability is the ability of a system, network, or process to either handle growing amounts of work in a graceful manner or be enlarged to accommodate that growth. It is a desirable property for many scientific, industrial, and business applications and an important feature for hardware. This immersive book summarizes the latest research achievements in the field of scalable computing and covers new topics that have emerged recently on computing and communications, such as unconventional computing, green and sustainable computing, cloud and volunteer computing, and more. Filled with contributions from world-renowned engineers, researchers, and IT professionals in diverse areas, Scalable Computing and Communications covers: Circuit and component design Operating systems Green computing NetworkTable of ContentsPreface xix Contributors xxi 1. Scalable Computing and Communications: Past, Present, and Future 1Yanhui Wu, Kashif Bilal, Samee U. Khan, Lizhe Wang, and Albert Y. Zomaya 1.1 Scalable Computing and Communications 1 References 4 2. Reliable Minimum Connected Dominating Sets for Topology Control in Probabilistic Wireless Sensor Networks 7Jing (Selena) He, Shouling Ji, Yi Pan, and Yingshu Li 2.1 Topology Control in Wireless Sensor Networks (WSNs) 7 2.2 DS-Based Topology Control 10 2.3 Deterministic WSNs and Probabilistic WSNs 12 2.4 Reliable MCDS Problem 13 2.5 A GA to Construct RMCDS-GA 17 2.6 Performance Evaluation 26 2.7 Conclusions 27 References 28 3. Peer Selection Schemes in Scalable P2P Video Streaming Systems 31Xin Jin and Yu-Kwong Kwok 3.1 Introduction 31 3.2 Overlay Structures 32 3.3 Peer Selection for Overlay Construction 34 3.4 A Game Theoretic Perspective on Peer Selection 45 3.5 Discussion and Future Work 47 3.6 Summary 48 References 49 4. Multicore and Many-Core Computing 55Ioannis E. Venetis 4.1 Introduction 55 4.2 Architectural Options for Multicore Systems 60 4.3 Multicore Architecture Examples 64 4.4 Programming Multicore Architectures 67 4.5 Many-Core Architectures 74 4.6 Many-Core Architecture Examples 75 4.7 Summary 77 References 77 5. Scalable Computing on Large Heterogeneous CPU/GPU Supercomputers 81Fengshun Lu, Kaijun Ren, Junqiang Song, and Jinjun Chen 5.1 Introduction 81 5.2 Heterogeneous Computing Environments 82 5.3 Scalable Programming Patterns for Large GPU Clusters 84 5.4 Hybrid Implementations 87 5.5 Experimental Results 89 5.6 Conclusions 94 Acknowledgments 94 References 94 6. Diagnosability of Multiprocessor Systems 97Chia-Wei Lee and Sun-Yuan Hsieh 6.1 Introduction 97 6.2 Fundamental Concepts 98 6.3 Diagnosability of (1,2)-MCNS under PMC Model 103 6.4 Diagnosability of 2-MCNS under MM* Model 105 6.5 Application to Multiprocessor Systems 110 6.6 Concluding Remarks 122 References 122 7. A Performance Analysis Methodology for MultiCore, Multithreaded Processors 125Miao Ju, Hun Jung, and Hao Che 7.1 Introduction 125 7.2 Methodology 126 7.3 Simulation Tool (ST) 130 7.4 Analytic Modeling Technique 132 7.5 Testing 136 7.6 Related Work 139 7.7 Conclusions and Future Work 141 References 141 8. The Future in Mobile Multicore Computing 145Blake Hurd, Chiu C. Tan, and Jie Wu 8.1 Introduction 145 8.2 Background 146 8.3 Hardware Initiatives 148 8.4 Software Initiatives 151 8.5 Additional Discussion 152 8.6 Future Trends 153 8.7 Conclusion 154 References 155 9. Modeling and Algorithms for Scalable and Energy-Efficient Execution on Multicore Systems 157Dong Li, Dimitrios S. Nikolopoulos, and Kirk W. Cameron 9.1 Introduction 157 9.2 Model-Based Hybrid Message-Passing Interface (MPI)/OpenMP Power-Aware Computing 158 9.3 Power-Aware MPI Task Aggregation Prediction 170 9.4 Conclusions 181 References 182 10. Cost Optimization for Scalable Communication in Wireless Networks with Movement-Based Location Management 185Keqin Li 10.1 Introduction 185 10.2 Background Information 187 10.3 Cost Measure and Optimization for a Single User 190 10.4 Cost Optimization with Location Update Constraint 192 10.5 Cost Optimization with Terminal Paging Constraint 196 10.6 Numerical Data 201 10.7 Concluding Remarks 206 References / 206 11. A Framework for Semiautomatic Explicit Parallelization 209Ritu Arora, Purushotham Bangalore, and Marjan Mernik 11.1 Introduction 209 11.2 Explicit Parallelization Using MPI 210 11.3 Building Blocks of FraSPA 211 11.4 Evaluation of FraSPA through Case Studies 215 11.5 Lessons Learned 221 11.6 Related Work 222 11.7 Summary 224 References 224 12. Fault Tolerance and Transmission Reliability in Wireless Networks 227Wolfgang W. Bein and Doina Bein 12.1 Introduction: Reliability Issues in Wireless and Sensor Networks 227 12.2 Reliability and Fault Tolerance of Coverage Models for Sensor Networks 230 12.3 Fault-Tolerant k-Fold Pivot Routing in Wireless Sensor Networks 238 12.4 Impact of Variable Transmission Range in All-Wireless Networks 244 12.5 Conclusions and Open Problems 250 References / 251 13. Optimizing and Tuning Scientifi c Codes 255Qing Yi 13.1 Introduction 255 13.2 An Abstract View of the Machine Architecture 256 13.3 Optimizing Scientifi c Codes 256 13.4 Empirical Tuning of Optimizations 262 13.5 Related Work 272 13.6 Summary and Future Work 273 Acknowledgments 273 References 273 14. Privacy and Confi dentiality in Cloud Computing 277Khaled M. Khan and Qutaibah Malluhi 14.1 Introduction 277 14.2 Cloud Stakeholders and Computational Assets 278 14.3 Data Privacy and Trust 280 14.4 A Cloud Computing Example 281 14.5 Conclusion 288 Acknowledgments 288 References 288 15. Reputation Management Systems for Peer-to-Peer Networks 291Fang Qi, Haiying Shen, Harrison Chandler, Guoxin Liu, and Ze Li 15.1 Introduction 291 15.2 Reputation Management Systems 292 15.3 Case Study of Reputation Systems 307 15.4 Open Problems 316 15.5 Conclusion 316 Acknowledgments 317 References 317 16. Toward a Secure Fragment Allocation of Files in Heterogeneous Distributed Systems 321Yun Tian, Mohammed I. Alghamdi, Xiaojun Ruan, Jiong Xie, and Xiao Qin 16.1 Introduction 321 16.2 Related Work 323 16.3 System and Threat Models 325 16.4 S-FAS: A Secure Fragment Allocation Scheme 327 16.5 Assurance Models 329 16.6 Sap Allocation Principles and Prototype 332 16.7 Evaluation of System Assurance and Performance 333 16.8 Conclusion 339 Acknowledgments 341 References 341 17. Adopting Compression in Wireless Sensor Networks 343Xi Deng and Yuanyuan Yang 17.1 Introduction 343 17.2 Compression in Sensor Nodes 345 17.3 Compression Effect on Packet Delay 348 17.4 Online Adaptive Compression Algorithm 350 17.5 Performance Evaluations 360 17.6 Summary 362 References 363 18. GFOG: Green and Flexible Opportunistic Grids 365Harold Castro, Mario Villamizar, German Sotelo, Cesar O. Diaz, Johnatan Pecero, Pascal Bouvry, and Samee U. Khan 18.1 Introduction 365 18.2 Related Work 366 18.3 UnaGrid Infrastructure 369 18.4 Energy Consumption Model 372 18.5 Experimental Results 374 18.6 Conclusions and Future Work 382 References 382 19. Maximizing Real-Time System Utilization by Adjusting Task Computation Times 387Nasro Min-Allah, Samee Ullah Khan, Yongji Wang, Joanna Kolodziej, and Nasir Ghani 19.1 Introduction 387 19.2 Expressing Task Schedulability in Polylinear Surfaces 389 19.3 Task Execution Time Adjustment Based on the P-Bound 391 19.4 Conclusions 393 Acknowledgments 393 References 393 20. Multilevel Exploration of the Optimization Landscape through Dynamical Fitness for Grid Scheduling 395Joanna Kolodziej 20.1 Introduction 395 20.2 Statement of the Problem 397 20.3 General Characteristics of the Optimization Landscape 399 20.4 Multilevel Metaheuristic Schedulers 402 20.5 Empirical Analysis 408 20.6 Conclusions 417 References 417 21. Implementing Pointer Jumping for Exact Inference on Many-Core Systems 419Yinglong Xia, Nam Ma, and Viktor K. Prasanna 21.1 Introduction 419 21.2 Background 420 21.3 Related Work 422 21.4 Pointer Jumping-Based Algorithms for Scheduling Exact Inference 423 21.5 Analysis with Respect to Many-Core Processors 424 21.6 From Exact Inference to Generic Directed Acyclic Graph (DAG)-Structured Computations 427 21.7 Experiments 428 21.8 Conclusions 434 References 435 22. Performance Optimization of Scientifi c Applications Using an Autonomic Computing Approach 437Ioana Banicescu, Florina M. Ciorba, and Srishti Srivastava 22.1 Introduction 437 22.2 Scientifi c Applications and Their Performance 439 22.3 Load Balancing via DLS 441 22.4 The Use of Machine Learning in Improving the Performance of Scientifi c Applications 441 22.5 Design Strategies and an Integrated Framework 445 22.6 Experimental Results, Analysis, and Evaluation 455 22.7 Conclusions, Future Work, and Open Problems 462 Acknowledgments 463 References 463 23. A Survey of Techniques for Improving Search Engine Scalability through Profi ling, Prediction, and Prefetching of Query Results 467C. Shaun Wagner, Sahra Sedigh, Ali R. Hurson, and Behrooz Shirazi 23.1 Introduction 467 23.2 Modeling User Behavior 472 23.3 Grouping Users into Neighborhoods of Similarity 474 23.4 Similarity Metrics 481 23.5 Conclusion and Future Work 497 Appendix A Comparative Analysis of Comparison Algorithms 498 Appendix B Most Popular Searches 501 References 502 24. KNN Queries in Mobile Sensor Networks 507Wei-Guang Teng and Kun-Ta Chuang 24.1 Introduction 507 24.2 Preliminaries and Infrastructure-Based KNN Queries 509 24.3 Infrastructure-Free KNN Queries 511 24.4 Future Research Directions 519 24.5 Conclusions 519 References 520 25. Data Partitioning for Designing and Simulating Efficient Huge Databases 523Ladjel Bellatreche, Kamel Boukhalfa, Pascal Richard, and Soumia Benkrid 25.1 Introduction 523 25.2 Background and Related Work 527 25.3 Fragmentation Methodology 532 25.4 Hardness Study 535 25.5 Proposed Selection Algorithms 538 25.6 Impact of HP on Data Warehouse Physical Design 544 25.7 Experimental Studies 549 25.8 Physical Design Simulator Tool 553 25.9 Conclusion and Perspectives 559 References 560 26. Scalable Runtime Environments for Large-Scale Parallel Applications 563Camille Coti and Franck Cappello 26.1 Introduction 563 26.2 Goals of a Runtime Environment 565 26.3 Communication Infrastructure 567 26.4 Application Deployment 571 26.5 Fault Tolerance and Robustness 577 26.6 Case Studies 582 26.7 Conclusion 586 References 587 27. Increasing Performance through Optimization on APU 591Matthew Doerksen, Parimala Thulasiraman, and Ruppa Thulasiram 27.1 Introduction 591 27.2 Heterogeneous Architectures 591 27.3 Related Work 597 27.4 OpenCL, CUDA of the Future 600 27.5 Simple Introduction to OpenCL Programming 604 27.6 Performance and Optimization Summary 607 27.7 Application 607 27.8 Summary 609 Appendix 609 References 612 28. Toward Optimizing Cloud Computing: An Example of Optimization under Uncertainty 613Vladik Kreinovich 28.1 Cloud Computing: Why We Need It and How We Can Make It Most Efficient 613 28.2 Optimal Server Placement Problem: First Approximation 614 28.3 Server Placement in Cloud Computing: Toward a More Realistic Model 618 28.4 Predicting Cloud Growth: Formulation of the Problem and Our Approach to Solving This Problem 620 28.5 Predicting Cloud Growth: First Approximation 621 28.6 Predicting Cloud Growth: Second Approximation 622 28.7 Predicting Cloud Growth: Third Approximation 623 28.8 Conclusions and Future Work 625 Acknowledgments 625 Appendix: Description of Expenses Related to Cloud Computing 626 References 626 29. Modeling of Scalable Embedded Systems 629Arslan Munir, Sanjay Ranka, and Ann Gordon-Ross 29.1 Introduction 629 29.2 Embedded System Applications 631 29.3 Embedded Systems: Hardware and Software 634 29.4 Modeling: An Integral Part of the Embedded System Design Flow 638 29.5 Single- and Multiunit Embedded System Modeling 644 29.6 Conclusions 654 Acknowledgments 655 References 655 30. Scalable Service Composition in Pervasive Computing 659Joanna Siebert and Jiannong Cao 30.1 Introduction 659 30.2 Service Composition Framework 660 30.3 Approaches and Techniques for Scalable Service Composition in PvCE 664 30.4 Conclusions 671 References 671 31. Virtualization Techniques for Graphics Processing Units 675Pavan Balaji, Qian Zhu, and Wu-Chun Feng 31.1 Introduction 675 31.2 Background 677 31.3 VOCL Framework 677 31.4 VOCL Optimizations 682 31.5 Experimental Evaluation 687 31.6 Related Work 696 31.7 Concluding Remarks 696 References 697 32. Dense Linear Algebra on Distributed Heterogeneous Hardware with a Symbolic DAG Approach 699George Bosilca, Aurelien Bouteiller, Anthony Danalis, Thomas Herault, Piotr Luszczek, and Jack J. Dongara 32.1 Introduction and Motivation 699 32.2 Distributed Datafl ow by Symbolic Evaluation 701 32.3 The DAGuE Datafl ow Runtime 705 32.4 Datafl ow Representation 709 32.5 Programming Linear Algebra with DAGuE 716 32.6 Performance Evaluation 728 32.7 Conclusion 731 32.8 Summary 732 References 733 33. Fault-Tolerance Techniques for Scalable Computing 737Pavan Balaji, Darius Buntinas, and Dries Kimpe 33.1 Introduction and Trends in Large-Scale Computing Systems 737 33.2 Hardware Features for Resilience 738 33.3 Systems Software Features for Resilience 743 33.4 Application or Domain-Specifi c Fault-Tolerance Techniques 748 33.5 Summary 753 References 753 34. Parallel Programming Models for Scalable Computing 759James Dinan and Pavan Balaji 34.1 Introduction to Parallel Programming Models 759 34.2 The Message-Passing Interface (MPI) 761 34.3 Partitioned Global Address Space (PGAS) Models 765 34.4 Task-Parallel Programming Models 769 34.5 High-Productivity Parallel Programming Models 772 34.6 Summary and Concluding Remarks 775 Acknowledgment 775 References 775 35. Grid Simulation Tools for Job Scheduling and Data File Replication 777Javid Taheri, Albert Y. Zomaya, and Samee U. Khan 35.1 Introduction 777 35.2 Simulation Platforms 779 35.3 Problem Statement: Data-Aware Job Scheduling (DAJS) 792 References 795 Index 799

Read more less

Book SynopsisPresents all-new laboratory-tested theory for calculating more accurate ionized electric fields to aid in designing high-voltage devices and its components Understanding and accurately calculating corona originated electric fields are important issues for scientists who are involved in electromagnetic and electrostatic studies. High-voltage dc lines and equipment, in particular, can generate ion flows that can give rise to environmental inconveniences. Filamentary Ion Flow: Theory and Experiments provides interdisciplinary theoretical arguments to attain a final model for computational electrostatics in the presence of flowing space charge. Based on years of extensive lab tests pertaining to the physical performance of unipolar corona ion flows, the book covers the enlarging of conventional electrostatic applications, which allows for some emerging and uncharted interests to be explored. Filamentary Ion Flow: Examines theTrade Review“This made the book very interesting and well worth reading if you are involved in modeling electrostatic ion flows.” (IEEE Electrical Engineering magazine, 1 March 2015) Table of ContentsPREFACE xi ACKNOWLEDGMENTS xv INTRODUCTION xvii PRINCIPAL SYMBOLS xxv 1 FUNDAMENTALS OF ELECTRICAL DISCHARGES 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Ionization Processes in Gases 1 1.2.1 Ionization by Electron Impact 2 1.2.2 Townsend First Ionization Coefficient 3 1.2.3 Electron Avalanches 5 1.2.4 Photoionization 6 1.2.5 Other Ionization Processes 6 1.3 Deionization Processes in Gases 7 1.3.1 Deionization by Recombination 7 1.3.2 Deionization by Attachment 7 1.4 Ionization and Attachment Coefficients 9 1.5 Electrical Breakdown of Gases 10 1.5.1 Breakdown in Steady Uniform Field: Townsend's Breakdown Mechanism 11 1.5.2 Paschen's Law 12 1.6 Streamer Mechanism 13 1.7 Breakdown in Nonuniform DC Field 14 1.8 Other Streamer Criteria 16 1.9 Corona Discharge in Air 17 1.9.1 DC Corona Modes 17 1.9.2 Negative Corona Modes 18 1.9.3 Positive Corona Modes 20 1.10 AC Corona 22 1.11 Kaptzov's Hypothesis 23 2 ION-FLOW MODELS: A REVIEW 25 2.1 Introduction 25 2.2 The Unipolar Space-Charge Flow Problem 26 2.2.1 General Formulation 26 2.2.2 Iterative Procedure 29 2.2.3 The Unipolar Charge-Drift Formula 29 2.3 Deutsch's Hypotheses (DH) 30 2.4 Some Unipolar Ion-Flow Field Problems 31 2.4.1 Analytical Methods 33 2.4.2 Numerical Methods 40 2.5 Special Models 51 2.5.1 Drift of Charged Spherical Clouds 51 2.5.2 Graphical Approach 53 2.6 More on DH and Concluding Remarks 58 3 INTRODUCTORY SURVEY ON FLUID DYNAMICS 63 3.1 Introduction 63 3.2 Continuum Motion of a Fluid 64 3.3 Fluid Particle 65 3.4 Field Quantities 66 3.5 Conservation Laws in Differential Form 67 3.5.1 Generalization 67 3.5.2 Mass Conservation 68 3.5.3 Momentum Conservation 69 3.5.4 Total Kinetic Energy Conservation 70 3.6 Stokesian and Newtonian Fluids 71 3.7 The Navier–Stokes Equation 72 3.8 Deterministic Formulation for et 73 3.9 Incompressible (Isochoric) Flow 73 3.9.1 Mass Conservation 73 3.9.2 Subsonic Flow 74 3.9.3 Momentum Conservation 74 3.9.4 Total Kinetic Energy Conservation 75 3.10 Incompressible and Irrotational Flows 75 3.11 Describing the Velocity Field 76 3.11.1 Decomposition 76 3.11.2 The v-Field of Incompressible and Irrotational Flows 76 3.11.3 Some Practical Remarks and Anticipations 77 3.12 Variational Interpretation in Short 78 3.12.1 Bernoulli's Equation for Incompressible and Irrotational Flows 78 3.12.2 Lagrange's Function 80 4 ELECTROHYDRODYNAMICS OF UNIPOLAR ION FLOWS 87 4.1 Introduction 87 4.2 Reduced Mass-Charge 88 4.3 Unified Governing Laws 90 4.3.1 Mass-Charge Conservation Law 90 4.3.2 Fluid Reaction to Excitation Electromagnetic Fields 92 4.3.3 Invalid Application of Gauss's Law: A Pertaining Example 93 4.3.4 Laplacian Field and Boundary Conditions 95 4.3.5 Vanishing Body Force of Electrical Nature 96 4.3.6 Unified Momentum and Energy Conservation Law 97 4.3.7 Mobility in the Context of a Coupled Model 98 4.3.8 Some Remarks on the Deutsch Hypothesis (DH) 100 4.4 Discontinuous Ion-Flow Parameters 103 4.4.1 Multichanneled Structure 103 4.4.2 Current Distribution 104 4.4.3 More on the Average Quantities 108 4.5 Departures from Previous Theories 109 4.5.1 Ion-Drift Formulation 110 4.5.2 Comparative Discussion 112 4.5.3 Ionic Wind in the Drift Zone 117 4.6 Concluding Remarks on the Laplacian Structure of Ion Flows 120 5 EXPERIMENTAL INVESTIGATION ON UNIPOLAR ION FLOWS 131 5.1 Introduction 131 5.2 V-Shaped Wire Above Plane 136 5.2.1 Main Observables 144 5.3 Two-Wire Bundle 146 5.3.1 Main Observables 154 5.4 Inclined Rod 156 5.4.1 Main Observables 159 5.5 Partially Covered Wire 162 5.5.1 Main Observables 167 5.6 Pointed-Pole Sphere 168 5.6.1 Main Observables 170 5.7 Straight Wedge 170 5.7.1 Main Observables 174 5.8 Discussion 175 5.8.1 Supplementary Theoretical Analysis 175 5.9 Generalization According to Invariance Principles 179 REFERENCES 185 INDEX 193

Read more less

Book SynopsisProvides detailed descriptions of organic, inorganic, and hybrid solar cells and the latest developments in the quest to produce low-cost, long-lasting solar cells What will it take to transform solar energy from an important alternative source to a truly competitive and, perhaps, dominant one? Lower cost and longer life.Table of ContentsForeword Preface About the Authors Chapter 1 Introduction – Why Solar Energy? Ching-Fuh Lin 1.1 The Era of Fossil Energy 1.1.1 Possible Depletion of Fossil Fuels 1.1.2 Global Warming 1.1.3 Dramatic Change of Weather 1.2 Renewable Energies 1.3 Solar Energy and Economy 1.3.1 Production Issue 1.3.2 Types of Solar Cells 1.3.3 Cost Analysis—Grid Parity 1.3.4 Cost Analysis—Break Down the System Cost 1.3.5 The Forecast and Practical Trends 1.4 Move toward Thin-Film Solar Cells 1.4.1 Inorganic vs. Organic 1.4.2 More Possible Applications 1.5 Outline of the Book Chapter 2 Light and Its Interaction with Matters Ching-Fuh Lin 2.1 What is Light? 2.1.1 Light Ray 2.1.2 Light as a Wave 2.1.3 Plane-wave Solution of Wave Equation 2.1.4 Wave as a Particle 2.1.5 Black-body Radiation and Solar Spectrum 2.1.6 The Brightness and Intensity of Sunlight 2.2 Fundamentals of Interaction between Light and Matters 2.2.1 Interaction of Electric Field with Dielectrics 2.2.2 Interaction of Light with Magnetic Materials 2.2.3 Summary of Light-Matter Interaction without Energy Exchange 2.3 Basic Properties of Transparent Materials 2.3.1 Reflection and Refraction 2.3.1.1 Boundary Conditions for Electric and Magnetic Fields 2.3.1.2 Reflection and Transmission of Plane Waves 2.3.1.3 Laws of Reflection and Refraction 2.3.1.4 Reflection and Transmission Coefficients 2.3.1.5 Reflectivity and Ratio of Transmitted Intensity 2.3.1.6 Total Reflection 2.3.1.7 Brewster Angle 2.3.2 Polarization 2.3.3 Dispersion 2.3.4 Isotropy and Anisotropy 2.3.5 Scattering 2.3.6 Nonlinear Optics: Energy Up Conversion and Down Conversion 2.4 Interaction of Light and Matters with Energy Exchange 2.4.1 Interaction of Light with Conductors 2.4.2 Quantum Concept of Atomic System 2.4.3 Light-Matter Interactions Chapter 3 Fundamentals of Inorganic Solar Cells Chih-I Wu 3.1. From Atomic Bonds to Energy Bands 3.2 Energy Bands from a Quantum Mechanics Point of View 3.3. The Energy Band in Semiconductors 3.4. PN Junction 3.5 Energy Band Diagram of the PN Junction 3.6 Carrier Transport in a PN Junction 3.6.1 Diffusion 3.6.2 Drift 3.7 PN junction diodes 3.8 Solar Cell Diodes 3.9 Interaction of Light and Materials 3.10 Solar Cell Materials 3.10.1 Crystalline Silicon 3.10.2 GaAs 3.10.3 Thin Film Silicon 3.10.4 Cu-In-Ga-Se (CIGS) 3.10.5 Polymer Solar Cell Materials Chapter 4 Organic Materials Wei-Fang Su 4.1 Bonding and Structure of Organic Molecule 4.2 Properties of Organic Molecules 4.3 Optical Properties of Organic Materials 4.3.1 Absorption 4.3.2 Fluorescence 4.4 Band Gap of Organic Materials 4.5 Electrical Conducting Properties of Organic Materials 4.6 Suitable Organic Materials for Solar Cell Application Chapter 5 Interface between Organic and Inorganic Materials Wei-Fang Su 5.1 Interface between Transparent Electrode and Substrate 5.2 Interface between Transparent Electrode and Active Layer 5.3 Interface between Donor and Acceptor of Active Layer 5.4 Interface between Active Layer and Metal Electrode 5.5 Impedance Characteristics at the Interface Chapter 6 Inorganic Solar Cells I-Chun Cheng 6.1 Introduction 6.2 Basic Principles 6.2.1 P-N Junction in Equilibrium 6.2.2 Current-Voltage Characteristics 6.2.3 Photovoltaic Current-Voltage Characteristics 6.2.4 Series and Shunt Resistances 6.3 Crystalline Silicon Solar Cells 6.4 Thin Film Solar Cells 6.4.1 Amorphous Silicon-Based Thin Film Solar Cells 6.4.2 CdTe Thin Film Solar Cells 6.4.3 CuInSe2 - Based Thin Film Solar Cells 6.5 Outlook Chapter 7 Organic Solar Cells Ching-Fuh Lin 7.1 Dye Sensitized Solar Cell 7.1.1 Structure of DSSC 7.1.2 Principle of DSSC and Development of Dye 7.1.3 Solid-State Dye-Sensitized Solar Cell 7.2 Organic Molecule Solar Cell 7.3 Polymer Solar Cell 7.3.1 Principle of Polymer Solar Cell 7.3.2 Polymer: Fullerene Solar Cell 7.3.3 Effect of Active Layer Morphology on the Performance of Solar Cell 7.3.4 Polymer: Semiconducting Nanoparticle Solar Cell 7.4 Scale Up, Stability and Commercial Development of Organic Solar Cell Chapter 8 Organic-Inorganic Hybrid Solar Cells Ching-Fuh Lin 8.1 Fundamental Concepts for Organic-Inorganic Hybrid Solar Cells 8.2 Sandwiched Structures of the Organic-Inorganic Hybrid Solar Cells 8.2.1 Fabrication of Sandwiched Structures 8.2.2 Performance of Organic-Inorganic Hybrid Solar Cells with Sandwiched Structures 8.2.3 Crystal Phase of Metal Oxides used for Organic-Inorganic Hybrid Solar Cells 8.3 Effect of Mixed-Oxide Modification on Organic-Inorganic Hybrid Solar Cells 8.3.1 Effect of Mixed Oxide on P3HT:PCBM -Inorganic Hybrid Solar Cells 8.3.2 Effect of Mixed Oxides on PV2000-Inorganic Hybrid Solar Cells 8.3.3 Enhancement of Optical Absorption and Incident Photon-to-Electron Conversion Efficiency 8.4 Improvement of Stability 8.4.1 Improvement of Stability Using Mixed Oxides of WO3 and V2O5 8.4.2 Improvement of Stability Using Sol-Gel Processed CuOx 8.5 Organic-Nanostructured-Inorganic Hybrid Solar Cells 8.5.1 Organic-ZnO Nanorod Hybrid Solar Cells 8.5.1.1 Growth of ZnO Nanorods 8.5.1.2 Influence of Drying Time 8.5.1.3 Effect of Additional PCBM Clusters Deposited on ZnO Nanorod Arrays 8.5.2 Effect of Additional Layer of TiO2 Rods Deposited on ZnO Film 8.5.2.1 Effect of NiO Layer 8.5.2.2 Effect of TiO2 Nanorods 8.5.2.3 Influence of TiO2 Nanorods on the Surface Morphology 8.5.2.4 Overall Effect of TiO2 Nanorods on the Device Characteristics 8.6 Hybrid Solar cells using Low-Bandgap Polymers 8.6.1 Low-Bandgap Polymers in the Sandwiched Structure 8.6.2 Improved Stability with Low-Bandgap Polymers in the Sandwiched Structure 8.7 Si Nanowire-Organic Hybrid Solar Cells 8.7.1 Fabrication of SiNWs 8.7.2 The Fabrication of SiNW-organic Hybrid Solar Cells 8.7.3 The Characteristics of SiNW-Organic Hybrid Solar Cells 8.7.4 The Influence of Si NW Length Chapter 9 Outlook of Hybrid Solar Cell Wei-Fang Su References Exercises Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe science of measurement and instrumentation is a multidisciplinary study.Table of ContentsPREFACE xv ACRONYMS xviiI FUNDAMENTALS 11 MEASUREMENT MODELS AND UNCERTAINTY 3Alessandro Ferrero and Dario Petri1.1 Introduction 31.2 Measurement and Metrology 41.3 Measurement Along the Centuries 51.3.1 Measurement in Ancient Greece 61.3.2 Measurement in the Roman Empire 61.3.3 Measurement in the Renaissance Period 71.3.4 Measurement in the Modern Age 81.3.5 Measurement Today 91.4 Measurement Model 101.4.1 A First Measurement Model 111.4.2 A More Complex Measurement Model 161.4.3 Final Remarks 191.5 Uncertainty in Measurement 201.5.1 The Origin of the Doubt 211.5.2 The Different Effects on the Measurement Result 231.5.3 The Final Effect 251.6 Uncertainty Definition and Evaluation 271.6.1 The Error Concept and Why it Should be Abandoned 281.6.2 Uncertainty Definition: The GUM Approach 291.6.3 Evaluating Standard Uncertainty 311.6.4 The Combined Standard Uncertainty 351.7 Conclusions 39Further Reading 40References 41Exercises 412 THE SYSTEM OF UNITS AND THE MEASUREMENT STANDARDS 47Franco Cabiati2.1 Introduction 472.2 Role of the Unit in the Measurement Process 482.3 Ideal Structure of a Unit System 502.4 Evolution of the Unit Definition 522.5 The SI System of Units 532.6 Perspectives of Future SI Evolution 592.7 Realization of Units and Primary Standards 622.7.1 Meter Realization and Length Standards 652.7.2 Kilogram Realization and Mass Standards: Present Situation 662.7.3 Kilogram Realization: Future Perspective 672.7.4 Realization of the Second and Time Standards 692.7.5 Electrical Unit Realizations and Standards: Present Situation 712.7.6 Electrical Units Realization and Standards: Future Perspective 762.7.7 Kelvin Realization and Temperature Standards: Present Situation 782.7.8 Kelvin Realization and Temperature Standards: Future Perspective 792.7.9 Mole Realization: Present Situation 802.7.10 Mole Realization: Future Perspective 812.7.11 Candela Realization and Photometric Standards 822.8 Conclusions 83Further Reading 83References 84Exercises 843 DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING IN MEASUREMENT 87Alessandro Ferrero and Claudio Narduzzi3.1 Introduction 873.2 Sampling Theory 883.2.1 Sampling and Fourier Analysis 893.2.2 Band-Limited Signals 923.2.3 Interpolation 953.3 Measurement Algorithms for Periodic Signals 963.3.1 Sampling Periodic Signals 973.3.2 Estimation of the RMS Value 993.4 Digital Filters 1023.5 Measuring Multi-Frequency Signals 1063.5.1 Finite-Length Sequences 1073.5.2 Discrete Fourier Transform 1113.5.3 Uniform Window 1133.5.4 Spectral Leakage 1143.5.5 Leakage Reduction by the Use of Windows 1163.6 Statistical Measurement Algorithms 1193.7 Conclusions 120Further Reading 121References 122Exercises 1224 AD AND DA CONVERSION 125Niclas Björsell4.1 Introduction 1254.2 Sampling 1254.2.1 Quantization 1264.2.2 Sampling Theorem 1294.2.3 Signal Reconstruction 1304.2.4 Anti-Alias Filter 1334.3 Analog-to-Digital Converters 1334.3.1 Flash ADCs 1334.3.2 Pipelined ADCs 1344.3.3 Integrating ADCs 1344.3.4 Successive Approximation Register ADCs 1354.4 Critical ADC Parameters 1354.4.1 Gain and Offset 1364.4.2 Integral and Differential Non-linearity 1374.4.3 Total Harmonic Distortion and Spurious-Free Dynamic Range 1394.4.4 Effective Number of Bits 1394.5 Sampling Techniques 1394.5.1 Oversampling 1394.5.2 Sigma-Delta, ΣΔ 1404.5.3 Dither 1414.5.4 Time-Interleaved 1424.5.5 Undersampling 1424.5.6 Harmonic Sampling 1434.5.7 Equivalent-Time Sampling 1434.5.8 Model-Based Post-correction 1444.6 DAC 1444.6.1 Binary-Weighted 1444.6.2 Kelvin Divider 1454.6.3 Segmented 1454.6.4 R-2R 1454.6.5 PWM DAC 1454.7 Conclusions 146Further Reading 146References 146Exercises 1475 BASIC INSTRUMENTS: MULTIMETERS 149Daniel Slomovitz5.1 Introduction 1495.2 History 1505.3 Main Characteristics 1535.3.1 Ranges 1535.3.2 Number of Digits and Resolution 1555.3.3 Accuracy 1585.3.4 Loading Effects 1595.3.5 Guard 1605.3.6 Four Terminals 1615.3.7 Accessories 1625.3.8 AC Measurements 1645.3.9 Safety 1675.3.10 Calibration 1705.3.11 Selection 1715.4 Conclusions 171Further Reading 172References 172Exercises 1736 BASIC INSTRUMENTS: OSCILLOSCOPES 175Jorge Fernandez Daher6.1 Introduction 1756.2 Types of Waveforms 1766.2.1 Sinewave 1766.2.2 Square or Rectangular Wave 1766.2.3 Triangular or Sawtooth Wave 1766.2.4 Pulses 1776.3 Waveform Measurements 1776.3.1 Amplitude 1776.3.2 Phase Shift 1776.3.3 Period and Frequency 1776.4 Types of Oscilloscopes 1776.5 Oscilloscope Controls 1816.5.1 Vertical Controls 1836.5.2 Horizontal Controls 1846.5.3 Trigger System 1856.5.4 Display System 1876.6 Measurements 1886.6.1 Peak-to-Peak Voltage 1886.6.2 RMS Voltage 1886.6.3 Rise Time 1886.6.4 Fall Time 1886.6.5 Pulse Width 1886.6.6 Period 1906.6.7 Frequency 1906.6.8 Phase Shift Measurements 1906.6.9 Mathematical Functions 1906.7 Performance Characteristics 1916.7.1 Bandwidth 1916.7.2 Rise Time 1916.7.3 Channels 1936.7.4 Vertical Resolution 1936.7.5 Gain Accuracy 1936.7.6 Horizontal Accuracy 1936.7.7 Record Length 1936.7.8 Update Rate 1946.7.9 Connectivity 1956.8 Oscilloscope Probes 1956.8.1 Passive Probes 1966.8.2 Active Probes 1976.9 Using the Oscilloscope 1996.9.1 Grounding 1996.9.2 Calibration 1996.10 Conclusions 199Further Reading 200References 200Exercises 2017 FUNDAMENTALS OF HARD AND SOFT MEASUREMENT 203Luca Mari, Paolo Carbone and Dario Petri7.1 Introduction 2037.2 A Characterization of Measurement 2067.2.1 Measurement as Value Assignment 2067.2.2 Measurement as Process Performed by a Metrological System 2097.2.3 Measurement as Process Conveying Quantitative Information 2097.2.4 Measurement as Morphic Mapping 2107.2.5 Measurement as Mapping on a Given Reference Scale 2137.2.6 Measurement as Process Conveying Objective and Inter-Subjective Information 2157.2.7 The Operative Structure of Measurement 2167.2.8 A Possible Definition of “Measurement” 2197.2.9 Hard Measurements and Soft Measurements 2207.2.10 Multidimensional Properties 2227.3 A Conceptual Framework of the Structure of Measurement 2237.3.1 Goal Setting 2257.3.2 Modeling 2287.3.3 Design 2417.3.4 Execution: Setup, Data Acquisition, Information Extraction and Reporting 2437.3.5 Interpretation 2457.4 An Application of the Measurement Structure Framework: Assessing Versus Measuring Research Quality 2467.4.1 Motivations for Research Quality Measurement 2467.4.2 Measurement Goal Definition 2477.4.3 Modeling 2507.4.4 Design 2527.4.5 Execution 2547.4.6 Interpretation 2557.5 Conclusions 256Further Reading 257References 257Exercises 260II APPLICATIONS 2638 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION 265Gerd Vandersteen8.1 Introduction 2658.2 A First Example: The Resistive Divider 2658.3 A First Trial of Estimators 2678.4 From Trial-and-Error to a General Framework 2688.4.1 Setting up the Estimator 2698.4.2 Uncertainty on the Estimates 2708.4.3 Model Validation 2718.4.4 Extracting the Noise Model 2748.5 Practical Identification Framework for Instrumentation and Measurements 2778.5.1 Dynamic Linear Time-Invariant (LTI) Systems 2778.5.2 From Linear to Nonlinear Systems 2808.5.3 Sine Fitting 2808.5.4 Calibration and Compensation Techniques 2828.6 Conclusions 282Further Reading 283References 283Exercises 2859 RELIABILITY MEASUREMENTS 287Marcantonio Catelani9.1 Introduction 2879.2 Brief Remarks on the Concept of Quality 2889.3 Reliability, Failure and Fault: Basic Concepts and Definitions 2889.4 Reliability Theory 2929.4.1 Reliability Models and Measures Related to Time to Failure 2929.4.2 Life Distributions 2989.4.3 Reliability Parameters 3009.4.4 The Bath-Tube Curve 3029.5 System Reliability Assessment 3039.5.1 Series Configuration 3049.5.2 Parallel Configuration 3059.5.3 k-out-of-n Configuration 3079.6 Analysis Techniques for Dependability 3109.6.1 Failure Modes and Effect Analysis 3119.6.2 Fault Tree Analysis 3129.7 Conclusions 313Further Reading 314References 314Exercises 31510 EMC MEASUREMENTS 317Carlo Carobbi10.1 Introduction 31710.2 Definitions and Terminology 31810.3 The Measuring Receiver 32110.3.1 Quasi-Peak Measuring Receivers 32110.3.2 Peak Measuring Receivers 32910.4 Conducted Emission Measurements 32910.4.1 The Artificial Mains Network 32910.4.2 The Current Probe 33210.5 Radiated Emission Measurements 33310.5.1 Antennas for the 9 kHz to 30 MHz Frequency Range 33410.5.2 Antennas for the Frequency Range Above 30 MHz 33510.5.3 Measurement Sites 33910.6 Immunity Tests 34310.6.1 Conducted Immunity Tests 34310.6.2 Radiated Immunity Tests 34610.7 Conclusions 347Further Reading 348References 348Exercises 351PROBLEM SOLUTIONS 353INDEX 371

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis reference book for system engineers, architects, and managers focuses on how to design, analyze, and deploy Web service-based workflows for both business and scientific applications in a broad domain of healthcare and biomedicine.Table of ContentsForeword xi Preface xiii 1. Introduction 1 1.1 Background and Motivations, 1 1.1.1 Web Service and Service-Oriented Architecture, 1 1.1.2 Workflow Technology, 4 1.2 Overview of Standards, 8 1.2.1 Web Service-Related Standards, 8 1.2.2 Workflow-Related Standards, 19 1.3 Workflow Design: State of the Art, 22 1.3.1 Automatic Service Composition, 22 1.3.2 Mediation-Aided Service Composition, 23 1.3.3 Verification of Service-Based Workflows, 24 1.3.4 Decentralized Execution of Workflows, 25 1.3.5 Scientific Workflow Systems, 26 1.4 Contributions, 27 2. Petri Net Formalism 29 2.1 Basic Petri Nets, 29 2.2 Workflow Nets, 32 2.3 Colored Petri Nets, 35 3. Data-Driven Service Composition 39 3.1 Problem Statement, 40 3.1.1 Domains and Data Relations, 41 3.1.2 Problem Formulation, 43 3.2 Data-Driven Composition Rules, 45 3.2.1 Sequential Composition Rule, 46 3.2.2 Parallel Composition Rule, 46 3.2.3 Choice Composition Rule, 47 3.3 Data-Driven Service Composition, 48 3.3.1 Basic Definitions, 48 3.3.2 Derive AWSP from Service Net, 50 3.4 Effectiveness and Efficiency of the Data-Driven Approach, 55 3.4.1 Solution Effectiveness, 55 3.4.2 Complexity Analysis, 56 3.5 Case Study, 57 3.6 Discussion, 60 3.7 Summary, 61 3.8 Bibliographic Notes, 62 4. Analysis and Composition of Partially-Compatible Web Services 65 4.1 Problem Definition and Motivating Scenario, 65 4.1.1 A Motivating Scenario, 68 4.2 Petri Net Formalism for BPEL Service, Mediation, and Compatibility, 70 4.2.1 CPN Formalism for BPEL Process, 70 4.2.2 CPN Formalism for Service Composition, 73 4.2.3 Mediator and Mediation-Aided Service Composition, 75 4.3 Compatibility Analysis via Petri Net Models, 78 4.3.1 Transforming Abstract BPEL Process to SWF-net, 79 4.3.2 Specifying Data Mapping, 80 4.3.3 Mediator Existence Checking, 81 4.3.4 Proof of Theorem 4.1, 85 4.4 Mediator Generation Approach, 88 4.4.1 Types of Mediation, 88 4.4.2 Guided Mediator Generation, 90 4.5 Bibliographic Notes, 94 4.5.1 Web Service Composition, 94 4.5.2 Business Process Integration, 94 4.5.3 Web Service Configuration, 94 4.5.4 Petri Net Model of BPEL Processes, 94 4.5.5 Component/Web Service Mediation, 95 5. Web Service Configuration with Multiple Quality-of-Service Attributes 99 5.1 Introduction, 99 5.2 Quality-of-Service Measurements, 104 5.2.1 QoS Attributes, 104 5.2.2 Aggregation, 104 5.2.3 Computation of QoS, 105 5.3 Assembly Petri Nets and Their Properties, 107 5.3.1 Assembly and Disassembly Petri Nets, 107 5.3.2 Definition of Incidence Matrix and State-Shift Equation, 110 5.3.3 Definition of Subgraphs and Solutions, 111 5.4 Optimal Web Service Configuration, 114 5.4.1 Web Service Configuration under Single QoS Objective, 115 5.4.2 Web Service Configuration under Multiple QoS Objectives, 116 5.4.3 Experiments and Performance Analysis, 117 5.5 Implementation, 121 5.6 Summary, 123 5.7 Bibliographic Notes, 124 6. A Web Service-Based Public-Oriented Personalized Health Care Platform 127 6.1 Background and Motivation, 127 6.2 System Architecture, 129 6.2.1 The System Architecture of PHISP, 129 6.2.2 Services Encapsulated in PHISP, 131 6.2.3 Composite Service Specifications, 133 6.2.4 User/Domain Preferences, 134 6.3 Web Service Composition with Branch Structures, 137 6.3.1 Basic Ideas and Concepts, 137 6.3.2 Service Composition Planner Supporting Branch Structures, 139 6.3.3 Illustrating Examples, 148 6.4 Web Service Composition with Parallel Structures, 153 6.5 Demonstrations and Results, 155 6.5.1 WSC Example in PHISP, 155 6.5.2 Implementation of PHISP, 158 6.6 Summary, 159 7. Scientific Workflows Enabling Web-Scale Collaboration 161 7.1 Service-Oriented Infrastructure for Science, 162 7.1.1 Service-Oriented Scientific Exploration, 162 7.1.2 Case Study: The Cancer Grid (caGrid), 166 7.2 Scientific Workflows in Service-Oriented Science, 167 7.2.1 Scientific Workflow: Old Wine in New Bottle? 167 7.2.2 caGrid Workflow Toolkit, 174 7.2.3 Exemplary caGrid Workflows, 183 7.3 Summary, 188 8. Network Analysis and Reuse of Scientific Workflows 189 8.1 Social Computing Meets Scientific Workflow, 190 8.1.1 Social Network Services for Scientists, 191 8.1.2 Related Research Work, 197 8.2 Network Analysis of myExperiment, 199 8.2.1 Network Model at a Glance, 199 8.2.2 Undirected Network, 200 8.2.3 Directed Graph, 205 8.2.4 Summary of Findings, 206 8.3 ServiceMap: Providing Map and GPS Assisting Service Composition in Bioinformatics, 207 8.3.1 Motivation, 207 8.3.2 ServiceMap Approach, 209 8.3.3 What Do People Who Use These Services Also Use? 210 8.3.4 What is an Operation Chain Between Services/Operations, 212 8.3.5 An Empirical Study, 218 8.4 Summary, 219 9. Future Perspectives 221 9.1 Workflows in Hosting Platforms, 222 9.2 Workflows Empowered by Social Computing, 223 9.3 Workflows Meeting Big Data, 224 9.4 Emergency Workflow Management, 225 Abbreviations List 227 References 231 Index 247

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book fills a void in the field of power systems, as an invaluable compendium for researchers, practitioners, as well as graduate students. It covers everything from load and price forecasting, to post-storm service restoration times. It also introduces advanced methods of time series forecasting, as well as neural networks.Table of ContentsPreface and Acknowledgments vii Contributors ix 1. Introduction 1Mohamed E. El-Hawary 2. Univariate Methods for Short-Term Load Forecasting 17James W. Taylor and Patrick E. McSharry 3. Application of theWeighted Nearest Neighbor Method to Power System Forecasting Problems 41Antonio Gomez-Exposito, Alicia Troncoso, Jesus M. Riquelme-Santos, Catalina Gomez-Quiles, Jose L. Martýnez-Ramos, and Jose C. Riquelme 4. Electricity Prices as a Stochastic Process 89Yunhe Hou, Chen-Ching Liu, and Harold Salazar 5. Short-Term Forecasting of Electricity Prices Using Mixed Models 153Carolina Garcýa-Martos, Julio Rodrýguez, and Marýa Jesus Sanchez 6. Electricity Price Forecasting Using Neural Networks and Similar Days 215Paras Mandal, Anurag K. Srivastava, Tomonobu Senjyu, and Michael Negnevitsky 7. Estimation of Post-Storm Restoration Times for Electric Power Distribution Systems 251Rachel A. Davidson, Haibin Liu, and Tatiyana V. Apanasovich 8. A Nonparametric Approach for River Flow Forecasting Based on Autonomous Neural Network Models 285Vitor Hugo Ferreira and Alexandre P. Alves da Silva Index 297

Read more less

Book SynopsisProvides options for implementing IPv6 and IPv6 multicast in service provider networks New technologies, viewing paradigms, and content distribution approaches are taking the TV/video services industry by storm. Linear and Nonlinear Video and TV Applications: Using IPv6 and IPv6 Multicast identifies five emerging trends in next-generation delivery of entertainment-quality video. These trends are observable and can be capitalized upon by progressive service providers, telcos, cable operators, and ISPs. This comprehensive guide explores these evolving directions in the TV/video services industry, including worldwide deployment of IPv6, IPTV services, web-produced video content, and the plethora of different screens available, from TV to iPad. It offers practical suggestions as to how these technologies can be implemented in service provider networks to support cost-effective delivery of entertainment, and how new revenue-generating services can be brought to markeTable of ContentsPreface xi 1 Evolving Viewing Paradigms 1 1.1 Overview of the Evolving Environment 1 1.2 New Content Sources and Sinks 14 1.3 Technology Trends (Snapshot) 23 1.4 Revenue-Generation Trends 29 1.5 General Infrastructure Implications for Service Providers 29 1.6 Scope of the Investigation 36 2 An Overview of IPv6 45 2.1 Overview and Motivations 45 2.2 Address Capabilities 50 2.2.1 IPv4 Addressing and Issues 50 2.2.2 IPv6 Address Space 51 2.3 IPv6 Protocol Overview 56 2.4 Header Compression Schemes 66 2.5 Quality of Service (QoS) in IPv6 70 2.6 Migration Strategies to IPv6 71 2.6.1 Technical Approaches 71 2.6.2 Residential Broadband Services in an IPv6 Environment 75 2.6.3 Deployment Opportunities 76 3 An Overview of IP Multicast and Multicast Principles 95 3.1 Multicast Environment 95 3.2 Basic Multicast Concepts and Protocols 98 3.3 IP Multicast Addresses 103 3.4 Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) 107 4 IPv6 Multicast Approaches 115 4.1 Overview 115 4.2 IPv6 Multicast Addresses 116 4.3 Media Access Control (MAC) Layer Addresses Aspects 118 4.4 Signaling 119 4.5 Routing 119 4.6 Rendezvous Point (RP) Approaches 121 4.7 Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) 123 4.7.1 Overview of MLDv1 123 4.7.2 Message Format 124 4.7.3 Protocol Description 126 4.7.4 State Transition for Nodes 128 4.7.5 State Transition for Routers 130 4.7.6 Overview of MLDv2 132 4.7.7 Source Filtering 137 5 Evolving Traditional and Nontraditional TV Services 139 5.1 Basic Services 139 5.1.1 Distributed Content Service 140 5.1.2 Interactive Services 141 5.1.3 Public Interest Services 142 5.2 Advanced Services 142 5.2.1 Linear TV with Trick Mode 143 5.2.2 Personal Video Recorder (PVR) Services 143 5.2.3 Advertising Services 144 5.2.4 Audience Measurement Information 145 5.2.5 Interactive Services Requiring High Security 145 6 IPTV Systems and Technologies 147 6.1 Overview and Stakeholder Universe 148 6.1.1 Definitions 148 6.1.2 Services under Consideration 150 6.1.3 IPTV Stakeholder Universe 156 6.1.4 Market Scope 157 6.1.5 Multicast Mechanisms 159 6.2 IPTV Architectures and Architectural Requirements 160 6.3 QoE and QoS 166 6.3.1 QoE Aspects 166 6.3.2 QoS Aspects 173 6.4 Service Security and Content Protection 176 6.5 IPTV Networks 176 6.5.1 IPTV Multicast Frameworks 183 6.5.2 Control and Signaling Aspects 186 6.5.3 Content Delivery 187 6.6 End Systems and Interoperability Aspects 188 6.6.1 IPTV Terminal Devices 188 6.6.2 Home Network 199 6.6.3 Audience Information 202 6.7 Middleware, Application, and Content Platforms 204 6.7.1 IPTV Metadata 204 6.7.2 IPTV Middleware Architecture 206 6.7.3 Content Provisioning 208 6.7.4 Service Discovery 208 6.7.5 Service Navigation 210 6.7.6 Electronic Program Guide 212 6.7.7 User Profiles 213 6.7.8 Protocol Support Machinery for Middleware, Application, and Content Platforms 214 6.8 IPTV Standards: A Comprehensive Process 217 6.8.1 ITU-T 218 6.8.2 ATIS IPTV Interoperability Forum (IIF) 220 6.8.3 Commercial Products and Interworking 226 7 Technologies for Internet-Based TV 240 7.1 Streaming 240 7.1.1 Real-Time Transport Protocol/Real-Time Streaming Protocol (RTP/RTSP) 243 7.1.2 Apple HTTP Live Streaming 248 7.1.3 HTTP Flash Progressive Download 252 7.2 Content Delivery Networks 252 7.3 P2P Networks 256 7.4 Cloud Computing 257 7.5 Core Internet Technologies 260 7.5.1 Very High-Capacity Backbone Networks, Transmission 260 7.5.2 Very High-Capacity Backbone Networks, Routing 268 7.5.3 Terrestrial Trends in Access Networks 269 7.6 Storage Technologies to Support IBTV 282 7.7 Service Provider Strategies for NTTV 294 7.7.1 Overview 294 7.7.2 Discussion 296 8 Nontraditional Video Display and Content Sources 308 8.1 NTTV Trends 308 8.2 NTTV Display Units 309 8.3 NTTV Content Sources 311 8.3.1 Hulu 316 8.3.2 Apple 316 8.3.3 Boxee 316 8.3.4 Clicker 319 8.3.5 Revision3 Internet Television 319 8.3.6 Next New Networks 321 8.3.7 UltraViolet 321 8.3.8 Netflix 322 References 323 Glossary 324 Index 390 About the Author 407

Read more less

Book SynopsisFocusing on imaging aspects of bistatic Synthetic Aperture Radar (SAR) signal processing, this book covers resolution analysis, echo generation methods, imaging algorithms, imaging parameter estimation, and motion compensation methods.Table of ContentsAbout the Authors ix Preface xi Acknowledgements xiii List of Acronyms xv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Overview of SAR Development 1 1.1.1 The History of SAR Development 1 1.1.2 The Current Status and Trends of SAR Development 3 1.2 Brief Introduction of Bistatic SAR 8 1.2.1 Basic Concept of Bistatic SAR 8 1.2.2 The Advantages and the Prospects of Bistatic SAR 8 1.2.3 The Present Status of Bistatic SAR Development 9 1.2.4 The Key Problems of Bistatic SAR 11 1.3 Contents of the Book 13 References 14 2 Signal Processing Basis of SAR 17 2.1 Range Resolution of SAR 17 2.1.1 Basic Concept of Range Resolution 17 2.1.2 Classical Theory of SAR Resolution 18 2.1.3 Linear Frequency Modulated Signal (Chirp Signal) 20 2.1.4 Matched Filter 22 2.2 Azimuth Resolution of SAR 24 2.2.1 Basic Concept of Azimuth Resolution 24 2.2.2 Theory of Synthetic Aperture 25 2.2.3 Realizing a Synthetic Aperture Using a Matched Filter 26 2.3 SAR Resolution Cell 29 2.4 SAR Processing Model – Single-Point Target Imaging 32 2.4.1 SAR Echo Model of a Single-Point Target 32 2.4.2 Single-Point Target Imaging 33 2.5 Brief Introduction to Efficient SAR Imaging Algorithms 37 2.5.1 RD Algorithm 38 2.5.2 CS Algorithm 42 2.5.3 ω-k Algorithm 46 2.6 Summary 48 References 49 3 Basic Knowledge of Bistatic SAR Imaging 51 3.1 Bistatic SAR Configurations 51 3.2 Radar Equation of Bistatic SAR 53 3.3 Spatial Resolution of Bistatic SAR 55 3.3.1 Range Resolution 56 3.3.2 Azimuth Resolution 60 3.3.3 Resolution Cell of Bistatic SAR 80 3.4 Summary 80 References 81 4 Echo Simulation of Bistatic SAR 83 4.1 Introduction 83 4.2 Traditional Monostatic SAR Raw Data Simulation 84 4.2.1 Echo Signal Model and Simulation Theory 84 4.2.2 Implementation of the Simulation 86 4.2.3 Simulation Results 91 4.3 Raw Data Simulation for Translational Invariant Bistatic SAR 96 4.3.1 Short Bistatic Baseline Case 97 4.3.2 Long Bistatic Baseline Case 100 4.4 Summary 109 References 109 5 Imaging Algorithms for Translational Invariant Bistatic SAR 111 5.1 Introduction 111 5.2 Imaging Algorithms Based on Monostatic Transform 114 5.2.1 DMO Method 115 5.2.2 An Explanation of the DMO Method by Synthesizing Narrow Beams 119 5.3 Imaging Algorithms Based on Range History Simplification 120 5.3.1 Baseline Middle-Point Monostatic SAR Approximation 121 5.3.2 Hyperbolic Approximation 124 5.3.3 Advanced Hyperbolic Approximation 147 5.4 Imaging Algorithms Based on Analytical Explicit Spectrums 169 5.4.1 Imaging Algorithm Based on LBF 169 5.4.2 Imaging Algorithm Based on MSR 174 5.4.3 Imaging Algorithm Based on IDW 178 5.5 Imaging Algorithms Based on Accurate Implicit Spectrums 185 5.5.1 Implicit BPTRS 187 5.5.2 Decomposition of the Phase Spectrum 189 5.5.3 The Residual Phase Error and Phase Error Compensation 193 5.5.4 Simulation Results 196 5.6 Comparison of the Algorithms 204 5.6.1 Comparison of the Wavenumber Domain Algorithms 205 5.6.2 Comparison of the Wavenumber Domain Algorithms and the Range-Doppler Domain Algorithms 207 5.7 Summary 209 References 209 6 Imaging Algorithm for Translational Variant Bistatic SAR 213 6.1 Introduction 213 6.2 Imaging Algorithms for One-Stationary Bistatic SAR 214 6.2.1 Imaging Geometry and Signal Model 214 6.2.2 NLCS Algorithm Based on Azimuth Perturbation for the Strip Mode 216 6.2.3 Algorithm Based on the Keystone Transform for the Spotlight Mode 231 6.2.4 Algorithm for the One-Stationary Forward-Looking Configuration 244 6.3 Imaging Algorithms for Translational Variant Bistatic SAR with Constant Velocities 253 6.3.1 Imaging Geometry and the Signal Model 254 6.3.2 Imaging Processing Based on BPTRS 256 6.3.3 Imaging Processing Based on NuSAR 257 6.3.4 Simulations 262 6.4 Summary 269 References 270 7 Bistatic SAR Parameter Estimation and Motion Compensation 273 7.1 Introduction 273 7.2 Analyzing the Effects of Motion Errors 274 7.2.1 Attitude Error Analysis 274 7.2.2 Motion Error Analysis 277 7.3 Estimation of Doppler Parameters 284 7.3.1 Definition of the Doppler Centroid 285 7.3.2 Doppler Centroid Estimation Method Based on a Time–Frequency Domain Pre-Filter 287 7.4 Principle and Methods of SAR Motion Compensation 297 7.4.1 Principle of Motion Compensation 297 7.4.2 Sensor-Based Motion Compensation 299 7.4.3 SAR Data-Based Motion Compensation 306 7.5 Summary 310 References 310 Index 313

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe Second Edition of OFDM Baseband Receiver Design for Wirless Communications, this book expands on the earlier edition with enhanced coverage of MIMO techniques, additional baseband algorithms, and more IC design examples. The authors cover the full range of OFDM technology, from theories and algorithms to architectures and circuits. The book gives a concise yet comprehensive look at digital communication fundamentals before explaining signal processing algorithms in receivers. The authors give detailed treatment of hardware issues - from architecture to IC implementation. Links OFDM and MIMO theory with hardware implementation Enables the reader to transfer communication received concepts into hardware; design wireless receivers with acceptable implemntation loss; achieve low-power designs Covers the latest standards, such as DVB-T2, WiMax, LTE and LTE-A Includes more baseband algorithms, like soft-decoding algorithms such as Table of ContentsPreface xiii About the Authors xvii Acknowledgements xix List of Abbreviations and Acronyms xxi Part One: Fundamentals of Wireless Communication 1. Introduction 3 1.1 Digital Broadcasting Systems 3 1.1.1 Digital Audio Broadcasting (DAB) 4 1.1.2 Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB) 4 1.2 Mobile Cellular Systems 6 1.2.1 Carrier Aggregation 8 1.2.2 Multiple-Antenna Configuration 8 1.2.3 Relay Transmission 9 1.2.4 Coordinated Multipoint Transmission and Reception (CoMP) 9 1.3 Wireless Network Systems 10 1.3.1 Personal Area Network (PAN) 10 1.3.2 Local Area Network (LAN) 12 1.3.3 Metropolitan Area Network (MAN) 13 1.3.4 Wide Area Network (WAN) 14 Summary 14 References 15 2. Digital Modulation 17 2.1 Single-Carrier Modulation 17 2.1.1 Power Spectral Densities of Modulation Signals 18 2.1.2 PSK, QAM, and ASK 19 2.1.3 CPFSK and MSK 22 2.1.4 Pulse Shaping and Windowing 23 2.2 Multi-Carrier Modulation 24 2.2.1 Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiplexing 27 2.2.2 OFDM Related Issues 27 2.2.3 OFDM Transceiver Architecture 31 2.3 Adaptive OFDM 33 Summary 37 References 37 3. Advanced Wireless Technology 39 3.1 Multiple-Input Multiple-Output (MIMO) 39 3.1.1 Introduction 39 3.1.2 MIMO Basics 41 3.1.3 MIMO Techniques 43 3.1.4 MIMO-OFDM System Example 50 3.2 Multiple Access 53 3.2.1 Frequency-Division Multiple Access (FDMA) 54 3.2.2 Time-Division Multiple Access (TDMA) 54 3.2.3 Code-Division Multiple Access (CDMA) 55 3.2.4 Carrier Sense Multiple Access (CSMA) 57 3.2.5 Orthogonal Frequency-Division Multiple Access (OFDMA) 57 3.2.6 Space-Division Multiple Access (SDMA) 58 3.3 Spread Spectrum and CDMA 59 3.3.1 PN Codes 60 3.3.2 Direct-Sequence Spread Spectrum 63 3.3.3 Frequency-Hopping Spread Spectrum 65 Summary 66 References 67 4. Error-Correcting Codes 69 4.1 Introduction 69 4.2 Block Codes 70 4.2.1 Linear Codes 70 4.2.2 Cyclic Codes 72 4.3 Reed–Solomon Codes 73 4.3.1 Finite Fields 74 4.3.2 Encoding 75 4.3.3 Decoding 76 4.3.4 Shortened Reed–Solomon Codes 76 4.4 Convolutional Codes 77 4.4.1 Encoding 77 4.4.2 Viterbi Decoder 79 4.4.3 Punctured Convolutional Codes 80 4.5 Soft-Input Soft-Output Decoding Algorithms 81 4.5.1 MAP Decoder 82 4.5.2 Log-MAP Decoder 85 4.5.3 Max-Log-MAP Decoder 86 4.6 Turbo Codes 87 4.6.1 Encoding 87 4.6.2 Decoding 88 4.7 Low-Density Parity-Check Codes 89 4.7.1 Encoding 89 4.7.2 Decoding 91 Summary 93 References 94 5. Signal Propagation and Channel Model 95 5.1 Introduction 95 5.2 Wireless Channel Propagation 96 5.2.1 Path Loss and Shadowing 96 5.2.2 Multipath Fading 97 5.2.3 Multipath Channel Parameters 98 5.2.4 MIMO Channel 104 5.3 Front-End Electronics Effects 105 5.3.1 Carrier Frequency Offset 105 5.3.2 Sampling Clock Offset 106 5.3.3 Phase Noise 106 5.3.4 IQ Imbalance and DC Offset 107 5.3.5 Power Amplifier Nonlinearity 110 5.4 Channel Model 111 5.4.1 Model for Front-End Impairments 112 5.4.2 Multipath Rayleigh Fader Model 113 5.4.3 Channel Models Used in Standards 116 Summary 122 References 123 Part Two: MIMO-OFDM Receiver Processing 6. Synchronization 127 6.1 Introduction 127 6.2 Synchronization Issues 128 6.2.1 Synchronization Errors 128 6.2.2 Effects of Synchronization Errors 128 6.2.3 Consideration for Estimation and Compensation 133 6.3 Detection and Estimation of Synchronization Errors 134 6.3.1 Symbol Timing Detection 134 6.3.2 Carrier Frequency Offset Estimation 143 6.3.3 Residual CFO and SCO Estimation 147 6.3.4 Carrier Phase Estimation 149 6.3.5 IQ Imbalance Estimation 150 6.4 Detection and Estimation of Synchronization Errors in MIMO-OFDM Systems 153 6.4.1 Symbol Timing Detection in MIMO-OFDM Systems 153 6.4.2 Carrier Frequency Offset Estimation in MIMO-OFDM Systems 155 6.4.3 Residual CFO and SCO Estimation in MIMO-OFDM Systems 156 6.4.4 Carrier Phase Estimation in MIMO-OFDM Systems 157 6.4.5 IQ Imbalance Estimation in MIMO-OFDM Systems 157 6.5 Recovery of Synchronization Errors 158 6.5.1 Carrier Frequency Offset Compensation 158 6.5.2 Sampling Clock Offset and Common Phase Error Compensation 160 6.5.3 IQ Imbalance Compensation 163 Summary 163 References 164 7. Channel Estimation and Equalization 167 7.1 Introduction 167 7.2 Pilot Pattern 168 7.2.1 Pilot Pattern in SISO-OFDM Systems 168 7.2.2 Pilot Pattern in MIMO-OFDM Systems 171 7.3 SISO-OFDM Channel Estimation 174 7.3.1 Channel Estimation by Block-Type Pilot Symbols 177 7.3.2 Channel Estimation by Comb-Type Pilot Symbols 179 7.3.3 Channel Estimation by Grid-Type Pilot Symbols 186 7.4 MIMO-OFDM Channel Estimation 191 7.4.1 Space–Time Pilot 191 7.5 Adaptive Channel Estimation 194 7.6 Equalization 195 7.6.1 One-Tap Equalizer 195 7.6.2 Multi-Tap Equalizer 198 7.7 Iterative Receiver 204 7.7.1 Iterative Synchronization and Channel Estimation 205 7.7.2 Bit-Interleaved Coded Modulation with Iterative Decoding (BICM-ID) 205 Summary 206 References 207 8. MIMO Detection 209 8.1 Introduction 209 8.2 Linear Detection 210 8.2.1 Zero Forcing (ZF) 210 8.2.2 Minimum Mean Squared Error (MMSE) 211 8.3 MIMO Detection with Channel Preprocessing 212 8.3.1 Sorting 212 8.3.2 QR Decomposition 213 8.3.3 MMSE-SQRD 215 8.3.4 Ordered Successive Interference Cancelation (OSIC) 216 8.3.5 Lattice Reduction (LR) 218 8.4 Sphere Decoder 220 8.4.1 Depth-First Tree Search 221 8.4.2 Breadth-First Tree Search 223 8.4.3 Best-First Tree Search 224 8.4.4 Complexity Measurement 227 8.4.5 Design Space Exploration of Sphere Decoder 227 8.5 Soft-Output Sphere Decoder 230 8.5.1 Repeated Tree Search 231 8.5.2 Single Tree Search 232 8.5.3 LLR Clipping 232 8.6 Iterative MIMO Detection 234 8.6.1 List Sphere Decoder 234 8.6.2 Soft-Input Soft-Output Sphere Decoder 235 8.6.3 Iterative SIC-MMSE Detection 237 8.7 Precoding 239 8.7.1 Beam Steering 239 8.7.2 Spatial Decorrelation 241 8.7.3 Limited Feedback 244 8.8 Space Block Code 246 Summary 247 References 248 Part Three: Hardware Design for MIMO-OFDM Receivers 9. Circuit Techniques 253 9.1 Introduction 253 9.2 Fast Fourier Transform Modules 253 9.2.1 FFT Algorithms 254 9.2.2 Architecture 259 9.2.3 Comparison 264 9.3 Delay Buffer 267 9.3.1 SRAM/Register File-Based Delay Buffer 267 9.3.2 Pointer-Based Delay Buffer 268 9.3.3 Gated Clock Strategy 269 9.3.4 Comparison 272 9.4 Circuits for Rectangular-to-Polar Conversion 274 9.4.1 Arctangent Function 274 9.4.2 Magnitude Function 279 9.4.3 Comparison 286 9.5 Circuits for Polar-to-Rectangular Conversion 286 9.5.1 Trigonometric Approximation 287 9.5.2 Polynomial Approximation 288 9.5.3 Comparison 290 Summary 290 References 291 10. MIMO IC Design Examples 293 10.1 Introduction 293 10.2 QR Decomposition IC 294 10.2.1 System Description 294 10.2.2 Algorithm Design 295 10.2.3 Architecture Design 300 10.2.4 Experimental Results 303 10.3 8 × 8 Soft-Output Sphere Decoder 306 10.3.1 Block Description 306 10.3.2 Algorithm Design 306 10.3.3 Architecture Design 307 10.3.4 Experimental Results 316 Summary 318 References 319 11. Mobile MIMO WiMAX System-on-Chip Design 321 11.1 Introduction of WiMAX Standard 321 11.2 Mobile WiMAX OFDMA and Frame Structure 322 11.3 WiMAX Baseband Receiver Design 325 11.3.1 Automatic Gain Control (AGC) 325 11.3.2 Packet Detection (PKD) 326 11.3.3 Symbol Timing Recovery (STR) 328 11.3.4 Carrier Frequency Offset (CFO) Compensation 328 11.3.5 Channel Estimation 330 11.3.6 MIMO Detection 330 11.3.7 Outer Receiver 333 11.4 WiMAX Media Access Control (MAC) Design 333 11.5 Implementation and Field Trial of the WiMAX SoC 336 11.5.1 Laboratory Testing and Performance Evaluation 338 11.5.2 Taiwan High Speed Rail Field Trial 340 Summary 341 References 341 Index 343

Read more less

Book SynopsisThoroughly covering channel characteristics and parameters, this book provides the knowledge needed to design various wireless systems, such as cellular communication systems, RFID, and ad hoc wireless communication systems.Table of ContentsPreface xi List of Acronyms and Symbols xiii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Book Objective 1 1.2 The Historical Context 2 1.3 Book Outline 8 2 Characterization of Propagation Channels 15 2.1 Three Phenomena in Wireless Channels 15 2.2 Path Loss and Shadowing 16 2.3 Multipath Fading 18 2.4 Stochastic Characterization of Multipath Fading 22 2.5 Duality of Multipath Fading 26 2.6 WSSUS Assumption of Multipath Fading 28 2.7 A Review of Propagation Channel Modeling 31 3 Generic Channel Models 41 3.1 Channel Spread Function 43 3.2 Specular-path Model 46 3.3 Dispersive-path Model 51 3.4 Time-evolution Model 54 3.5 Power Spectral Density Model 57 3.6 Model for Keyhole Channel 68 4 Geometry-based Stochastic Channel Modeling 77 4.1 General Modeling Procedure 77 4.2 Regular-shaped Geometry-based Stochastic Models 79 4.3 Irregular-shaped Geometry-based Stochastic Models 83 4.4 Simulation Models 84 4.5 Simulation Models for Non-isotropic Scattering Narrowband SISO V2V Rayleigh Fading Channels 90 5 Channel Measurements 106 5.1 Channel-sounding Equipment/System 107 5.2 Post-processing of Measurement Data 109 5.3 Impact of Phase Noise and Possible Solutions 110 5.4 Directional Radiation Patterns 117 5.5 Switching-mode Selection 124 6 Deterministic Channel-parameter Estimation 145 6.1 Bartlett Beamformer 146 6.2 The MUSIC Algorithm 148 6.3 The ESPRIT and Propagator Methods 150 6.4 Maximum-likelihood Method 152 6.5 The SAGE Algorithm 153 6.6 A Brief Introduction to the RiMAX Algorithm 172 6.7 Evidence-framework-based Algorithms 172 6.8 Extended Kalman-filter-based Tracking Algorithm 178 6.9 Particle-filter-based Tracking Algorithm 188 7 Statistical Channel-parameter Estimation 201 7.1 A Brief Review of Dispersive Parameter Estimators 201 7.2 Dispersive Component Estimation Algorithms 203 7.3 PSD-based Dispersive Component Estimation 218 7.4 Bidirection-delay-Doppler Frequency PSD Estimation 219 8 Measurement-based Statistical Channel Modeling 236 8.1 General Modeling Procedures 237 8.2 Clustering Algorithm based on Specular-path Models 241 8.3 Data Segment-length Selection 245 8.4 Relay and CoMP Channel Modeling 249 9 In Practice: Channel Modeling for Modern Communication Systems 260 9.1 Scenarios for V2V and Cooperative Communications 260 9.2 Channel Characteristics 264 9.3 Scattering Theoretical Channel Models for Conventional Cellular MIMO Systems 265 9.4 Scattering Theoretical Channel Models for V2V Systems 279 9.5 Scattering Theoretical Channel Models for Cooperative MIMO Systems 329 Appendix A 353 Bibliography 378 Index 379

Read more less

Book SynopsisDiscusses the basic physical principles underlying the science and technology of nanophotonics, its materials and structures This volume presents nanophotonic structures and Materials. Nanophotonics is photonic science and technology that utilizes light/matter interactions on the nanoscale where researchers are discovering new phenomena and developing techniques that go well beyond what is possible with conventional photonics and electronics.The topics discussed in this volume are: Cavity Photonics; Cold Atoms and Bose-Einstein Condensates; Displays; E-paper; Graphene; Integrated Photonics; Liquid Crystals; Metamaterials; Micro-and Nanostructure Fabrication; Nanomaterials; Nanotubes; Plasmonics; Quantum Dots; Spintronics; Thin Film Optics Comprehensive and accessible coverage ofthe whole of modern photonics Emphasizes processes and applications that specifically exploit photon attributes of light Deals with the rapidly advancing areaTable of ContentsList of Contributors ix Preface xi 1 Silicon Photonics 1Wim Bogaerts 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Applications 1 1.3 Optical Functions 3 1.4 Silicon Photonics Technology 10 1.5 Conclusion 15 References 15 2 Cavity Photonics 21J.Mørk P. T. Kristensen P. Kaer M. Heuck Y. Yu and N. Gregersen 2.1 Introduction 21 2.2 Cavity Fundamentals 22 2.3 Cavity-Based Switches 26 2.4 Emitters in Cavities 32 2.5 Nanocavity Lasers and LEDs 42 2.6 Summary 46 Acknowledgments 47 References 47 3 Metamaterials: State-of-the Art and Future Directions 53Natalia M. Litchinitser and Vladimir M. Shalaev 3.1 Introduction 53 3.2 Negative-Index Materials 54 3.3 Magnetic Metamaterials 59 3.4 Graded-Index Transition Metamaterials 62 3.5 Transformation Optics 70 3.6 Metasurfaces 75 References 78 4 Quantum Nanoplasmonics 85Mark I. Stockman 4.1 Introduction 85 4.2 Spaser and Nanoplasmonics with Gain 86 4.3 Adiabatic Hot-Electron Nanoscopy 118 Acknowledgments 125 References 125 5 Dielectric Photonic Crystals 133Robert H. Lipson 5.1 Introduction 133 5.2 Fundamentals 134 5.3 Fabrication Methods and Materials 145 5.4 Applications 154 5.5 Conclusions 159 References 159 6 Quantum Dots 169Stanley Tsao and Manijeh Razeghi 6.1 Introduction 169 6.2 Quantum Dots for Infrared Detection 175 6.3 Quantum Dot Growth 179 6.4 Device Fabrication and Measurement Procedures 184 6.5 Gallium Arsenide–Based Quantum Dot Detectors 186 6.6 Indium Phosphide-Based Quantum Dot Detectors 198 6.7 Colloidal Quantum Dots 215 6.8 Conclusion 216 References 217 7 Magnetic Control of Spin in Molecular Photonics 221Eitan Ehrenfreund and Z. Valy Vardeny 7.1 Introduction 221 7.2 A Survey of the Magneto-Electroluminescence in OLEDs 222 7.3 Organic MEL at Small Magnetic Fields; Compass Effect 232 7.4 Magnetic Field Effect on Excited State Spectroscopies in Organic Semiconductor Films 236 7.5 Basic Quantum Mechanical Models Based on Spin-Mixing Manipulation by Magnetic Fields 246 7.6 Summary 254 Acknowledgments 255 References 255 8 Thin-Film Molecular Nanophotonics 261Tetsuzo Yoshimura 8.1 Introduction 261 8.2 Molecular Assembling for Nanoscale Tailored Structures 262 8.3 Molecular Layer Deposition 264 8.4 Organic Multiple Quantum Dots (MQDs) 267 8.5 Self-Organized Lightwave Network 283 8.6 Proposed Applications 292 8.7 Summary 305 References 305 9 Light-Harvesting Materials for Organic Electronics 311Damien Joly Juan Luis Delgado Carmen Atienza and Nazario Martın 9.1 Introduction 311 9.2 Photoinduced Electron Transfer (PET) in Artificial Photosynthetic Systems 313 9.3 Fullerenes for Organic Photovoltaics 323 9.4 Molecular Wires 330 9.5 Conclusions 335 Acknowledgments 335 References 33610 Recent Advances in Metal Oxide-Based Photoelectrochemical Hydrogen Production 343Bob C. Fitzmorris and Jin Z. Zhang 10.1 Introduction 343 10.2 Materials for PEC Hydrogen Production 346 10.3 Conclusion 362 References 363 11 Optical Control of Cold Atoms and Artificial Electromagnetism 371Gediminas Juzeliunas and Patrik Ohberg 11.1 Introduction 371 11.2 Atomic Bose–Einstein Condensates 372 11.3 Optical Forces on Atoms 376 References 393 Index 401

Read more less

Book SynopsisDiscusses the basic physical principles underlying the technology instrumentation of photonics This volume discusses photonics technology and instrumentation. The topics discussed in this volume are: Communication Networks; Data Buffers; Defense and Security Applications; Detectors; Fiber Opticsand Amplifiers; Green Photonics; Instrumentation and Metrology; Interferometers; Light-Harvesting Materials; Logic Devices; Optical Communications; Remote Sensing; Solar Energy; Solid-State Lighting; Wavelength Conversion Comprehensive and accessible coverage of the whole of modern photonics Emphasizes processes and applications that specifically exploit photon attributes of light Deals with the rapidly advancing area of modern optics Chapters are written by top scientists in their field Written for the graduate level student in physical sciences; Industrial and academic researchers in photonics, graduate students iTable of ContentsList of Contributors ix Preface xi 1 Solid-State Lighting: Toward Smart and Ultraefficient Materials, Devices, Lamps, and Systems 1M. H. Crawford, J. J. Wierer, A. J. Fischer, G. T. Wang, D. D. Koleske, G. S. Subramania, M. E. Coltrin, R. F. Karlicek, Jr., and J. Y. Tsao 1.1 A Brief History of SSL, 1 1.2 Beyond the State-of-the-Art: Smart and Ultraefficient SSL, 10 1.3 Ultraefficient SSL Lighting: Toward Multicolor Semiconductor Electroluminescence, 21 1.4 Smart Solid-State Lighting: Toward Control of Flux and Spectra in Time and Space, 42 1.5 Summary and Conclusions, 46 Acknowledgments, 46 References, 47 2 Integrated Optics Using High Contrast Gratings 57Connie Chang-Hasnain and Weijian Yang 2.1 Introduction, 57 2.2 Physics of Near-Wavelength Grating, 58 2.3 Applications of HCGs, 77 2.4 Summary, 98 Acknowledgments, 98 References, 98 3 Plasmonic Crystals: Controlling Light with Periodically Structured Metal Films 107Wayne Dickson, Gregory A. Wurtz and Anatoly V. Zayats 3.1 Introduction, 107 3.2 Surface Plasmon Polaritons, 110 3.3 Basics of Surface Plasmon Polaritonic Crystals, 113 3.4 Polarization and Wavelength Management with Plasmonic Crystals, 120 3.5 Chirped Plasmonic Crystals: Broadband and Broadangle SPP Antennas Based on Plasmonic Crystals, 138 3.6 Active Control of Light with Plasmonic Crystals, 146 3.7 Conclusion, 160 Acknowledgments, 160 References, 160 4 Optical Holography 169Raymond K. Kostuk 4.1 Introduction, 169 4.2 Basic Concepts in Holography, 169 4.3 Hologram Analysis, 172 4.4 Hologram Geometries, 182 4.5 Holographic Recording Materials, 183 4.6 Digital Holography, 188 4.7 Computer Generated Holography, 193 4.8 Holographic Applications, 198 References, 208 5 Cloaking and Transformation Optics 215Martin W. McCall 5.1 Introduction, 215 5.2 Theoretical Underpinning, 217 5.3 The Carpet Cloak, 226 5.4 Conformal Cloaking, 232 5.5 Spacetime Cloaking, 234 5.6 Conclusion and Outlook: Beyond Optics, 243 Appendix 5.A: Technicalities, 244 Appendix 5.B: Vectors and Tensors in Flat Spacetime, 245 Appendix 5.C: Maxwell’s Equations and Constitutive Relations in Covariant Form, 247 References, 251 6 Photonic Data Buffers 253S. J. B. Yoo 6.1 Introduction, 253 6.2 Applications of Photonic Buffers, 254 6.3 Limitations of Electronics, 258 6.4 Photonic Buffer Technologies, 260 6.5 Integration Efforts, 278 6.6 Summary, 278 References, 278 7 Optical Forces, Trapping and Manipulation 287Halina Rubinsztein-Dunlop, Alexander B. Stilgoe, Darryl Preece, Ann Bui, and Timo A. Nieminen 7.1 Introduction, 287 7.2 Theory of Optical Forces, 293 7.3 Theory of Optical Torques, 301 7.4 Measurement of Forces and Torques, 308 7.5 Calculation of Forces and Torques, 318 7.6 Conclusion, 329 References, 329 8 Optofluidics 341Lin Pang, H. Matthew Chen, Lindsay M. Freeman, and Yeshaiahu Fainman 8.1 Introduction, 341 8.2 Photonics with Fluid Manipulation, 342 8.3 Fluidic Sensing, 350 8.4 Fluidic Enabled Imaging, 353 8.5 Fluid Assisted Nanopatterning, 358 8.6 Conclusions and Outlook, 361 Acknowledgments, 362 References, 362 9 Nanoplasmonic Sensing for Nanomaterials Science 369Elin M. Larsson-Langhammer, Svetlana Syrenova, and Christoph Langhammer 9.1 Introduction, 369 9.2 Nanoplasmonic Sensing and Readout, 370 9.3 Inherent Limitations of Nanoplasmonic Sensors, 373 9.4 Direct Nanoplasmonic Sensing, 373 9.5 Indirect Nanoplasmonic Sensing, 374 9.6 Overview on Different Examples, 376 9.7 Discussion and Outlook, 396 References, 397 10 Laser Fabrication and Nanostructuring 403Cemal Esen and Andreas Ostendorf 10.1 Introduction, 403 10.2 Laser Systems for Nanostructuring, 404 10.3 Surface Structuring by Laser Ablation, 409 10.4 Generation of thin Films by Laser Ablation in Vacuum, 416 10.5 Generation of Nanoparticles by Laser Ablation in Liquids, 419 10.6 Laser Induced Volume Structures, 423 10.7 Direct Writing of Polymer Components via Two-Photon Polymerization, 426 10.8 Conclusion, 431 References, 432 11 Free Electron Lasers for Photonics Technology by Wiley 445George R. Neil and Gwyn P. Williams 11.1 Introduction, 445 11.2 Physical Principles, 446 11.3 Worldwide FEL Status, 462 11.4 Applications, 466 11.5 Summary and Conclusion, 471 References, 471 Index 477

Read more less

Book SynopsisDiscusses the basic physical principles underlying Biomedical Photonics, spectroscopy and microscopy This volume discusses biomedical photonics, spectroscopy and microscopy, the basic physical principles underlying the technology andits applications. The topics discussed in this volume are: Biophotonics; Fluorescence and Phosphorescence; Medical Photonics; Microscopy; Nonlinear Optics; Ophthalmic Technology; Optical Tomography; Optofluidics; Photodynamic Therapy; Image Processing; Imaging Systems; Sensors; Single Molecule Detection; Futurology in Photonics. Comprehensive and accessible coverage of the whole of modern photonics Emphasizes processes and applications that specifically exploit photon attributes of light Deals with the rapidly advancing area of modern optics Chapters are written by top scientists in their field Written for the graduate level student in physical sciences; Industrial and academic researchers in pTrade Review"Even though the book was written by a number of authors, they succeeded in making it interesting, clear and up-to-date." (Optics and Photonics 2016)Table of ContentsList of Contributors ix Preface xiii 1 Fluorescence 1 David J. S. Birch, Yu Chen, and Olaf J. Rolinski 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Spectra 2 1.3 Quantum Yield 6 1.4 Lifetime 12 1.5 Quenching 23 1.6 Anisotropy 30 1.7 Microscopy 38 1.8 Conclusions 48 Acknowledgments 48 References 49 2 Single-Molecule Detection and Spectroscopy 59 Michel Orrit 2.1 Introduction 59 2.2 Experimental Setups 62 2.3 Fluorescence Spectroscopy 66 2.4 Fluorescence Correlation Spectroscopy 72 2.5 Fluorescence Excitation Spectroscopy 78 2.6 Other Detection Methods 86 2.7 Conclusion 93 Acknowledgments 94 References 94 3 Resonance Energy Transfer 101 David L. Andrews, David S. Bradshaw, Rayomond Dinshaw, and Gregory D. Scholes 3.1 Introduction 101 3.2 History of RET 102 3.3 The Photophysics of RET 103 3.4 Investigative Applications of RET in Molecular Biology 113 3.5 The Role of RET in Light-Harvesting Complexes 118 Acknowledgments 122 References 122 4 Biophotonics of Photosynthesis 129 Valter Zazubovich and Ryszard Jankowiak 4.1 Introduction 129 4.2 Structure of Pigment–Protein Complexes and Structure–Function Relationships 130 4.3 Key Concepts in Physics of Pigment–Protein Complexes 133 4.4 Experimental Techniques 141 4.5 Examples 145 4.6 Conclusions 156 Acknowledgments 157 References 157 5 Optical Sectioning Microscopy and Biological Imaging 165 John Girkin 5.1 Introduction and Background 165 5.2 Confocal Imaging 168 5.3 Nonlinear Microscopy 172 5.4 Practical Implementation of Nonlinear Microscopy 181 5.5 Recent Advances in Nonlinear Microscopy 184 5.6 Widefield Optical Sectioning by Specialized Illumination Methods 186 5.7 Summary 190 References 191 6 Cell Handling, Sorting, and Viability 197 Darwin Palima, Thomas Aabo, Andrew Bañas, and Jesper Glückstad 6.1 Handling Cells with Light 198 6.2 Optical Sorting 215 6.3 Cell Viability 220 References 230 7 Tissue Polarimetry 239 Alex Vitkin, Nirmalya Ghosh, and Antonello de Martino 7.1 Introduction 239 7.2 Polarized Light Fundamentals 240 7.3 Instrumentation 266 7.4 Forward Modeling and Testing in Phantoms 282 7.5 Applications 297 7.6 Conclusions and Outlook 313 References 314 8 Optical Waveguide Biosensors 323 Daphné Duval and Laura M. Lechuga 8.1 Introduction 323 8.2 Fundamentals of Label-Free Optical Waveguide Biosensing 324 8.3 Surface Biofunctionalization 328 8.4 Evaluation of Optical Biosensors 331 8.5 Integrated Optical Waveguide-Based Biosensors 334 8.6 Optical Fiber-Based Biosensors 349 8.7 Lab-On-A-Chip Integration 354 8.8 Summary 357 References 358 9 Light Propagation in Highly Scattering Turbid Media: Concepts, Techniques, and Biomedical Applications 367 R. R. Alfano, W. B. Wang, L. Wang, and S. K. Gayen 9.1 Introduction 367 9.2 Physics Behind Optical Imaging Through a Highly Scattering Turbid Medium 369 9.3 Study of Ballistic and Diffused Light Components 378 9.4 Photon-Sorting Gates 384 9.5 Transition From Ballistic to Diffuse Imaging in Turbid Media 402 9.6 Conclusion 404 Acknowledgments 404 References 404 10 Photodynamic Therapy 413 Rakkiyappan Chandran, Tyler G. St. Denis, Daniela Vecchio, Pinar Avci, Magesh Sadasivam, and Michael R. Hamblin 10.1 Historical Overview of PDT 413 10.2 Introduction to PDT 415 10.3 Photosensitizer Structure and Photophysical Properties 418 10.4 Light Dosimetry and Photodynamic Therapy Light Sources 422 10.5 Light-Based Strategies to Enhance PDT 423 10.6 PDT Targeting and Nanotechnology 425 10.7 PDT for Dermatology 428 10.8 PDT for Oncology 433 10.9 PDT for Infectious Disease 435 10.10 PDT in Ophthalmology 445 10.11 PDT and The Immune System 446 10.12 Conclusion 449 Acknowledgment 449 References 449 11 Imaging and Probing Cells Beyond the Optical Diffraction Limit 469 Mark Schüttpelz and Thomas Huser 11.1 The Quest for Achieving Optical Resolution Beyond ABBE’S Limit 469 11.2 Stimulated Emission Depletion Microscopy 474 11.3 Photoactivated Localization Microscopy and Stochastic Optical Reconstruction Microscopy 477 11.4 Structured Illumination Microscopy 483 11.5 Super-Resolution Optical Fluctuation Imaging and Other Approaches 491 11.6 Outlook 495 Acknowledgments 496 References 497 12 Technology 503 Ann E. Elsner and Christopher A. Clark 12.1 Basic Ocular Anatomy and Physiology 503 12.2 Measurement Techniques 514 12.3 Anterior Segment Diagnostics, Refractive Measurements, and Treatment 522 12.4 Diagnostic Applications and Treatment of Posterior Segment 529 References 534 Index 543

Read more less

Book SynopsisDescribing an innovative approach to phased-array control in antenna design This book explores in detail phased-array antennas that use coupled-oscillator arrays, an arrangement featuring a remarkably simple beam steering control system and a major reduction in complexity compared with traditional methods of phased-array control. It brings together in one convenient, self-contained volume the many salient research results obtained over the past ten to fifteen years in laboratories around the world, including the California Institute of Technology''s Jet Propulsion Laboratory. The authors examine the underlying theoretical framework of coupled-oscillator systems, clearly explaining the linear and nonlinear formalisms used in the development of coupled-oscillator arrays, while introducing a variety of state-of-the-art methodologies, design solutions, and tools for applying this control scheme. Readers will find: Numerous implementation examples of couTable of ContentsForeword xi Preface xiii Acknowledgments xvii Authors xix PART I: THEORY AND ANALYSIS 1 Chapter 1 Introduction—Oscillators and Synchronization 3 1.1 Early Work in Mathematical Biology and Electronic Circuits 3 1.2 van der Pol's Model 5 1.3 Injection Locking (Adier's Formalism) and Its Spectra (Locked and Unlocked) 7 1.4 Mutual Injection Locking of Two Oscillators 21 1.5 Conclusion 26 Chapter 2 Coupled-Oscillator Arrays-Basic Analytical Description and Operating Principles 27 2.1 Fundamental Equations 28 2.2 Discrete Model Solution (Linearization and Laplace Transformation) 31 2.3 Steady-State Solution 37 2.4 Stability of the Phase Solution in the Full Nonlinear Formulation 41 2.5 External Injection Locking 46 2.6 Generalization to Planar Arrays 50 2.7 Coupling Networks 54 2.8 Conclusion 66 Chapter 3 The Continuum Model for Linear Arrays 67 3.1 The Linear Array without External Injection 68 3.2 The Linear Array with External Injection 81 3.3 Beam-Steering via End Detuning 93 3.4 Beam-Steering via End Injection 95 3.5 Conclusion 102 Chapter 4 The Continuum Model for Planar Arrays 103 4.1 Cartesian Coupling in the Continuum Model without External Injection 103 4.2 Cartesian Coupling in the Continuum Model with External Injection 109 4.3 Non-Cartesian Coupling Topologies 118 4.4 Conclusion 137 Chapter 5 Causality and Coupling Delay 139 5.1 Coupling Delay 139 5.2 The Discrete Model with Coupling Delay 141 5.3 The Continuum Model with Coupling Delay 146 5.4 Beam Steering in the Continuum Model with Coupling Delay 159 5.5 Conclusion 173 PART II: EXPERIMENTAL WORK AND APPLICATIONS 175 Chapter 6 Experimental Validation of the Theory 177 6.1 Linear-Array Experiments 177 6.2 Planar-Array Experiments 188 6.3 Receive-Array Experiments 201 6.4 Phase Noise 210 6.5 The Unlocked State 213 6.6 Conclusion 215 PART III: NONLINEAR BEHAVIOR 217 Chapter 7 Perturbation Models for Stability, Phase Noise, and Modulation 219 7.1 Preliminaries of Dynamical Systems 220 7.2 Bifurcations of Nonlinear Dynamical Systems 226 7.3 The Averaging Method and Multiple Time Scales 230 7.4 Averaging Theory in Coupled Oscillator Systems 231 7.5 Obtaining the Parameters of the van der Pol Oscillator Model 235 7.6 An Alternative Perturbation Model for Coupled-Oscillator Systems 238 7.7 Matrix Equations for the Steady State and Stability Analysis 242 7.8 A Comparison between the Two Perturbation Models for Coupled Oscillator Systems 246 7.9 Externally Injection-Locked COAs 247 7.10 Phase Noise 250 7.11 Modulation 256 7.12 Coupled Phase-Locked Loops 258 7.13 Conclusion 261 Chapter 8 Numerical Methods for Simulating Coupled-Oscillator Arrays 263 8.1 Introduction to Numerical Methods 264 8.2 Obtaining Periodic Steady-State Solutions of Autonomous Circuits in Harmonic-Balance Simulators 270 8.3 Numerical Analysis of a Voltage-Controlled Oscillator 272 8.4 Numerical Analysis of a Five-Element Linear Coupled-Oscillator Array 278 8.5 Numerical Analysis of an Externally Injection-Locked Five-Element Linear Coupled-Oscillator Array 286 8.6 Harmonic Radiation for Extended Scanning Range 288 8.7 Numerical Analysis of a Self-Oscillating Mixer 291 8.8 Conclusion 296 Chapter 9 Beamforming in Coupled-Oscillator Arrays 297 9.1 Preliminary Concepts of Convex Optimization 297 9.2 Beamforming in COAs 301 9.3 Stability Optimization of the Coupled-Oscillator Steady-State Solution 308 9.4 Multi-Beam Pattern Generation Using Coupled-Oscillator Arrays 311 9.5 Control of the Amplitude Dynamics 315 9.6 Adaptive Coupled-Oscillator Array Beamformer 317 9.7 Conclusion 320 Chapter 10 Overall Conclusions and Possible Future Directions 321 REFERENCES 325 ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS 341 INDEX 345

Read more less

Book SynopsisA unique, practical approach to the design of high-speed digital circuit boards The demand for ever-faster digital circuit designs is beginning to render the circuit theory used by engineers ineffective. Digital Circuit Boards presents an alternative to the circuit theory approach, emphasizing energy flow rather than just signal interconnection to explain logic circuit behavior. The book shows how treating design in terms of transmission lines will ensure that the logic will function, addressing both storage and movement of electrical energy on these lines. It covers transmission lines in all forms to illustrate how trace geometry defines where the signals can travel, then goes on to examine transmission lines as energy sources, the true nature of decoupling, types of resonances, ground bounce, cross talk, and more. Providing designers with the tools they need to lay out digital circuit boards for fast logic and to get designs working the first timTable of ContentsPreface xi 1 BASICS 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Why the Field Approach is Important 3 1.3 The Role of Circuit Analysis 4 1.4 Getting Started 5 1.5 Voltage and the Electric Field 6 1.6 Current 7 1.7 Capacitance 8 1.8 Mutual and Self-Capacitance 10 1.9 E Fields Inside Conductors 11 1.10 The D Field 12 1.11 Energy Storage in a Capacitor 12 1.12 The Energy Stored in an Electric Field 13 1.13 The Magnetic Field 13 1.14 Rise Time/Fall Time 15 1.15 Moving Energy into Components 15 1.16 Faraday's Law 16 1.17 Self- and Mutual Inductance 16 1.18 Poynting’s Vector 17 1.19 Fields at DC 18 2 TRANSMISSION LINES 22 2.1 Introduction 22 2.2 Some Common Assumptions 24 2.3 Transmission Line Types 25 2.4 Characteristic Impedance 27 2.5 Wave Velocity 29 2.6 Step Waves on a Properly Terminated Line 30 2.7 The Open Circuited Transmission Line 31 2.8 The Short Circuited Transmission Line 33 2.9 Waves that Transition between Lines with Different Characteristic Impedances 35 2.10 Nonlinear Terminations 38 2.11 Discharging a Charged Open Transmission Line 38 2.12 Ground/Power Planes 40 2.13 The Ground and Power Planes as a Tapered Transmission Line 41 2.14 Pulling Energy from a Tapered Transmission Line (TTL) 43 2.15 The Energy Flow Through Cascaded (Series) Transmission Lines 45 2.16 An Analysis of Cascaded Transmission Lines 48 2.17 Series (Source) Terminating a Transmission Line 49 2.18 Parallel (Shunt) Terminations 50 2.19 Stubs 52 2.20 Decoupling Capacitor as a Stub 54 2.21 Transmission Line Networks 54 2.22 The Network Program 55 2.23 Measuring Characteristic Impedance 56 3 RADIATION AND INTERFERENCE COUPLING 61 3.1 Introduction 61 3.2 The Nature of Fields in Logic Structures 62 3.3 Classical Radiation 62 3.4 Radiation from Step Function Waves 63 3.5 Common Mode and Normal Mode 66 3.6 The Radiation Pattern along a Transmission Line 70 3.7 Notes on Radiation 70 3.8 The Cross Coupling Process (Cross Talk) 71 3.9 Magnetic Component of Cross Coupling 72 3.10 Capacitive Component of Cross Coupling 74 3.11 Cross Coupling Continued 75 3.12 Cross Coupling between Parallel Transmission Lines of Equal Length 76 3.13 Radiation from Board Edges 78 3.14 Ground Bounce 79 3.15 Susceptibility 80 4 ENERGY MANAGEMENT 82 4.1 Introduction 82 4.2 The Power Time Constant 84 4.3 Capacitors 86 4.4 The Four-Terminal Capacitor or DTL 87 4.5 Types of DTLs 89 4.6 Circuit Board Resonances 90 4.7 Decoupling Capacitors 90 4.8 The Board Decoupling Problem 92 4.9 The IC Decoupling Problem 93 4.10 Comments on Energy Management 94 4.11 Skin Effect 95 4.12 Dielectric Losses 97 4.13 Split Ground/Power Planes 97 4.14 The Analog/digital Interface Problem 98 4.15 Power Dissipation 99 4.16 Traces through Conducting Planes 100 4.17 Trace Geometries that Reduce Termination Resistor Counts 101 4.18 The Control of Connecting Spaces 101 4.19 Another way to look at Energy Flow in Transmission Lines 103 5 SIGNAL INTEGRITY ENGINEERING 106 5.1 Introduction 106 5.2 The Envelope of Permitted Logic Levels 107 5.3 Net Lists 108 5.4 Noise Budgets 108 5.5 Logic Level Variation 109 5.6 Logic and Voltage Drops 110 5.7 Measuring the Performance of a Net 111 5.8 The Decoupling Capacitor 112 5.9 Cross Coupling Problems 114 5.10 Characteristic Impedance and the Error Budget 114 5.11 Resistor Networks 116 5.12 Ferrite Beads 117 5.13 Grounding in Facilities: A Brief Review 118 5.14 Grounding as Applied to Electronic Hardware 120 5.15 Internal Grounding of a Digital Circuit Board 123 5.16 Power Line Interference 124 5.17 Electrostatic Discharge 125 6 CIRCUIT BOARDS 130 6.1 Introduction 130 6.2 More about Characteristic Impedance 131 6.3 Microstrip 133 6.4 Centered Stripline 135 6.5 Embedded Microstrip 136 6.6 Asymmetric Stripline 137 6.7 Two-Layer Boards 140 6.8 Four-Layer Circuit Board 143 6.9 Six-Layer Boards 145 Glossary 147 Abbreviations and Acronyms 149 Bibliography 157 Index 159

Read more less

Book SynopsisProvides a comprehensive picture of today's energy world, describes the potential for energy savings that can be achieved, and analyzes the technology developments which will lead to a 100% renewable energy-powered world The world is at the crossroads of either quickly changing the energy picture towards implementing efficient renewable energy sources or postponing this process by another generation. Based on the author's more than 30 years' industrial experience, this book gives a set of assumptions by extrapolating known technology developments and shows that 100% coverage by renewable technology of global energy needs is much more probable than previously argued. Basic facts using rule of thumb and order-of-magnitude considerations underpin the author's argument. The book shows how energy efficiency technologies will be able to drastically reduce the energy consumption for the same quality of life. The most relevant renewable energy technologies are discussedTable of ContentsForeword xiii Preface xvii Acknowledgements xxiii List of Abbreviations xxv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 The Changing World 1 1.2 Why Another Book on 100% Renewables? 3 2 Analysis of Today’s Energy Situation 7 2.1 Basic Energy Terms 7 2.2 Global Energy Situation 11 2.3 Energy Sectors 13 2.4 Challenges for Fossil Fuels 16 2.5 Problems with Nuclear Energy 29 3 The Importance of Energy Efficiency Measures 33 3.1 Traditional Extrapolation of Future Energy Demands or Alternatively “The Same or with Renewables Even Better Quality of Life with Much Less Energy” 33 3.2 Decrease in End Energy Needs with a “Better Quality of Life” 35 3.3 Today’s Energy Needs with Known Energy Efficiency Measures 41 3.4 Support Mechanisms to Facilitate New Products: Ban The Old or Facilitate The New Ones 42 4 Overview of the Most Important Renewable Energy Technologies 45 4.1 Basics About the Potential of Various Renewable Technologies 45 4.2 Wind Energy 48 4.3 Solar Thermal Collectors and Concentrators 57 4.4 Bioenergy: Biomass and Fuel 66 4.5 Photovoltaics 68 4.6 Other Renewable Technologies 70 5 PV Market Development 77 5.1 Strategic and Consumer Goods in Society and Why Strategic Ones Need Initial Support 77 5.2 PV Applications and History 84 5.3 Historical PV Market Development 88 5.4 Feed-in Tariffs - Sustainable Versus Boom and Bust Market Growth 93 5.5 PV Market Development Towards 2020 101 5.6 Total Budget for Feed-in Tariff Support as Positive Investment for National Economies and Merit Order Effects for Electricity Customers 106 5.7 New Electricity Market Design for Increasing Numbers of Variable Renewable Energy Systems 110 5.8 Developments for the Future Energy Infrastructure 111 6 PV Value Chain and Technology 117 6.1 Basics of Solar Radiation and Conversion in PV Cells 117 6.2 Value Chain for Crystalline Silicon PV Systems 122 6.3 Value Chain for Thin-Film Technologies 134 6.4 Concentrated PV (CPV) and III?V Compound Solar Cells 137 6.5 New Technologies (Dye, OPV, and Novel Concepts) 138 6.6 Other Cost Components for PV Systems 141 6.7 Marimekko Plot for PV Systems and Summary Chart for Cell Efficiencies 142 7 The Astonishing Predictive Power of Price Experience Curves 147 7.1 Basics about Price Experience Curves 147 7.2 Relevant Price Experience Curves Comparable to PV 148 7.3 Lesson Learned from PECs Discussed 151 7.4 Price Experience Curve for PV Modules 152 7.5 Price Experience Curve for DC/AC inverters 159 7.6 Price Experience Curve for Wind Energy and Other Relevant Products for a 100% Renewable World 161 8 Future Technology Development 163 8.1 General Remarks on Future Technology Developments 163 8.2 Photovoltaics 164 8.3 Wind Energy 170 8.4 Solar Thermal 171 8.5 Other Renewables 171 8.6 Other System Components 171 8.7 Importance of the Renewable Energy Portfolio - in Particular Solar and Wind 175 9 Future Energy Projections - The 150 Peta-Watt-hour Challenge 179 9.1 Historical Development 179 9.2 Some Future Projections and Scenarios by Others 180 9.3 Global Energy Scenarios and Market Development of the Major Renewables from the Author’s Point of View 186 10 Likelihood of and Timeline for a World Powered by 100% Renewable Energy 203 10.1 Likelihood of a 100% Renewable World 203 10.2 Global Network or Local Autonomy? 205 10.3 Timeline for a 100% Renewable World 209 11 Conclusion: The 100% Renewable Energy Puzzle 213 References 219 Index 225

Read more less

Book SynopsisShows readers how to gain the competitive edge in the integrated circuit marketplace This book offers a wholly unique perspective on the digital design kit. It points to hidden value in the safety margins of standard-cell libraries and shows design engineers and managers how to use this knowledge to beat the competition. Engineering the CMOS Library reveals step by step how the generic, foundry-provided standard-cell library is built, and how to extract value from existing std-cells and EDA tools in order to produce tighter-margined, smaller, faster, less power-hungry, and more yield-producing integrated circuits. It explores all aspects of the digital design kit, including the different views of CMOS std-cell libraries along with coverage of IO libraries, memory compilers, and small analog blocks. Readers will learn: How to work with overdesigned std-cell libraries to improve profitability while maintaining safety How functionTable of ContentsPREFACE xi ACKNOWLEDGMENTS xiii 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1.1 Adding Project-Specific Functions, Drive Strengths, Views, and Corners 4 1.2 What Is a DDK? 5 2 STDCELL LIBRARIES 9 2.1 Lesson from the Real World: Manager's Perspective and Engineer's Perspective 9 2.2 What Is a Stdcell? 11 2.3 Extended Library Offerings 32 2.4 Boutique Library Offerings 36 2.5 Concepts for Further Study 37 3 IO LIBRARIES 39 3.1 Lesson from the Real World: The Manager's Perspective and the Engineer's Perspective 39 3.2 Extension Capable Architectures versus Function Complete Architectures 40 3.3 Electrostatic Discharge Considerations 43 3.4 Concepts for Further Study 50 4 MEMORY COMPILERS 52 4.1 Lesson from the Real World: The Manager's Perspective and the Engineer's Perspective 52 4.2 Single Ports, Dual Ports, and ROM: The Compiler 55 4.3 Nonvolatile Memories: The Block 58 4.4 Special-Purpose Memories: The Custom 60 4.5 Concepts for Further Study 62 5 OTHER FUNCTIONS 63 5.1 Lesson from the Real World: The Manager's Perspective and the Engineer's Perspective 63 5.2 Phase-Locked Loops, Power-On Resets, and Other Small-Scale Integration Analogs 66 5.3 Low-Power Support Structures 69 5.4 Stitching Structures 71 5.5 Hard, Firm, and Soft Boxes 75 5.6 Concepts for Further Study 78 6 PHYSICAL VIEWS 80 6.1 Lesson from the Real World: The Manager's Perspective and the Engineer's Perspective 80 6.2 Picking an Architecture 82 6.3 Measuring Density 86 6.4 The Need and the Way to Work with Fabrication Houses 89 6.5 Concepts for Further Study 92 7 SPICE 95 7.1 Lesson from the Real World: The Manager's Perspective and the Engineer's Perspective 95 7.2 Why a Tool More Than 40 Years Old Is Still Useful 99 7.3 Accuracy, Reality, and Why SPICE Results Must be Viewed with a Wary Eye 102 7.4 Sufficient Parasitics 106 7.5 Concepts for Further Study 107 8 TIMING VIEWS 109 8.1 Lesson from the Real World: The Manager's Perspective and the Engineer's Perspective 109 8.2 Performance Limits and Measurement 110 8.3 Default Versus Conditional Arcs 110 8.4 Break-Point Optimization 112 8.5 A Word on Setup and Hold 115 8.6 Failure Mechanisms and Roll-Off 122 8.7 Supporting Efficient Synthesis 124 8.8 Supporting Efficient Timing Closure 131 8.9 Design Corner Specific Timing Views 134 8.10 Nonlinear Timing Views are so "Old Hat" . . . 140 8.11 Concepts for Further Study 142 9 POWER VIEWS 145 9.1 Lesson from the Real World: The Manager's Perspective and the Engineer's Perspective 145 9.2 Timing Arcs Versus Power Arcs 147 9.3 Static Power 148 9.4 Real Versus Measured Dynamic Power 150 9.5 Should Power Be Built as a Monotonic Array? 153 9.6 Best-Case and Worst-case Power Views Versus Best-Case and Worst-Case Timing Views 155 9.7 Efficiently Measuring Power 156 9.8 Concepts for Further Study 158 10 NOISE VIEWS 160 10.1 Lesson from the Real World: The Manager's Perspective and the Engineer's Perspective 160 10.2 Noise Arcs Versus Timing and Power Arcs 162 10.3 The Easy Part 165 10.4 The Not-So-Easy Part 166 10.5 Concepts for Further Study 168 11 LOGICAL VIEWS 170 11.1 Lesson from the Real World: The Manager's Perspective and the Engineer's Perspective 170 11.2 Consistency Across Simulators 171 11.2.1 Efficient Testing 175 11.3 Consistency with Timing, Power & Noise Views 177 11.4 Concepts for Further Study 180 12 TEST VIEWS 181 12.1 Lesson from the Real World: The Manager's Perspective and the Engineer's Perspective 181 12.2 Supporting Reachability 184 12.3 Supporting Observability 189 12.4 Concepts for Further Study 191 13 CONSISTENCY 193 13.1 Lesson from the Real World: The Manager's Perspective and the Engineer's Perspective 193 13.2 Validating Views across a Library 195 13.3 Validating Stdcells Across a Technology Node 199 13.4 Validating Libraries Across Multiple Technology Nodes 204 13.5 Concepts for Further Study 208 14 DESIGN FOR MANUFACTURABILITY 209 14.1 Lesson from the Real World: The Manager's Perspective and the Engineer's Perspective 209 14.2 What is DFM? 211 14.3 Concepts for Further Study 224 15 VALIDATION 226 15.1 Lesson from the Real World: The Manager's Perspective and the Engineer's Perspective 226 15.2 Quality Levels 229 15.3 Concepts for Further Study 236 16 PLAYING WITH THE PHYSICAL DESIGN KIT: USUALLY "AT YOUR OWN RISK" 237 16.1 Lesson from the Real World: The Manager's Perspective and the Engineer's Perspective 237 16.2 Manipulating Models 240 16.3 Added Unsupported Devices 243 16.4 Concepts for Further Study 245 17 TAGGING AND REVISIONING 247 17.1 Lesson from the Real World: The Manager's Perspective and the Engineer's Perspective 247 17.2 Tagging and Time Stamps 248 17.3 Metadata, Directory Structures, and Pointers 254 17.4 Concepts for Further Study 258 18 RELEASING AND SUPPORTING 260 18.1 Lesson from the Real World: The Manager's Perspective and the Engineer's Perspective 260 18.2 When Is Test Silicon Needed for Verification? 263 18.3 Sending the Baby Out the Door 265 18.4 Multiple Quality Levels on the Same Design 269 18.5 Supporting "Bug Fixes" 271 18.6 Concepts for Further Study 274 19 OTHER TOPICS 276 19.1 Lesson from the Real World: The Manager's Perspective and the Engineer's Perspective 276 19.2 Supporting High-Speed Design 279 19.3 Supporting Low-Power Design 283 19.4 Supporting Third-Party Libraries 286 19.5 Supporting Black Box Third-Party IP (Intellectual Property) Design 289 19.6 Supporting Multiple Library Design 292 19.7 Concepts for Further Study 293 20 COMMUNICATIONS 295 20.1 Manager's Perspective 295 20.2 Customer's Perspective 298 20.3 Vendor's Perspective 300 20.4 Engineer's Perspective 301 20.5 Concepts for Further Study 302 20.6 Conclusions 302 APPENDIX I MINIMUM LIBRARY SYNTHESIS VERSUS FULL-LIBRARY SYNTHESIS OF A FOUR-BIT FLASH ADDER 305 APPENDIX II PERTINENT CMOS BSIM SPICE PARAMETERS WITH UNITS AND DEFAULT LEVELS 311 APPENDIX III DEFINITION OF TERMS 313 APPENDIX IV ONE POSSIBLE MEANS OF FORMALIZED MONTHLY REPORTING 317 INDEX 319

Read more less

Book SynopsisVarious systems science and engineering disciplines are covered and challenging new research issues in these disciplines are revealed. They will be extremely valuable for the readers to search for some new research directions and problems.Table of ContentsContributors xxiii Preface xxix I Systems Science are Engineering Methodologies 1 1 A Systems Framework For Sustainability 3Ali G. Hessami, Feng Hsu, are Hamid Jahankhani 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 A Unified Systems Sustainability Concept 5 1.3 Sustainability Assurance: the Framework 6 1.3.1 Weighted Factors Analysis 6 1.3.2 the Framework 7 1.3.3 the Macro Concept of a Sustainable Architecture (G4.1) 10 1.3.4 the Micro Concept of a Sustainable System 11 1.3.5 A Top-Down Hierarchy of a Multi-Level Sustainability Concept 12 1.4 Technological Sustainability Case Study—Information Systems Security 13 1.4.1 Network Security as a Business Issue 14 1.4.2 the Focus of Investment on Network Security 15 1.5 Conclusions 17 References 18 2 System of Systems Thinking In Policy Development: Challenges are Opportunities 21Keith W. Hipel, Liping Fang, are Michele Bristow 2.1 Introduction 21 2.1.1 A World in Crisis 21 2.1.2 System of Systems 23 2.2 Value Systems are Ethics 26 2.2.1 Conflicting Value Systems 27 2.2.2 Modeling Value Systems 28 2.3 Complex Adaptive Systems 32 2.3.1 Emergent Behavior 32 2.3.2 Modeling Complex Systems 34 2.4 Risk, Uncertainty, are Unpredictability 37 2.4.1 Risk Management 37 2.4.2 Modeling Risk are Adaptation Processes 40 2.5 System of Systems Modeling are Policy Development 42 2.5.1 Global Food System Model 43 2.5.2 Policy Implications 51 2.6 Conclusions 58 References 59 3 Systemic Yoyos: An Intuition are Playground For General Systems Research 71Yi Lin, Yi Dongyun, are Zaiwu Gong 3.1 Introduction 71 3.1.1 the Concept of General Systems 72 3.1.2 A Look at the Success of Calculus-Based Theories 75 3.1.3 Whole Evolution are Yoyo Fields 78 3.2 Theoretical are Empirical Justifications 81 3.2.1 Transitional Changes in Whole Evolutions 81 3.2.2 Quantitative Infinity are Equal Quantitative Effects 83 3.2.3 Fluid Circulation, Informational Infrastructure, are Human Communications 86 3.3 Elementary Properties of Yoyo Fields 91 3.3.1 Eddy are Meridian Fields 91 3.3.2 Interactions Between Systemic Yoyos 94 3.3.3 Laws on State of Motion 98 3.4 Applications in Social Sciences 102 3.4.1 Systemic Structures of Civilizations 102 3.4.2 Systemic Structures Beneath Business Organizations 108 3.4.3 Systemic Structure in Human Mind 109 3.5 Applications in Economics 113 3.5.1 Becker’s Rotten Kid Theorem 113 3.5.2 Interindustry Wage Differentials 117 3.5.3 Price Behaviors of Projects 122 3.6 Applications in the Foundations of Mathematics 127 3.6.1 Historical Crises in the Foundations of Mathematics 128 3.6.2 Actual are Potential Infinities 131 3.6.3 Vase Puzzle are the Fourth Crisis 132 3.7 Applications in Extreme Weather Forecast 137 3.7.1 V-3𝜃 Graphs: A Structural Prediction Method 137 3.7.2 Digitization of Irregular Information 140 3.8 Conclusions 143 References 146 4 Grey System: Thinking, Methods, are Models With Applications 153Sifeng Liu, Jeffrey Y.L. Forrest, are Yingjie Yang 4.1 Introduction 153 4.1.1 Inception are Growth of Grey System Theory 153 4.1.2 Basics of Grey System 155 4.2 Sequence Operators 157 4.2.1 Buffer Operators 158 4.2.2 Generation of Grey Sequences 160 4.2.3 Exponentiality of Accumulating Generations 162 4.3 Grey Incidence Analysis 163 4.3.1 Grey Incidence Factors are Set of Grey Incidence Operators 163 4.3.2 Degrees of Grey Incidences 164 4.3.3 General Grey Incidence Models 165 4.3.4 Grey Incidence Models Based on Similarity and Nearness 167 4.4 Grey Cluster Evaluation Models 168 4.4.1 Grey Incidence Clustering 169 4.4.2 Grey Variable Weight Clustering 169 4.4.3 Grey Fixed Weight Clustering 171 4.4.4 Grey Evaluation Using Triangular Whitenization Functions 172 4.4.5 Practical Applications 175 4.5 Grey Prediction Models 176 4.5.1 GM(1,1) Model 176 4.5.2 Improvements on GM(1,1) Models 177 4.5.3 Applicable Ranges of GM(1,1) Models 180 4.5.4 Discrete Grey Models 180 4.5.5 GM(r,h) Models 182 4.5.6 Grey System Predictions 188 4.6 Grey Models for Decision-Making 193 4.6.1 Grey Target Decisions 193 4.6.2 Multi-Attribute Intelligent Grey Target Decision Models 201 4.7 Practical Applications 202 4.7.1 To Analyze the Time Difference of Economic Indices 202 4.7.2 the Evaluation of Science are Technology Park 206 4.7.3 To Select the Supplier of Key Components of Large Commercial Aircrafts 209 4.8 Introduction to the Software of Grey System Modeling 211 4.8.1 Features are Functions 211 4.8.2 Operation Guide 213 Acknowledgments 220 References 222 5 Building Resilience: Naval Expeditionary Command are Control 225Christopher Nemeth, Thomas Miller, Michael Polidoro, and C. Matthew O’Connor 5.1 Introduction 225 5.2 Expeditionary Operations Command are Control 226 5.2.1 Systems Acquisition 227 5.3 Human-Centered System Development 228 5.3.1 Envisioned World Problem 229 5.3.2 Cognitive Systems Engineering 229 5.3.3 Application: Navy Expeditionary Combat Command 230 5.3.4 Reasonable Scientific Criteria 231 5.4 Discussion 232 5.4.1 Resilience Engineering 232 5.4.2 the Data Hub 234 5.4.3 Implementation Challenges 234 5.4.4 Limitations 234 5.5 Future Work 236 5.5.1 Human Performance Research 236 5.5.2 Transition from Qualitative Research to Design 236 5.5.3 Resilience Engineering 236 5.6 Conclusions 237 Acknowledgments 237 References 237 II Learning are Control 241 6 Advances are Challenges On Intelligent Learning In Control Systems 243Ching-Chih Tsai, Kao-Shing Hwang, Alan Liu, are Chia-Feng Juang 6.1 Introduction 243 6.2 Reinforcement Learning 245 6.2.1 Reinforcement Learning 245 6.2.2 Q-Learning Algorithm 247 6.2.3 Reinforcement Learning in Robots 249 6.2.4 Soccer Robot Behaviors 250 6.2.5 Concluding Remarks 251 6.3 Bio-Inspired Evolutionary Learning Control 252 6.3.1 Bio-Inspired Evolutionary Learning Control 252 6.3.2 Bio-Inspired Evolutionary Robots 253 6.4 Intelligent Learning Control Using Fuzzy Neural Networks 254 6.4.1 Introduction 254 6.4.2 Intelligent Learning Control Using FNNs 255 6.5 Case-Based Reasoning are Learning 257 6.5.1 Case-Based Reasoning Process 257 6.5.2 Case Design are Reuse 257 6.5.3 Hybrid Learning Method Architectures in CBR 258 6.5.4 Applications in Human–Robot Interaction 259 6.6 Conclusions 260 References 261 7 Adaptive Classifiers For Nonstationary Environments 265Cesare Alippi, Giacomo Boracchi, Manuel Roveri, Gregory Ditzler, and Robi Polikar 7.1 Introduction 265 7.2 Definition of the Problem 266 7.3 Learning Concept Drifts 268 7.4 Change Detection 272 7.4.1 Change-Detection Tests: A Review 273 7.4.2 Change-Detection Tests in Adaptive Classifiers 276 7.5 Assessing the Performance: Figures of Merit 278 7.5.1 Raw Classification Accuracy 279 7.5.2 Confusion Matrix 279 7.5.3 Geometric Mean 280 7.5.4 Precision are Recall 280 7.5.5 F-measure 281 7.5.6 Receiver Operator Characteristic Curve are Area Under the Curve 281 7.6 Conclusions 282 References 283 8 Modeling, Analysis, Scheduling, are Control of Cluster Tools In Semiconductor Fabrication 289Nai Qi Wu, Mengchu Zhou, Feng Chu, are Sa¨ıd Mammar 8.1 Introduction 289 8.2 Cluster Tools are Their Operations 290 8.2.1 Architecture of Cluster Tools 290 8.2.2 Wafer Flow Patterns 291 8.2.3 Operation Requirements 294 8.3 Modeling are Performance Evaluation 295 8.3.1 Analysis Based on Timing Diagram Model 295 8.3.2 Analysis Based on Marked Graph 296 8.3.3 Analysis Based on Resource-Oriented Petri Nets 299 8.3.4 Discussion 302 8.4 Single Cluster Tool Scheduling 302 8.4.1 Scheduling with Wafer Residency Time Constraints 302 8.4.2 Scheduling with Both Wafer Residency Constraints and Activity Time Variation 305 8.4.3 Scheduling with Wafer Revisiting 306 8.4.4 Schedule Implementation 307 8.4.5 Discussion 307 8.5 Scheduling of Multi-cluster Tools 308 8.5.1 Deadlock Control are Scheduling of Track Systems 308 8.5.2 Schedule Optimization 309 8.5.3 Discussion 311 8.6 Conclusions 311 References 311 9 Design, Simulation, are Dynamic Control Of Large-Scale Manufacturing Process With Different Forms of Uncertainties 317Hyunsoo Lee are Amarnath Banerjee 9.1 Introduction 317 9.1.1 Issues in Design of Large-Scale Manufacturing Processes 318 9.1.2 Simulation Model for Dynamic Control 320 9.2 Background are Literature Review 322 9.3 Different Types of Uncertainties are FCPN-std 327 9.3.1 Definition of FCPN-std 327 9.3.2 Modular Design are Five-Stage Modeling Methodology 329 9.3.3 Simulation Using FCPN-std 332 9.4 Design of Large-Scale Manufacturing Processes 333 9.5 Dynamic Control of Manufacturing Processes 335 9.6 Conclusions 339 References 340 10 Model Identification are Synthesis of Discrete-Event Systems 343Maria Paola Cabasino, Philippe Darondeau, Maria Pia Fanti, and Carla Seatzu 10.1 Introduction 343 10.2 Background on Finite State Automata are Petri Nets 344 10.2.1 Finite State Automata 344 10.2.2 Petri Nets 346 10.3 Identification are Synthesis of Languages are Finite State Automata 347 10.4 Identification are Synthesis of Petri Nets 349 10.4.1 Synthesis from Graphs 350 10.4.2 Identification are Synthesis from Finite Languages Over T 352 10.4.3 Identification are Synthesis from Finite Languages Over E 355 10.4.4 Related Problems in the PN Framework 360 10.5 Process Mining are Workflow Problems 361 10.6 Conclusions 363 References 363 III Human–Machine Systems Design 367 11 Advances are Challenges In Intelligent Adaptive Interface Design 369Ming Hou, Haibin Zhu, Mengchu Zhou, are Robert Arrabito 11.1 Introduction 369 11.2 Evolution of Interface Technologies are IAI Concept 372 11.2.1 Evolution of Interface Technologies 373 11.2.2 A Conceptual Framework of IAI Systems 377 11.3 Challenges of IAI Design, Alternative Solutions, are Empirical Investigations 381 11.3.1 Challenges of IAI Design 381 11.3.2 User-Centered Design Approach 382 11.3.3 Agent-Based Interface Design Approaches 383 11.3.4 Analytical Methodologies 385 11.3.5 Empirical Investigations 387 11.4 Multiagent-Based Design are Operator–Agent Interaction 389 11.4.1 AIA Concept 389 11.4.2 Operator–Agent Interaction Model 391 11.4.3 Difference Between Human–Human Interaction, Human–Machine Interaction, are Operator–Agent Interaction 393 11.4.4 Optimization of Operator–Agent Interaction 396 11.5 A Generic IAI System Architecture are AIA Components 397 11.5.1 Generic IAI System Architecture 397 11.5.2 AIA Structure 402 11.5.3 Adaptation Processes 403 11.6 An IAI are AIA Design: Case Study 405 11.6.1 Interface Design Requirements for the Control of Multiple UAVs 406 11.6.2 Issues 407 11.6.3 How the IAI Design Method Was Used 407 11.6.4 Task Network Modeling are Simulation 409 11.6.5 AIA Implementation 411 11.6.6 Human-in-the-Loop Experimentation 413 11.6.7 AIA Evaluation 413 11.6.8 Discussions are Implications 413 11.7 Conclusions 415 Acknowledgments 417 References 417 12 A Complex Adaptive System of Systems Approach to Human–Automation Interaction In Smart Grid 425Alireza Fereidunian, Hamid Lesani, Mohammad Ali Zamani, Mohamad Amin Sharifi Kolarijani, Negar Hassanpour, are Sina Sharif Mansouri 12.1 Introduction 425 12.2 Complexity in Systems Science are Engineering 426 12.2.1 the Nature of Complexity 426 12.2.2 Complex Systems 429 12.2.3 Complexity Measures 431 12.2.4 Complexity-Related Terms in Literature 433 12.3 Complex Adaptive Systems 436 12.3.1 What are Complex Adaptive Systems? 436 12.3.2 Characteristics of Complex Adaptive Systems 437 12.4 System of Systems 442 12.4.1 Necessity are Definition 442 12.4.2 Characteristics of System of Systems 444 12.4.3 System of Systems Types 448 12.4.4 A Taxonomy of Systems Family 448 12.5 Complex Adaptive System of Systems 453 12.6 Human–Automation Interaction 454 12.6.1 Automation 454 12.6.2 HAI: Where Humans Interact with Automation 455 12.6.3 HAI are Function Allocation 456 12.6.4 Evolution of HAI Models: Dimensions 457 12.6.5 Evolution of HAI Models: Dynamism 458 12.6.6 Adaptive Autonomy Implementation 460 12.7 HAI in Smart Grid as a Casos 462 12.7.1 Smart Grid 462 12.7.2 HAI in Smart Grid as a CAS 465 12.7.3 HAI in Smart Grid as an SoS 467 12.8 Petri Nets for Complex Systems Modeling 467 12.8.1 Definition 468 12.8.2 Graph Representation of Petri Nets 468 12.8.3 Transition Firing 469 12.8.4 Reachability 470 12.8.5 Incidence Matrix are State Equation 470 12.8.6 Inhibitor Arc 470 12.8.7 IF–THEN Rules by Petri Net 470 12.9 Model-Based Implementation of Adaptive Autonomy 471 12.9.1 the Implementation Framework 471 12.9.2 Case Study: Adaptive Autonomy in Smart Grid 472 12.10 Adaptive Autonomy Realization Using Petri Nets 473 12.10.1 Implementation Methodology 473 12.10.2 Realization of AAHPNES 475 12.10.3 Results are Discussions 482 12.11 Conclusions 483 Acknowledgments 485 References 485 13 Virtual Training For Procedural Skills Development: Case Studies are Lessons Learnt 501Dawei Jia, Asim Bhatti, are Saeid Nahavandi 13.1 Introduction 501 13.2 Related Work 502 13.2.1 Background 502 13.2.2 Human Side of VT System Efficacy—Issues and Concerns 503 13.3 Present Study 505 13.3.1 Motivation are Aims 505 13.3.2 System Architecture are Human–Machine Interface 506 13.3.3 Measures 508 13.4 Case Study 1 509 13.4.1 Method 509 13.4.2 Results 511 13.4.3 Discussion 515 13.5 Case Study 2 516 13.5.1 Method 516 13.5.2 Results 519 13.5.3 Discussion 524 13.6 Lessons Learnt are Future Work 527 13.6.1 Training Design are Method 527 13.6.2 Measurement Methods 528 13.6.3 Prior Experience with a Force-Reflective Haptic Interface 530 13.6.4 Future Work 531 13.7 Conclusions 531 References 532 14 Computer Supported Collaborative Design: Technologies, Systems, are Applications 537Weiming Shen, Jean-Paul Barthés, are Junzhou Luo 14.1 Introduction 537 14.2 History of Computer Supported Collaborative Design 538 14.2.1 CSCD 538 14.2.2 CSCD Eve: 1980s 539 14.2.3 CSCD Emergence: 1990s 541 14.2.4 CSCD: Today 542 14.3 Methods, Techniques, are Technologies 542 14.3.1 Communication, Coordination, are Cooperation 542 14.3.2 Negotiation are Conflict Resolution 546 14.3.3 Ontology are Semantic Integration 548 14.3.4 Personal Assistance are Human–Machine Interaction 548 14.3.5 Collaborative Workflows 550 14.3.6 Collaborative Virtual Workspaces are Environments 552 14.3.7 New Representation Schemes for Collaborative Design 552 14.3.8 New Visualization Systems for Collaborative Design 553 14.3.9 Product Data Management are Product Lifecycle Management Systems 553 14.3.10 Security are Privacy 554 14.4 Collaborative Design Systems 555 14.4.1 System Architectures 555 14.4.2 Web-Based/Centralized Systems 557 14.4.3 Agent-Based/Distributed Systems 558 14.4.4 Service-Oriented Systems 558 14.4.5 Collaborative Design Over Supply Chain (Virtual Enterprise) 559 14.5 Applications 560 14.6 Research Challenges are Opportunities 561 14.7 Conclusions 564 References 564 15 Support Collaboration With Roles 575Haibin Zhu, Mengchu Zhou, are Ming Hou 15.1 Introduction 575 15.2 Benefits of Roles in Collaboration 577 15.2.1 Establishing Trust in Collaboration 577 15.2.2 Establishing Dynamics 578 15.2.3 Facilitating Interaction 580 15.2.4 Support Adaptation 582 15.2.5 Information Sharing 583 15.2.6 Other Benefits 585 15.3 Role-Based Collaboration 585 15.4 E-Cargo Model 590 15.5 A Case Study with RBC are E-Cargo 592 15.6 Conclusions 595 References 595 IV Cloud are Service-Oriented Computing 599 16 Control-Based Approaches to Dynamic Resource Management In Cloud Computing 601Pengcheng Xiong, Calton Pu, Zhikui Wang, are Gueyoung Jung 16.1 Introduction 601 16.1.1 Public Cloud Computing 602 16.1.2 Dynamic Resource Management: Control-Based Approaches 602 16.2 Experimental Setup are Application Models 603 16.2.1 Test Bed are Control Architecture for a Multi-Tier Application 604 16.2.2 System Models for the Application: Open or Closed 606 16.3 Dynamic Resource Allocation Through Utilization Control 607 16.3.1 Design of Experiments 607 16.3.2 Performance of the Application Under Control 608 16.4 Performance Guarantee Through Dynamic Resource Allocation 612 16.5 Conclusions 614 References 615 17 A Petri Net Solution to Protocol-Level Mismatches In Service Composition 619Pengcheng Xiong, Mengchu Zhou, Calton Pu, are Yushun Fan 17.1 Introduction 619 17.1.1 Interface Mismatches 621 17.1.2 Protocol-Level Mismatches 622 17.2 Modeling Service Interaction with Petri Nets 624 17.2.1 Basic Petri Nets 624 17.2.2 Model Web Service Interaction with C-Net 627 17.3 Protocol-Level Mismatch Analysis 630 17.3.1 Protocol-Level Mismatch Detection 630 17.3.2 Core Algorithm 632 17.3.3 Comprehensive Solution to Protocol-Level Mismatch 634 17.4 Illustrating Examples 636 17.5 Conclusions 638 References 641 18 Service-Oriented Workflow Systems 645Wei Tan are Mengchu Zhou 18.1 Introduction 645 18.2 Workflow in SOC: State of the Art 647 18.2.1 Languages for Service Composition 647 18.2.2 Automatic Service Composition 649 18.2.3 Mediation-Aided Service Composition 649 18.2.4 Verification of Service Workflows 650 18.2.5 Decentralized Execution of Workflows 651 18.3 Open Issues 652 18.3.1 Social Network Meets Service Computing 652 18.3.2 More Practical are Flexible Service Composition 652 18.3.3 Workflow as a Service 653 18.3.4 Novel Applications 654 18.4 Conclusions 656 References 657 V Sensing, Networking, are Optimization In Robotics are Manufacturing 661 19 Rehabilitation Robotic Prostheses For Upper Extremity 663Han-Pang Huang, Yi-Hung Liu, Wei-Chen Lee, Jiun-Yih Kuan, and Tzu-Hao Huang 19.1 Introduction 663 19.2 Rehabilitation Robot Arm are Control 664 19.2.1 Mechanism Design 666 19.2.2 Dynamic Model of an Individual Joint 669 19.2.3 LTR-Observer-Based Individual Joint Dynamic Sliding Mode Control with Gravity Compensation 671 19.2.4 Simulation of the NTU Rehabilitation Robot Arm II 676 19.2.5 Experimental Results for the NTU Rehabilitation Robot Arm II 677 19.3 Rehabilitation Robot Hand 678 19.4 Stability of Neuroprosthesis 683 19.4.1 SVDD-Based Target EMG Pattern Estimation 685 19.4.2 Nontarget EMG Pattern Filtering Scheme 686 19.4.3 Illustrative Example 688 19.5 Conclusions 691 References 692 20 Accelerometer-Based Body Sensor Network (Bsn) For Medical Diagnosis Assessment are Training 699Ming-Yih Lee, Kin Fong Lei, Wen-Yen Lin, Wann-Yun Shieh, Wen-Wei Tsai, Simon H. Fu, are Chung-Hsien Kuo 20.1 Introduction 699 20.2 Body Sensor Network 700 20.3 Information Retrieved from Accelerometer 702 20.4 Recent Advances in Accelerometer-Based BSN 703 20.4.1 Tilting Angle Identification 703 20.4.2 Muscle Strength Identification 706 20.4.3 Gait Performance Identification 708 20.5 Applications of Accelerometer-Based BSN for Rehabilitation 711 20.5.1 Human Stability Evaluation System 711 20.5.2 Postural Stability Evaluation for Stroke Patients 712 20.5.3 Postural Stability Training for Stroke Patients 713 20.6 BSN Simulation System 715 20.7 Conclusions 718 References 719 21 Telepresence Robots For Medical are Homecare Applications 725Jun-Ming Lu are Yeh-Liang Hsu 21.1 Introduction 725 21.2 Surgery, Diagnosis, are Consultation 727 21.3 Rehabilitation are Therapy 728 21.4 Monitoring are Assistance 728 21.5 Communication 729 21.6 Key Factors Contributing to the Success of Telepresence Robots 729 21.6.1 Robot Factors of Acceptance 729 21.6.2 Human Factors of Acceptance 731 21.6.3 Summary 732 21.7 Conclusions 732 References 732 22 Advances In Climbing Robots 737Jizhong Xiao are Hongguang Wang 22.1 Introduction 737 22.2 Technologies for Adhering to Surfaces 738 22.2.1 Magnetic Adhesion 739 22.2.2 Vacuum Suction Techniques 740 22.2.3 Aerodynamic Attraction 744 22.2.4 Grasping Grippers 748 22.2.5 Bio-Mimetic Approaches Inspired by Climbing Animals 749 22.2.6 Emerging Technologies for Climbing Robots 753 22.3 Locomotion Techniques of Climbing Robots 755 22.4 Conclusions 759 Acknowledgment 760 References 760 23 Data Processing In Current 3D Robotic Perception Systems 767Cang YE 23.1 Introduction 767 23.1.1 Stereovision 767 23.1.2 LIDAR 769 23.1.3 Flash LIDAR Camera (FLC) 770 23.2 An LIDAR-Based Terrain Mapping are Navigation System 771 23.2.1 Overview of the Mapping are Navigation System 772 23.2.2 Terrain Mapping 773 23.2.3 Terrain Traversability Analysis 776 23.2.4 PTI Histogram for Path Planning 777 23.2.5 Experimental Results 779 23.3 FLC-Based Systems 781 23.3.1 VR-Odometry 782 23.3.2 Three-Dimensional Data Segmentation 787 23.4 Conclusions 791 Acknowledgments 792 References 792 24 Hybrid/Electric Vehicle Battery Manufacturing: The State-Of-The-Art 795Claudia P. Arenas Guerrero, Feng Ju, Jingshan Li, Guoxian Xiao, and Stephan Biller 24.1 Introduction 795 24.2 Vehicle Battery Requirements 796 24.3 Hybrid, Plug-In Hybrid, are Electric Vehicle 797 24.3.1 Hybrid Electric Vehicle 797 24.3.2 Plug-In Hybrid Electric Vehicle 797 24.3.3 Electric Vehicle 798 24.4 Battery Technology Development 798 24.5 Nickel-Metal Hydride Battery 799 24.5.1 NiMH Battery Manufacturing 800 24.5.2 NiMH Batteries in Commercial Vehicles 800 24.5.3 Cost 801 24.5.4 Recycling 801 24.6 Lithium-Ion (Li-Ion) Battery 802 24.6.1 Lithium Technology 802 24.6.2 Manufacturing Processes 803 24.6.3 Li-Ion Batteries in Commercial Vehicles 807 24.6.4 Safety 808 24.6.5 Cost 809 24.6.6 Environmental Issues 809 24.6.7 Recycling 809 24.7 Challenges 810 24.8 Conclusions 812 References 812 25 Recent Advances are Issues In Facility Location Problems 817Feng Chu, Zhanguo Zhu, are Saïıd Mammar 25.1 Introduction 817 25.2 A Capacitated Plant Location Problem with Multicommodity Flow 819 25.2.1 Problem Description 819 25.2.2 Problem Formulation 819 25.3 A Multitype Transshipment Point Location Problem with Multicommodity Flow 821 25.3.1 Problem Description 821 25.3.2 Problem Formulation 822 25.4 A Large Scale New Variant of Capacitated Clustering Problem 824 25.4.1 Problem Description 824 25.4.2 Problem Formulation 825 25.5 A Location Problem with Selective Matching are Vehicles Assignment 826 25.5.1 Problem Description 826 25.5.2 Problem Formulation 826 25.6 Competitive Facility Location are Design with Reactions of Competitors Already in the Market 828 25.6.1 Problem Description 829 25.6.2 Problem Formulation 829 25.7 Conclusions are Future Research Directions 831 References 832 Index 835

Read more less

Book SynopsisA practical overview of CMOS circuit design, this book covers the technology, analysis, and design techniques of voltage reference circuits. The design requirements covered follow modern CMOS processes, with an emphasis on low power, low voltage, and low temperature coefficient voltage reference design.Table of ContentsAbout the Authors ix Preface xi Acknowledgements xiii Nomenclature xv 1 Warm Up 1 1.1 Bipolar Junction Transistors 2 1.1.1 Differential VBE 5 1.2 Metal-Oxide Semiconductor Field-Effect Transistor 7 1.2.1 Cutoff Region 11 1.2.2 Subthreshold Conduction 11 1.2.3 Triode Region 14 1.2.4 Saturation Region 16 1.2.5 Thermal Properties 19 1.2.6 Channel Length Modulation Effect 23 1.3 Diode 23 1.4 Resistor 25 1.4.1 Dummy Element 27 1.4.2 Guard Ring 27 1.4.3 Sheet Resistance 27 1.5 Device Matching 28 1.5.1 Application of Statistics to Circuit Design 28 1.5.2 Systematic Variation 30 1.6 Simulation Models for Circuit Design 31 1.6.1 Process Variation and Typical Design 32 1.6.2 Process Corners 34 1.7 Noise 36 1.7.1 Types of Noises 36 1.7.2 Sums and Multiplications of Noises 38 1.8 Fabrication Technology 39 1.9 Book Organization 40 1.10 Exercises 42 References 46 2 Voltage Reference 49 2.1 Performance Measures 49 2.1.1 Line Regulation 51 2.1.2 Temperature Coefficient 54 2.1.3 Power Supply Rejection Ratio 56 2.1.4 Quiescent Current 59 2.1.5 Output Noise 60 2.2 Other Design Considerations 62 2.3 Summary 63 2.4 Exercises 65 References 70 3 Bandgap Voltage Reference 71 3.1 Widlar Bandgap Voltage Reference Circuit 71 3.2 Drain Voltage Equalization Current Mirror 74 3.2.1 Opamp Based β-Multiplier Bandgap Voltage Reference Circuit 76 3.2.2 Bandgap Voltage Reference Circuit 77 3.3 Major Circuit Elements 81 3.3.1 Operational Amplifier 81 3.3.2 Current Mirror 86 3.3.3 Startup Circuit 88 3.3.4 Resistor Network 93 3.3.5 Bipolar Transistor 94 3.4 Complete Layout 95 3.5 Summary 95 3.6 Exercises 96 References 101 4 Error Sources in Bandgap Voltage Reference Circuit 103 4.1 Non-Ideal Opamp 103 4.1.1 Input Offset Voltage 104 4.1.2 Limited Gain and Power Supply Rejection Ratio 112 4.1.3 Noise 113 4.2 Current Mirror Mismatch 114 4.2.1 Channel Length Modulation Effect Compensation 116 4.2.2 Cascode Current Mirror 117 4.3 Bipolar Transistor 122 4.3.1 Size Variation 122 4.3.2 Series Base Resistance 122 4.3.3 β Variation 125 4.4 Resistor Variation 126 4.5 Power Supply Variation 127 4.5.1 Pre-Regulation 132 4.6 Output Loading 135 4.7 Output Noise 138 4.8 Voltage Reference Circuit Trimming 140 4.8.1 Linked Fuse Resistor Trimming 141 4.8.2 Resistor Trimming Circuit Analysis 142 4.8.3 Modulated Trimming 146 4.8.4 Voltage Domain Trimming 148 4.8.5 Current Domain Trimming 149 4.9 Summary 149 4.10 Exercises 151 References 161 ADVANCED VOLTAGE REFERENCE CIRCUITS 5 Temperature Compensation Techniques 165 5.1 VBE − DeltaVBE Compensation 166 5.1.1 Brokaw Bandgap Voltage Reference 168 5.1.2 β-Multiplier VBE − DeltaVBE Compensation 170 5.2 Widlar PTAT Current Source and VBE Compensation 175 5.3 VGS Based Temperature Compensation 177 5.3.1 VGS Current Source 178 5.4 Summary 182 5.5 Exercises 183 References 189 6 Sub-1V Voltage Reference Circuit 191 6.1 Sub-1V Output Stage 193 6.2 Voltage Headroom in Opamp based β-multiplier Voltage Reference Circuit 195 6.2.1 Opamp with NMOS Input Stage 197 6.2.2 Local Voltage Boosting 198 6.2.3 Low Vth Transistor 198 6.2.4 Bulk-Driven Transistors 199 6.3 Sub-1V Bandgap Voltage Reference by Resistive Division 199 6.3.1 Resistive Divided VBE 202 6.3.2 Independent Biased Resistive Divided VBE 206 6.4 Peaking Current Source and VBE Compensation 209 6.5 Weighted DeltaVGS Compensation 211 6.6 Summary 214 6.7 Exercises 215 References 222 7 High Order Curvature Correction 223 7.1 Compensation Order 224 7.2 Second Order Temperature Compensation 228 7.2.1 Second Order Current Source 229 7.2.2 Current Subtraction 232 7.2.3 Current Addition 236 7.3 BJT Current Subtraction 238 7.4 Piecewise Linear Compensation 240 7.5 Sum and Difference of Sources with Similar Temperature Dependence 243 7.5.1 Difference of Voltages with Similar Temperature Dependence 244 7.5.2 Sum of Voltages with Inverted Temperature Dependence 245 7.5.3 Multi-threshold Voltages Curvature Compensated Voltage Reference 247 7.6 Summary 252 7.7 Exercises 253 References 257 8 CMOS Voltage Reference without Resistors 259 8.1 Generation of Weighted PTAT Source By Inverse Functions 260 8.1.1 Weighted Differential Circuit 260 8.1.2 Negative Impedance Converter 262 8.2 Resistorless Voltage and Current Sources 265 8.2.1 Resistorless Voltage Source 265 8.2.2 Resistorless Current Source 266 8.3 First Order Compensated Resistorless Bandgap Voltage Reference Circuit 268 8.3.1 Voltage Summation Based Resistorless Reference Circuit 269 8.3.2 Current Summation Based Resistorless Reference Circuit 270 8.4 Resistorless Sub-Bandgap Reference Circuit 270 8.4.1 The Voltage Summation Approach 271 8.4.2 CTAT Voltage Reduction 273 8.5 Summary 279 8.6 Exercises 280 References 281 A SPICE Model File 283 B SPICE Netlist of Voltage Reference Circuit 287 Index 289

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book presents recent advances in DSP to simplify, or increase the computational speed of, common signal processing operations. The topics describe clever DSP tricks of the trade not covered in conventional DSP textbooks. This material is practical, real-world, DSP tips and tricks as opposed to the traditional highly-specialized, math-intensive, research subjects directed at industry researchers and university professors. This book goes well beyond the standard DSP fundamentals textbook and presents new, but tried-and-true, clever implementations of digital filter design, spectrum analysis, signal generation, high-speed function approximation, and various other DSP functions.Trade Review“Great tips, tricks of the trade, secrets, practical shortcuts, and clever engineering solutions from seasoned signal processing professionals … Valuable signal processing techniques not taught in engineering schools .” (ITbriefing.net, 2 August 2012) Table of ContentsPreface xi Contributors xiii Part One Efficient Digital Filters 1. Lost Knowledge Refound: Sharpened FIR Filters 3 Matthew Donadio 2. Quantized FIR Filter Design Using Compensating Zeros 11 Amy Bell, Joan Carletta, and Kishore Kotteri 3. Designing Nonstandard Filters with Differential Evolution 25 Rainer Storn 4. Designing IIR Filters with a Given 3 dB Point 33 Ricardo A. Losada and Vincent Pellissier 5. Filtering Tricks for FSK Demodulation 43 David Shiung, Huei-Wen Ferng, and Richard Lyons 6. Reducing CIC Filter Complexity 51 Ricardo A. Losada and Richard Lyons 7. Precise Filter Design 59 Greg Berchin 8. Turbocharging Interpolated FIR Filters 73 Richard Lyons 9. A Most Effi cient Digital Filter: The Two-Path Recursive All-Pass Filter 85 Fred Harris 10. DC Blocker Algorithms 105 Randy Yates and Richard Lyons 11. Precise Variable-Q Filter Design 111 Shlomo Engelberg 12. Improved Narrowband Lowpass IIR Filters in Fixed-Point Systems 117 Richard Lyons 13. Improving FIR Filter Coeffi cient Precision 123 Zhi Shen Part Two Signal and Spectrum Analysis Tricks 14. Fast, Accurate Frequency Estimators 137 Eric Jacobsen, Peter Kootsookos 15. Fast Algorithms for Computing Similarity Measures in Signals 147 James McNames 16. Effi cient Multi-tone Detection 157 Vladimir Vassilevsky 17. Turning Overlap-Save into a Multiband, Mixing, Downsampling Filter Bank 165 Mark Borgerding 18. Sliding Spectrum Analysis 175 Eric Jacobsen and Richard Lyons 19. Recovering Periodically Spaced Missing Samples 189 Andor Bariska 20. Novel Adaptive IIR Filter for Frequency Estimation and Tracking 197 Li Tan and Jean Jiang 21. Accurate, Guaranteed-Stable, Sliding DFT 207 Krzysztof Duda 22. Reducing FFT Scalloping Loss Errors without Multiplication 215 Richard Lyons 23. Slope Filtering: An FIR Approach to Linear Regression 227 Clay S. Turner Part Three Fast Function Approximation Algorithms 24. Another Contender in the Arctangent Race 239 Richard Lyons 25. High-Speed Square Root Algorithms 243 Mark Allie and Richard Lyons 26. Function Approximation Using Polynomials 251 Jyri Ylöstalo 27. Efficient Approximations for the Arctangent Function 265 Sreeraman Rajan, Sichun Wang, Robert Inkol, and Alain Joyal 28. A Differentiator with a Difference 277 Richard Lyons 29. A Fast Binary Logarithm Algorithm 281 Clay S. Turner 30. Multiplier-Free Divide, Square Root, and Log Algorithms 285 François Auger, Bruno Feuvrie, Feng Li, and Zhen Luo 31. A Simple Algorithm for Fitting a Gaussian Function 297 Hongwei Guo 32. Fixed-Point Square Roots Using L-Bit Truncation 307 Abhishek Seth and Woon-Seng Gan Part Four Signal Generation Techniques 33. Recursive Discrete-Time Sinusoidal Oscillators 319 Clay S. Turner 34. Direct Digital Synthesis: A Tool for Periodic Wave Generation 337 Lionel Cordesses 35. Implementing a ΣΔ DAC in Fixed-Point Arithmetic 353 Shlomo Engelberg 36. Effi cient 8-PSK/16-PSK Generation Using Distributed Arithmetic 361 Josep Sala Part Five Assorted High-Performance DSP Techniques 39. Frequency Response Compensation with DSP 397 Laszlo Hars 40. Generating Rectangular Coordinates in Polar Coordinate Order 407 Charles Rader 41. The Swiss Army Knife of Digital Networks 413 Richard Lyons and Amy Bell 42. JPEG2000–Choices and Trade-offs for Encoders 431 Amy Bell and Krishnaraj Varma 43. Using Shift Register Sequences 441 Charles Rader 44. Efficient Resampling Implementations 449 Douglas W. Barker 45. Sampling Rate Conversion in the Frequency Domain 459 Guoan Bi and Sanjit K. Mitra 46. Enhanced-Convergence Normalized LMS Algorithm 469 Maurice Givens Index 475

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book provides an overview of technologies to maximize the quality of user experience for mobile, data-centric applications.Table of ContentsPREFACE xiii ABOUT THE AUTHORS xix I INTRODUCTION AND GENERAL OBSERVATIONS 1 1 TECHNOLOGIES SUPPORTING MOBILE DATA 3 1.1 Introduction / 3 1.2 Computer Communication Networks / 5 1.3 IP Networks / 9 1.4 Cellular Data Networks / 12 1.5 Mobile Applications / 14 2 MOBILE DATA ECOSYSTEM 17 2.1 Introduction / 17 2.2 Mobile Data Ecosystem / 17 2.3 Mobile Data Growth / 22 2.4 Where is the Bottleneck? / 23 2.5 Impact of Mobile Data Growth on the Ecosystem / 25 3 AN OVERVIEW OF TECHNIQUES FOR BANDWIDTH OPTIMIZATION 29 3.1 Introduction / 29 3.2 Network Model / 30 3.3 Object Caching / 32 3.4 Object Compression / 34 3.5 Packet Compression / 35 3.6 Flow Sharing / 37 3.7 Content Transformation / 40 3.8 Just-in-Time Transmission / 41 3.9 Rate Control / 42 3.10 Service Differentiation / 43 4 AN OVERVIEW OF TECHNIQUES FOR COST REDUCTION 45 4.1 Introduction / 45 4.2 Infrastructure Sharing / 47 4.3 Virtualization / 48 4.4 Consolidation / 49 4.5 IT Usage in Networks / 52 II TECHNIQUES FOR MOBILE NETWORK OPERATORS 55 5 BANDWIDTH OPTIMIZATION AND COST REDUCTION IN THE RADIO ACCESS NETWORK 57 5.1 Introduction / 57 5.2 Upgrading the RAN / 58 5.3 Leveraging Additional Bandwidth / 65 5.4 Bandwidth Management / 68 5.5 Nontechnical Approaches / 72 6 BANDWIDTH OPTIMIZATION AND COST REDUCTION IN BACKHAUL AND CORE NETWORKS 75 6.1 Overview of Backhaul and Core Networks / 75 6.2 Technology Upgrade / 79 6.3 Traffic Offload / 80 6.4 Compression / 80 6.5 Transformation / 81 6.6 Caching / 83 6.7 Consolidation in Core Networks / 87 6.8 Network Function Virtualization / 88 6.9 Cost Reduction of the Supporting Infrastructure / 90 7 CONSUMER-ORIENTED DATA MONETIZATION SERVICES 91 7.1 Mobile Network Operator Differentiators for Consumer Services / 92 7.2 Single Sign-on Service / 93 7.3 Privacy Service / 98 7.4 Content Customization Services / 101 7.5 Location-Based Services / 103 7.6 Phone-Based Commerce / 106 7.7 Other Services / 107 8 ENTERPRISE-ORIENTED DATA MONETIZATION SERVICES 109 8.1 Model for Mobile Network Operator Services to the Enterprise / 110 8.2 Mobile Network Operator Differentiators for Enterprise Services / 111 8.3 Caching and Content Distribution / 114 8.4 Mobile Transformation / 115 8.5 Fog Computing / 116 8.6 Location-Based Services / 118 8.7 Secure Hypervisor Services / 120 9 APPLICATION SERVICE PROVIDER-ORIENTED DATA MONETIZATION SERVICES 123 9.1 Mobile Network Operator Differentiators for Application Service Providers / 124 9.2 Caching and Content Distribution / 126 9.3 Fog Computing / 127 9.4 Information Aggregation / 129 9.5 Information Augmentation / 130 9.6 Historical Information-Based Planning / 131 III TECHNIQUES FOR ENTERPRISES AND APPLICATION DEVELOPERS 135 10 AN INTRODUCTION TO MOBILE APPLICATIONS 137 10.1 Anatomy of Mobile Applications / 138 10.2 Types of Mobile Applications / 139 10.3 Developing for Multiple Platforms / 141 10.4 Operating System Version Management / 143 10.5 Limited Resources / 144 10.6 General Application Development Considerations / 145 11 POWER EFFICIENCY FOR MOBILE APPLICATIONS 147 11.1 Model for Power Consumption / 148 11.2 Duty Cycling / 150 11.3 Power Mode Management / 151 11.4 Communication and Computation Clustering / 151 11.5 Efficient Resource Usage / 153 11.6 Best Practices for Application Power Efficiency / 154 12 BANDWIDTH EFFICIENCY FOR MOBILE APPLICATIONS 159 12.1 Preloading / 160 12.2 Communication Clustering / 160 12.3 Context-Aware Communication / 161 12.4 Disconnected Operation / 162 12.5 Caching / 163 12.6 Compression / 163 12.7 Control Traffic Implications / 164 12.8 Best Practices for Bandwidth Efficiency / 165 13 MOBILE DATA ISSUES FOR THE ENTERPRISE 171 13.1 Mobile-Related Issues for the Enterprise / 172 13.2 Security Issues / 173 13.3 Backward Compatibility / 180 13.4 Infrastructure Issues / 182 14 RELATED TOPICS 185 14.1 Machine-to-Machine Communications / 185 14.2 Internet of Things / 186 14.3 Participatory Sensing / 187 14.4 Mobile Transformation of Business / 188 14.5 Software-Defined Networks / 189 14.6 Mobile First Philosophy / 190 14.7 Network Analytics / 191 14.8 Conclusions / 192 REFERENCES 193 INDEX 199

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive resource to designing and constructing analog photonic links capable of high RF performance Fundamentals of Microwave Photonics provides a comprehensive description of analog optical links from basic principles to applications. The book is organized into four parts.Table of ContentsPreface xi Acknowledgments xiii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Enabling Technological Advances and Benefits of Fiber Optic Links 6 1.2 Analog Versus Digital Fiber Optic Links 13 1.3 Basic Fiber Optic Components 18 1.4 Analog Links Within RF Systems 27 References 28 2 Analog Performance Metrics 33 2.1 The Scattering Matrix 34 2.2 Noise Figure 36 2.3 Dynamic Range 39 2.3.1 Compression Dynamic Range 39 2.3.2 Spurious-Free Dynamic Range 43 2.4 Cascade Analysis 52 References 54 3 Sources of Noise in Fiber Optic Links 57 3.1 Basic Concepts 58 3.2 Thermal Noise 62 3.3 Shot Noise 69 3.4 Lasers 74 3.5 Optical Amplifiers 93 3.5.1 Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifiers 94 3.5.2 Raman and Brillouin Fiber Amplifiers 108 3.5.3 Semiconductor Optical Amplifiers 112 3.6 Photodetection 113 References 117 4 Distortion in Fiber Optic Links 124 4.1 Introduction 124 4.2 Distortion in Electrical-to-Optical Conversion 130 4.3 Optical Amplifier Distortion 134 4.4 Photodetector Distortion 138 4.4.1 Photodetector Distortion Measurement Systems 141 4.4.2 Photodetector Nonlinear Mechanisms 144 References 161 5 Propagation Effects 166 5.1 Introduction 166 5.2 Double Rayleigh Scattering 168 5.3 RF Phase in Fiber Optic Links 170 5.4 Chromatic Dispersion 173 5.5 Stimulated Brillouin Scattering 184 5.6 Stimulated Raman Scattering 190 5.7 Cross-Phase Modulation 193 5.8 Four-Wave Mixing 198 5.9 Polarization Effects 200 References 205 6 External Intensity Modulation with Direct Detection 212 6.1 Concept and Link Architectures 213 6.2 Signal Transfer and Gain 216 6.3 Noise and Performance Metrics 233 6.3.1 General Equations 234 6.3.2 Shot-Noise-Limited Equations 242 6.3.3 RIN-Limited Equations 247 6.3.4 Trade Space Analysis 250 6.4 Photodetector Issues and Solutions 251 6.5 Linearization Techniques 260 6.6 Propagation Effects 264 References 270 7 External Phase Modulation with Interferometric Detection 273 7.1 Introduction 273 7.2 Signal Transfer and Gain 275 7.3 Noise and Performance Metrics 287 7.4 Linearization Techniques 295 7.5 Propagation Effects 299 7.6 Other Techniques for Optical Phase Demodulation 304 References 308 8 Other Analog Optical Modulation Methods 312 8.1 Direct Laser Modulation 313 8.1.1 Direct Intensity Modulation 314 8.1.2 Direct Frequency Modulation 319 8.2 Suppressed Carrier Modulation with a Low Biased MZM 321 8.3 Single-Sideband Modulation 328 8.4 Sampled Analog Optical Links 330 8.4.1 RF Downconversion Via Sampled Analog Optical Links 333 8.4.2 Mitigation of Stimulated Brillouin Scattering with Sampled Links 336 8.5 Polarization Modulation 340 References 344 9 High Current Photodetectors 351 9.1 Photodetector Compression 352 9.2 Effects Due to Finite Series Resistance 355 9.3 Thermal Limitations 359 9.4 Space-Charge Effects 365 9.5 Photodetector Power Conversion Efficiency 370 9.6 State of the Art for Power Photodetectors 376 References 378 10 Applications and Trends 383 10.1 Point-to-Point Links 384 10.2 Analog Fiber Optic Delay Lines 393 10.3 Photonic-Based RF Signal Processing 398 10.3.1 Wideband Channelization 399 10.3.2 Instantaneous Frequency Measurement 401 10.3.3 Downconversion 404 10.3.4 Phased-Array Beamforming 405 10.4 Photonic Methods for RF Signal Generation 407 10.5 Millimeter-Wave Photonics 415 10.6 Integrated Microwave Photonics 419 References 427 Appendix I Units and Physical Constants 446 Appendix II Electromagnetic Radiation 450 Appendix III Power, Voltage and Current for a Sinusoid 453 Appendix IV Trigonometric Functions 455 Appendix V Fourier Transforms 458 Appendix VI Bessel Functions 460 Index 463

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe Fundamental Science in Computer Science Is the Science of Thought For the first time, the collective genius of the great 18th-century German cognitive philosopher-scientists Immanuel Kant, Georg Wilhelm Friedrich Hegel, and Arthur Schopenhauer have been integrated into modern 21st-century computer science. In contrast to the languishing mainstream of Artificial Intelligence, this book takes the human thought system as its model, resulting in an entirely different approach. This book presents the architecture of a thoroughly and broadly educated human mind as translated into modern software engineering design terms. The result is The Autonomous System, based on dynamic logic and the architecture of the human mind. With its human-like intelligence, it is capable of rational thought, reasoning, and an understanding of itself and its tasks. A system of thoughts must always have an architectural structure. Arthur Schopenhauer, Table of ContentsPreface xiii Introduction xix 1. The Architecture of the Autonomous System 1 1.1 Introduction, 1 1.2 The System Constellation, 1 1.3 System Constellation Architectural Overview, 3 1.4 The Constellation Architecture, 5 1.5 The Software Systems Comprising the Constellation, 8 2. The Architectural Methodology 22 2.1 Articulation of the Requirements and Design, 23 2.2 System Development and Integration Testing, 30 2.3 Phase I: The Idea, 33 2.4 Making Rational Judgments, 36 2.5 Phase II: The Concept, 38 2.6 Using JPL-STD-D-4000 for System Requirements, 39 3. The Architecture of the Will System 41 3.1 The Search for Truth, 41 3.2 The Nature of the Will, 45 3.3 Das Ding an Sich, 45 3.4 The Will as a System, 49 3.5 The Architecture of the Will System, 51 3.6 The Interfaces of the Will System, 53 3.7 The Subsystems of the Will System, 54 4. The Architecture of the Reason System 62 4.1 The Reason and Ethics, 62 4.2 The Nature of the Reason, 64 4.3 The Reason as a System, 65 4.4 The Architecture of the Reason System, 65 4.5 The External Interfaces of the Reason, 67 4.6 The Subsystems of the Reason, 68 5. The Architecture of the Intellect System 74 5.1 The Intellect as a System, 74 5.2 The Nature of the Intellect, 77 5.3 The Intellect as a System, 79 5.4 The Subsystems of the Intellect System, 80 5.5 The External Interfaces of the Intellect System, 81 6. The Architecture of the Presentation System 83 6.1 The Presentation System, 84 6.2 The Presentation as a System, 86 6.3 The Subsystems of the Presentation, 86 7. The Architecture of the Understanding System 90 7.1 The Understanding as a System, 92 7.2 The External Interfaces of the Understanding, 94 8. The Architecture of the Sensory System 98 8.1 The Sensory System, 98 8.2 The Architecture of the Sensory System, 100 8.3 The Phenomenon Subsystem, 101 8.4 A Historical Perspective on Languages, 104 8.5 The Workings of the Noumenon, 105 9. The Architecture of the Decision System 107 9.1 The Process of Decision Making, 107 9.2 Understanding the Decision Process, 111 9.3 The Decision as a System, 113 9.4 The Subsystems of the Decision System, 114 9.5 The Interfaces of the Decision System, 121 9.6 The Building of Preferences, 121 10. The Architecture of the Thought System 124 10.1 The "Movers" of the Thought Process, 125 10.2 The Pursuit of Thinking, 127 10.3 The Nexus Cogitationis, 128 10.4 The Subsystems of the Thought System, 130 10.5 Initialization Process of the Autonomous System, 136 Epilogue 142 Endnotes 144 Index 155

Read more less

Book SynopsisA real-world guide to practical applications of ground penetrating radar (GPR) The nondestructive nature of ground penetrating radar makes it an important and popular method of subsurface imaging, but it is a highly specialized field, requiring a deep understanding of the underlying science for successful application. Introduction to Ground Penetrating Radar: Inverse Scattering and Data Processing provides experienced professionals with the background they need to ensure precise data collection and analysis. Written to build upon the information presented in more general introductory volumes, the book discusses the fundamental mathematical, physical, and engineering principles upon which GPR is built. Real-world examples and field data provide readers an accurate view of day-to-day GPR use. Topics include: 2D scattering for dielectric and magnetic targets 3D scattering equations and migration algorithms Host medium characterTable of ContentsForeword xiii Acknowledgments xvii About the Author xix Contributors xxi 1 Introduction to GPR Prospecting 1 1.1 What Is a GPR? 1 1.2 GPR Systems and GPR Signals 4 1.3 GPR Application Fields 5 1.4 Measurement Configurations, Bands, and Polarizations 6 1.5 GPR Data Processing 8 2 Characterization of the Host Medium 10 2.1 The Characteristics of the Host Medium 10 2.2 The Measure of the Propagation Velocity in a Masonry 11 2.3 The Measure of the Propagation Velocity in a Homogeneous Soil 13 2.3.1 Interfacial Data in Common Offset Mode with a Null Offset: The Case of a Point-like Target 13 2.3.2 Interfacial Data in Common Offset Mode with a Null Offset: The Case of a Circular Target 17 2.3.3 Interfacial Data in Common Offset Mode with a Non-null Offset: The Case of a Point-like Target 18 2.3.4 Noninterfacial Data in Common Offset Mode with a Null Offset: The Case of a Point-like Target 22 2.3.5 Interfacial Data in Common Midpoint (CMP) Mode 25 2.4 Lossy, Magnetic, and Dispersive Media 27 Questions 31 3 GPR Data Sampling: Frequency and Time Steps 32 3.1 Stepped Frequency GPR Systems: The Problem of the Aliasing and the Frequency Step 32 3.2 Shape and Thickness of the GPR Pulses 36 3.3 Stepped Frequency GPR Systems: The Problem of the Demodulation and the Frequency Step 40 3.4 Aliasing and Time Step for Pulsed GPR Systems 45 Questions 47 4 The 2d Scattering Equations for Dielectric Targets 48 4.1 Preliminary Remarks 48 4.2 Derivation of the Scattering Equations Without Considering the Effect of the Antennas 51 4.3 Calculation of the Incident Field Radiated by a Filamentary Current 61 4.4 The Plane Wave Spectrum of an Electromagnetic Source in a Homogeneous Space 61 4.5 The Insertion of the Source Characteristics in the Scattering Equations 65 4.6 The Far Field in a Homogeneous Lossless Space in Terms of Plane Wave Spectrum 69 4.7 The Effective Length of an Electromagnetic Source in a Homogeneous Space 73 4.8 The Insertion of the Receiver Characteristics in the Scattering Equations 75 Questions 77 5 The 2d Scattering Equations for Magnetic Targets 79 5.1 The Scattering Equations with Only Magnetic Anomalies 79 5.2 The Contribution of the x-Component of the Fitzgerald Vector 83 5.3 The Contribution of the z-Component of the Fitzgerald Vector 88 5.4 The Joined Contribution of Both the x- and z-Components of the Fitzgerald Vector 93 5.5 The Case with Both Dielectric and Magnetic Anomalies 94 Questions 95 6 ILL-posedness and Nonlinearity 96 6.1 Electromagnetic Inverse Scattering 96 6.2 Ill-Posedness 97 6.3 Nonlinearity 97 6.4 The Ill-Posedness of the Inverse Scattering Problem 100 6.5 The Nonlinearity of the Inverse Scattering Problem 103 Questions 103 7 Extraction of the Scattered Field Data From the GPR Data 105 7.1 Zero Timing 105 7.2 Muting of Interface Contributions 106 7.3 The Differential Configuration 110 7.4 The Background Removal 111 Questions 115 8 the Born Approximation 116 8.1 The Classical Born Approximation 116 8.2 The Born Approximation in the Presence of Magnetic Targets 119 8.3 Weak and Nonweak Scattering Objects 120 Questions 121 9 Diffraction Tomography 122 9.1 Introduction to Diffraction Tomography 122 9.2 Diffraction Tomography for Dielectric Targets 123 9.3 Diffraction Tomography for Dielectric Targets Seen Under a Limited View Angle 130 9.4 The Effective Maximum and Minimum View Angle 140 9.5 Horizontal Resolution 142 9.6 Vertical Resolution 145 9.7 Spatial Step 147 9.8 Frequency Step 148 9.9 Time Step 149 9.10 The Effect of a Non-null Height of the Observation Line 150 9.11 The Effect of the Radiation Characteristics of the Antennas 156 9.12 DT Relationship in the Presence of Magnetic Targets 158 9.13 DT Relationship for a Differential Configuration 160 9.14 DT Relationship in the Presence of Background Removal 163 Questions 168 10 Two-dimensional Migration Algorithms 169 10.1 Migration in the Frequency Domain 169 10.2 Migration in the Time Domain (Raffaele Persico and Raffaele Solimene) 175 Questions 181 11 Three-dimensional Scattering Equations 182 Lorenzo Lo Monte, Raffaele Persico, and Raffaele Solimene 11.1 Scattering in Three Dimensions: Redefinition of the Main Symbols 182 11.2 The Scattering Equations in 3D 184 11.3 Three-Dimensional Green’s Functions 184 11.4 The Incident Field 185 11.5 Homogeneous 3D Green’s Functions 187 11.6 The Plane Wave Spectrum of a 3D Homogeneous Green’s Fucntion 192 11.7 Half-Space Green’s Functions 197 Questions 204 12 Three-dimensional Diffraction Tomography 205 12.1 Born Approximation and DT in 3D 205 12.2 Ideal and Limited-View-Angle 3D Retrievable Spectral Sets 210 12.3 Spatial Step and Transect 212 12.4 Horizontal Resolution (Raffaele Persico and Raffaele Solimene) 213 12.5 Vertical Resolution, Frequency and Time Steps 217 Questions 218 13 Three-dimensional Migration Algorithms 219 13.1 3D Migration Formulas in the Frequency Domain 219 13.2 3D Migration Formulas in the Time Domain 222 13.3 3D Versus 2D Migration Formulas in the Time Domain 226 Questions 228 14 The Singular Value Decomposition 229 14.1 The Method of Moments 229 14.2 Reminders About Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors 231 14.3 The Singular Value Decomposition 234 14.4 The Study of the Inverse Scattering Relationship by Means of the SVD 238 Questions 241 15 Numerical and Experimental Examples 242 15.1 Examples with Regard to the Measure of the Propagation Velocity 242 15.1.1 Common Offset Interfacial Data with Null Offset on a Homogeneous Soil 242 15.1.2 Common Offset Interfacial Data on a Wall, Neglecting the Offset Between the Antennas 245 15.1.3 Interfacial Common Offset Data on a Homogeneous Soil: The Effect on the Offset Between the Antennas 247 15.1.4 Noninterfacial Common Offset Data with a Null Offset Between the Antennas 249 15.1.5 Common Midpoint Data 250 15.2 Exercises on Spatial Step and Horizontal Resolution 252 15.3 Exercises on Frequency Step and Vertical Resolution 264 15.4 Exercises on the Number of Trial Unknowns 271 15.5 Exercises on Spectral and Spatial Contents 274 15.6 Exercises on the Effect of the Height of the Observation Line 280 15.7 Exercises on the Effect of the Extent of the Investigation Domain 284 15.8 Exercises on the Effects of the Background Removal 295 15.9 2D and 3D Migration Examples with a Single Set and Two Crossed Sets of B-Scans (Marcello Ciminale, Giovanni Leucci, Loredana Matera, and Raffaele Persico) 304 15.10 2D and 3D Inversion Examples (Ilaria Catapano and Raffaele Persico) 311 Appendices 327 Appendix A (Raffaele Persico and Raffaele Solimene) 329 Appendix B 334 Appendix C 335 Appendix D 337 Appendix E 340 Appendix F (Raffaele Persico and Raffaele Solimene) 346 Appendix G: Answers to Questions 349 References 358 Index 365

Read more less